Home

HP E1406A Command Module User`s Manual and SCPI

1. 0 O 0 1 1 1 2 2 QUE QUE 3 4 MAV MAV 5 5 ESB ESB Sy 6 RQS 7 OPR OPR STB SRE SRE Figure 4 6 Status Byte Register The Status Byte can be read using either the STB common command or by doing a SICL ireadstb function call The ireadstb function reads the Status Byte from the device specified The Status Byte Summary bit actually appears in bit 6 RQS of the Status Byte When bit 6 is set it generates an SRQ interrupt This interrupt is a low level HP IB message that signals the controller that at least one instrument on the bus requires attention There are some subtle differences between STB and ireadstb You can use either method to read the state of bits 0 5 and bit 7 Bit 6 is treated differently depending on whether you use STB or ireadstb With ireadstb bit 6 returns RQS request for service which is cleared after the first ireadstb STB returns the MSS master state summary This is the Summary bit of the Status Byte Register It is like a condition bit and will return to zero only when all enabled bits in the Status Byte are zero In general use ireadstb inside interrupt service routines not STB Note In an SRQ interrupt service routine you must clear the Event Register which caused the SRQ for example STAT QUES EVEN STAT OPER
2. E gt O 1 HP IB SELECT CODE 7 Paco os ESET ABRA B550 talle 8880 8 _ BAB ELELEE aia BB ARA aH PC w HP IB Interface RS 232 Keyboard E1406 FIG20 AROSA A AMAHA Sees peel ARRAS RAR RRS ARAA A BABA BAAR mnnn MAA Goer AR A AA Figure 1 1 VXlbus System 16 HP E1406A Command Module Overview Chapter 1 Command Module Physical Description Faceplate Annunciators The HP E1406A Command Module occupies one C size mainframe slot The faceplate has annunciators clock and trigger connectors interface ports and extraction levers that are described below There are four annunciators on the HP E1406A faceplate which show the following Failed Shows that the command module has failed its power on self test or has stopped working at some point in time SYSFAIL Shows that the SYSFAIL line on the VXlbus backplane is being asserted by the command module when it fails Access Shows that the command module is accessing or being accessed by the VXlbus backplane Ready Shows that the command module is in the VXlbus normal operation state a eg annunciator y Dy Cl
3. X O 0 AN D O aa C EV EN Output Queue EXT 1 23E 04 Prompt PEORON Status Byte Standard Event 9 9 H zl 1 1 2 2 oe ds N s QUE QUE E O iS MAV MAV oO o ESB ESB j S 2 D 9 aa RQS OPR OPR j gt Condition Enable EV EN Standard Operation Status NE HN gt gt m A oO m mA P NOTE a eS C Condition Register iP a Po eS EV Event Register 7 EN Enable Register hh c C EV EN Figure 4 5 Minimum Required Status Register System The Standard Operation Status and Questionable Data Groups are 16 bits wide while Status Byte and Standard Event Groups are only 8 bits wide In all 16 bit groups the most significant bit bit 15 is not used Bit 15 always returns a zero The commands that set and query bits in the Status Registers all use decimal integers For example you send ESE 4 to set bit 2 of the Standard Event Enable Register Similarly a response of 8 to the query ESE indicates that bit 3 is set The remainder of this chapter explains each status group in detail 106 Triggering and System Status Chapter 4 Status Byte Group As Figure 4 6 indicates the Status Byte is used to summarize information from all the other status groups The Status Byte differs from the other groups in the way you read it and how its summary bit is processed Status Byte
4. Figure 4 9 Questionable Data Status Group 110 Triggering and System Status Chapter 4 Status System Programming Examples Handling SRQs This section contains two example programs that use the status system and common commands to monitor when data is available from an instrument and when an error has occurred Both programming examples are written in C and use the Standard Instrument Control Library SICL for I O operations The example programs use SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands to communicate with the status system Thus the instruments must either be message based or have a SCPI interpreter such as an HP E1406A Command Module or the SICL iscpi The following is a general procedure for handling SRQs e Define the SRQ handler to do the following Read the Status Byte using ireadstb ireadstb returns the RQS request for service bit in bit 6 of the status byte After issuing an ireadstb RQS is cleared indicating that the Service Request is being acknowledged A new SRQ will not be issued unless RQS is cleared Using STB will return the Master State Summary in bit 6 and does not affect RQS therefore this should not be used in a SRQ handler Check the status byte to determine which status group s requires service For each status group that requires service read the Event Register of that status group to determine what caused the SRQ to be generated It is
5. 258 HP E1406A Error Messages Appendix B Appendix C HP E1406A Command Module A16 Address Space About This Appendix E1300 E1405 E1406 FFFFFF 1g 00000 6 20000016 IFO000 6 00000016 ADDRESS MAP A24 ADDRESS SPACE Many Hewlett Packard VXIbus devices are register based devices which do not support the VXIbus word serial protocol When an SCPI command is sent to a register based device the HP E1406A Command Module parses the command and programs the device at the register level Register based programming is a series of reads and writes directly to the device registers This increases throughput since it eliminates command parsing This appendix contains an address map of A16 address space in the command module It shows how to determine the base address and register offset for register based devices mapped into A16 space Refer to the individual plug in module manuals for details on device is programming at the register level REGISTER E AL 16 BIT WORDS y 3Er6 3C16 20000016 J o o o o IFCO00 16 20000046 o o A16 0E16 REGISTER ADDR Oc cee A ADDRESS roe SPACE 18 0816 0616 IF000046 IFCOOO 6 04 2 080 768 N F 8 16 0016 Register Map Base Address IFCO00 g logical address 64 g Register Address Base Address Register Offset or 2 0
6. Annunciator Description mon The instrument is in monitor mode busy The instrument is executing a command err An error has occurred see Reading Error Messages below srq A service request has occurred Reading Error Whenever the screen is showing the err annunciator an error has occurred Messages forthe instrument being monitored You can read the error message although doing so cancels monitor mode To read an error message type SYST ERR followed by pressing the Return key The error message will be displayed in the bottom line of the Text Output Area To see if another error was logged repeat the SYST ERR command by pressing UTILS RCL_PREV then Return After you have read all the error messages executing the SYST ERR command causes the screen to show 0 No error After reading the error message s press the f1 key to return to monitor mode Executing Commands From the terminal interface you can type and execute IEEE 488 2 common commands and SCPI commands for the instrument presently selected by the Select an instrument menu However you cannot execute a command when the screen is requesting that you input information This is particularly useful for accessing functions not available in an instrument s menu For example assume you want to program the HP E1411B 5 Digit Multimeter for 10 DC voltage measurements To specify 10 measurements you must type in the necessary command since
7. Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric DIAG NRAM ADDR none Comments e Be certain that address specifies the starting address of the area in user RAM allocated using DIAG NRAM CREate where you stored the A24 A32 address allocation table data Tables must start on an even address Note that DIAG NRAM CREate allocates RAM for the table with an even starting address lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal HQ or binary B formats Setting address to O prevents the parameters defined by the table from being invoked when the system is rebooted however the table remains in user RAM For more information see Reserving A24 A32 Address Space on page 48 Related Commands DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG NRAM ADDRress DIAG DOWNload VXI CONF MTABle Example Link an A24 A32 Address Allocation Table to the Processor DIAG NRAM CRE lt size gt Allocate space for table in user RAM DIAG BOOT Reboot system to complete the allocation DIAG NRAM ADDR Get starting address of table RAM segment DIAG DOWN lt address gt lt data gt Download data into table VXI CONF MTAB lt address gt Link table to processor DIAG BOOT Reboot system to implement table 200 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 CONFigure MTABle Example CONFigure NUMBer Comments CONFigure NUMBer MEXTender Comments QUERy Parameters Comm
8. Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt year gt numeric Must round to 1980 to 2079 none lt month gt numeric Must round to 1 to 12 none lt day gt numeric Must round to 1 through last day of none month e The upper limit on the day parameter is dependent on the month parameter and may be dependent on the year parameter in the case of a leap year e Related Commands SYST TIME SYST TIME SYST DATE e RST Condition RST does not change the setting of the calendar Set the System Date SYST DATE 1996 06 08 Set June 8 1996 SYSTem DATE MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN returns When no parameter is sent the current system date in the form YYYY MM DD where YYYY can be the year 1980 through 2079 MM can be the month 1 through 12 and DD can be the day 1 through 31 When parameters are sent the minimum or maximum allowable values for each of the three parameters The parameter count must be three Query the System Date SYST DATE input values of year month day Ask for current date Read back date Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 181 ERRor system ERRor queries the system s error queue The response format is lt error number gt lt error description string gt Comments e As system errors are detected they are placed in the System instrument error queue The error queue is first in first out This means that if several error messag
9. 126 COMMunicate SERial n STORG o 666044 65 4 ee RR RR E E 126 DOWNload CHECked MADDress 127 DOWNload CHECKed SADDESE ios RRA ES 129 DOWN load MAD Dress o a s a ee a Se da RR RS 131 DOWNload SADDress occ cee ee DEER OEE ED EERE HED EHS 132 DRAM AVADE occ oe AE ek Ae ROS EA 133 DRAWVCREMG 144226464 60 bbe ded bee oh ee ORS Se eS A 134 DRAVEUCRESMES siii Ae ee A Orde Od 134 DRIVE aE eh ae hee AAA ee Oke RES 135 RIL Op bes bea we WSS ERE PS ES SOS Pee Ee Ss 135 DRIVe OAD 25 de dnd ORD ob Rw GR eh ee Fhe ee todo 136 DRIVE LOAD CHECKS 2a BRERA RH EM aa 136 PROMCAVAUADIE 4 44 hE HS GSS SHREDS RADA A 157 PROM CREE eek 4 ak eR A RRA ROR SO we aak 137 PROM CREM alar EARS RA SASH A BESS RO 137 PROBESTZES as AA EE AAA A ESS SO 138 IN Terai AC TAIE oo a cpt ka eh ae E he ae ee Re hd ah oh 138 IN Tempt PRIOD 6222s ee ea bok b da be od ee FON ERE EEE SD 139 WNTerop PRG il oc ae ke ee OR Ee oe aN ERE CRS SS a 139 IN Tempe RESPONSE 024 4 6 ee A AES oO OES GEG ROR 140 AN TecmpeseVuplel seso e ood daewoo Se Pode be doe 141 IN TermuptSE MPR sacac ocak ed RRA CRS ae e OER ORs 141 NRAM ADDRES 66k ok weed eS Ree EER OES ORE ED Oe Ewe OS 142 NRAM CREASE 2 5 6 p4 0 4 2 dt Robe oS dd OO ES 142 NRAWNICCREMG 7420000 6 ORR KARE EAA AAA A e OREO Eo 143 PERE ira LGW a dk SEE e ORR EO 143 PORE eh ay op pee Be are de Ge ead He ede de Sea eee He Be ee oe ecg we OS 144 RDISKADD eS ici ir A eA G
10. Value Definition ON RTS Line is asserted OFF RTS Line is unasserted STANdard RTS will be asserted when the serial interface is ready to send output data Data will be sent if the connected device asserts CTS and DSR IBFull While the input buffer is not yet at the STOP threshold RTS is asserted When the input buffer reaches the STOP threshold RTS will be unasserted e DIAG BOOT COLD will set RTS to ON e Related Commands SYST COMM SER n CONT DTR SYST COMM SER n REC PACE THR STARt SYST COMM SER n REC PACE THR STOP e RST Condition No change Unassert the RTS Line SYST COMM SERO CONT RTS OFF SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 7 CONTrol RTS returns the current setting for RTS line control Check the Setting of RTS Control SYST COMM SERO CONT RTS enter statement Statement enters the string ON OFF STAN or IBF 170 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BAUD Parameters Comments Example COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BAUD Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BAUD lt baud_rate gt sets the baud rate for the serial port Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt baud_rate gt numeric 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 none 19200 MIN MAX e Attempting to set baud_rate to other than those values shown will result in an Error 222 Data out of range e
11. These are Masks for the Standard Event Status Register all bits start at bit O define QRY_ERR_MASK 0x04 query error bit 2 define DEV_ERR_MASK 0x08 device dependent error bit 3 define EXE_ERR_MASK 0x10 execution error bit 4 define CMD_ERR_MASK 0x20 command error bit 5 This is the SRQ handler to check for Message Available MAV or any error conditions void srq_hdir INST id unsigned char stb char buf 255 int esr int errnum char errmsg 100 read the status byte to determine what caused the SRQ Note use ireadstb instead of STB because we want to clear RQS instead of reading the MSS bit in the status byte ireadstb id amp stb check if MAV caused the SRQ if MAV_MASK stb amp MAV_MASK message is available so read in the result iscanf id Yt buf printf s buf else check if Standard Event Status if ESR_MASK stb amp ESR_MASk read the standard event register to determine what caused the ESR summary bit to be set This is necessary in order to get future SRQ s from the Standard Event status group ipromptt id ESR n Y d n amp esr check if an error caused the summary bit to get set if CMD_ERR_MASK esr 8 CMD_ERR_MASK EXE_ERR_MASK esr amp EXE_ERR_MASK DEV_ERR_MASK esr amp DEV_ERR_MASK QRY_ERR_MASK esr am
12. WIN Bit 5 EXE Status Byte Execution Error LOGICAL OR CME Command Error User Request URQ 5 6 Power On PON 7 Figure 4 7 Standard Event Status Group Example commands using Standard Event Registers ESE 48 Generate a Summary bit on execution or command errors ESE Query the state of the Standard Event s Enable Register ESR Query the state of the Standard Event s Event Register 108 Triggering and System Status Chapter 4 Standard Operation The Standard Operation Status Group provides information about the Status Group state of the measurement systems in an instrument This status group is accessed through the STATus subsystem Standard Operation Status includes a Condition Register Event Register and an Enable Register As a beginner you will rarely need to use this group Figure 4 8 illustrates the structure of Standard Operation Status STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle Calibrating 0 Setting Ranging 2 Sweeping 5 Measuring l Waiting for TRIG 5 W
13. Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 149 ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate Example ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce Parameters Comments Example ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce Comments Example OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate returns the current logic level of the selected ECLTrg trigger line e ECLTrg lt n gt represents either ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 Determine Current State of ECLTrg1 OUTP ECLT1 LEV enter statement Ask for level Return state of trigger line OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce lt source gt selects which source will drive the selected trigger line Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric Oori N A lt source gt discrete INT EXT NONE none e INT allows the selected trigger line to be driven by OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel commands e EXT allows the selected trigger line to be driven by the HP E1406A Command Module s Trig In front panel SMB connector OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt STATe must be ON for the source to drive the trigger line Setting STATe OFF does not change the source so the signal driving the line is still present Setting STATe back ON sets the source to NONE and de asserts the line Related Commands OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt STATe OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt LEVell IMMediate e RST Condition OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce NONE Select the Trig In Connector to Drive ECLTrg0 OUTP ECLTO SOUR EXT OUTPut ECLTrg
14. Cards which are part of a combined instrument such as a switchbox or scanning voltmeter always return the same manufacturer s comments as the first card in the instrument Information in the other fields correspond to the card for which the logical address was specified This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use the VXI CONF INF and VXI CONF HIER commands Related Commands VXI CONF DLADoress VXI CONF DNUMber VXI CONF INFormation VXI CONF HIERarchy Query the device list for the System Instrument dimension string 1000 String size large in case of multiple device list VXI CONF DLIS 0 Ask for the device list for the System instrument enter string Enter return data into string Example response data no error 0 1 4095 1301 0 0 HYB NONE H00000000 H00000000 READY SYSTEM INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 0 Example response data with error 255 0 4095 65380 1 0 REG A16 HO0000000 H00000000 READY CNFG ERROR 11 VXI CONFigure DNUMber returns the number of devices installed in the mainframe including the System instrument itself If the command module is not the resource manager it returns the number of devices in its servant area e Use the VXI CONF DNUM command to determine the number of values which will be returned by VXI CONF DLAD e This command has been retained for compatibility with existi
15. HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 271 G General Key Descriptions 77 GET Group Execute Trigger 224 Get Macro Query 218 GMC 218 Go To Local GTL 223 Group Execute Trigger GET 224 GTL Go To Local 223 H Handling SRQs 111 112 Hierarchy Configuration 192 193 HP E1324A EEROM lifetime 126 specifying interface card number 126 storing serial communication settings 168 HP E1326A B confirmed SCPI commands 240 non SCPI commands 241 HP E1328A confirmed SCPI commands 244 menu levels and content 95 non SCPI commands 244 HP E1330A B confirmed SCPI commands 244 menu levels and content 96 non SCPI commands 245 HP E1332A confirmed SCPI commands 242 menu levels and content 97 non SCPI commands 242 HP E1333A confirmed SCPI commands 243 menu levels and content 99 non SCPI commands 243 HP IB address assigning secondary 42 address query primary 168 address reading 65 interface and RS 232 263 message reference 223 225 port on faceplate 18 remote enable line REN 225 IBASIC 38 serial interface allocation 125 Identify Device 218 IDN 218 IEEE 488 1 Defined Messages device clear DCL 223 Go To Local 223 Group Execute Trigger 224 Interface Clear 224 Local Lockout 224 Remote 225 selected device clear SDC 223 Serial Poll 225 IFC Interface Clear 224 Implied SCPI Commands 120 In Case of Difficulty 86 Indefinite Block Header 263 Indefinite Le
16. 0 127 ENO End Normal Operation RDEVice lt logical_addr gt Release Device 0 255 RHANdlers Read Handlers RHLine lt hand_id gt 1 7 Read Handler Line RiLine lt int_id gt 1 7 Read Interrupter Line RINTerrupter Read Interrupters RMODid Read MODID RPERror Read Protocol Error RPRotocol Read Protocol RSARea Read Servant Area RSTB Read STB SLModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 127 Set Lower MODID lines 0 6 0 1 OFF ON SUModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 63 Set Upper MODID lines 7 12 0 1 OFF ON 210 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Comments e lt datal gt and lt data2 gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats VXI SEND COMMand uses the Word Serial Transfer Protocol This protocol is described in the VXIbus System Specification Manual VXI SEND COMMand is recommended for use with devices conforming to VXIbus Specifications revision 1 3 or later This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use VXI WSP QUER Related Commands VXI SEND COMMand VXI WSProtocol QUERy Example Read Which IRQ Line is Used by Interrupt Handler in Logical Address 241 VXI SEND COMM 241 RHLINE 2 Which line used by second handler in servant at 241 enter statement Return the number of the interrupt line SEND MESSage _ vxI SEND MESSage lt logical_addr gt lt
17. About This Chapter Note This chapter shows you how to use the HP E1406A Command Module s display terminal interface to operate instruments in a C Size mainframe when the Flash ROMS Run Load switch is set to its Run position The instruments including the System instrument are disabled when the Flash ROMS Run Load switch is in the Load position In this position a special Loader instrument is present and will let you download drivers or a new operating system to Flash ROM The terminal interface uses the built in RS 232 port and or the optional HP E1324A RS 232C 422 Terminal Interface for Command Modules to provide a front panel for C size VXIbus systems The main sections of this chapter include e Terminal Interface Features ooooooocooomoooo o Page 62 e Using Display Terminal Menus Page 62 e Executing Commands 2 0 00 eee eee eee Page 76 e General Key Descriptions 002 0005 Page 77 e Using Supported Terminals 0000 Page 79 e Using Other Terminals 00 00 0000 2 ee eee Page 82 e In Case of Difficulty 0 eee eee Page 86 e System Instrument Switchbox Menus Page 87 This chapter discusses using the display terminal interface It assumes you have already connected your terminal and configured it to communicate with the command module For information on connecting and configuring your terminal see th
18. Check if the MAV bit bit 4 is set to indicate that a message is available If the MAV bit is set then a message is available and the SRQ handler can process the message In this example the output queue is read using iscanf e Enable SRQ Handler in SICL with ionsrq e Enable Message Available MAV bit in the Status Byte Enable Register e g SRE 16 This will cause an SRQ to arrive when there is a message in the output queue for example data is available to be read The following program provides an interactive command line interface to send SCPI commands to SCPI compatible instruments This utilizes the MAV bit of the Status Byte in order to determine if the instrument is returning any output include lt sicl h gt include lt stdio h gt Theses are Masks for the Status Byte all bits start at bit O define MAV_MASK 0x10 MAV bit 4 This is the SRQ handler to check for Message Available MAV void srq_hdlr INST id unsigned char stb char buf 255 int esr int errnum char errmsg 100 read the status byte to determine what caused the SRQ Note use ireadstb instead of STB because you want to clear RQS instead of reading the MSS bit in the status byte ireadstb id amp stb check if MAV caused the SRQ if MAV_MASK stb amp MAV_MASK lt J Continued on next page 112 Triggering and System Status Cha
19. VXI REG READ 204 VXI REG WRIT 205 VXI RESet 206 VXI RESet 206 VXI ROUT ECLTren 207 VXI ROUT INTn 207 VXI ROUT TTLTrgn 208 VXI SELect 208 VXI SELect 209 VXI SEND COMM 209 VXI SEND COMM 210 VXI SEND MESS 211 VXI WRITe 212 VXI WSProtocol COMMand 213 VXI WSProtocol MESSage RECeive 214 VXI WSProtocol MESSage SEND 214 VXI WSProtocol QUERy 215 VXI WSProtocol RESPonse 215 VXI MXI Configuration 27 36 logical addresses default 28 logical addresses setting 27 VXIbus assigning different addresses 48 backplane ECL trigger lines 101 103 backplane interrupt lines 54 138 backplane interrupt lines priority level 139 backplane interrupt lines query interrupt acknowledge response 140 backplane interrupt lines query interrupt handling 141 backplane interrupt lines query priority level 139 backplane interrupt lines specifying service routine 141 backplane trigger ports 101 103 backplane TTL trigger lines 101 103 interrupt lines 54 memory location 29 resetting device 206 SYSFAIL Line 60 WwW WAI 222 Wait to Continue Command 222 WARNINGS 10 15 Warranty 9 Word Serial commands 213 215 protocol 213 215 queries 215 282 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index WRITe 212 Writing data to non volatile RAM 127 132 into Flash ROM 157 into Flash ROM over RS 232 line 158 159 to a device register 260 to registers
20. user RAM allocated using DIAG NRAM CREate where you stored the commander servant hierarchy table e Tables must start on an even address Note that DIAG NRAM CREate allocates RAM for the table with an even starting address lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats Setting address to 0 zero prevents the parameters defined by the table from being invoked when the system is rebooted however the table remains in user RAM For more information see User Defined Commander Servant Hierarchies on page 39 Related Commands DIAGnostic NRAM CREate DIAGnostic NRAM ADDRess DIAGnostic DOWNload VXI CONF CTABle Example Link a Commander Servant Hierarchy Table to the Processor DIAG NRAM CRE lt size gt Allocate space for table in user RAM DIAG BOOT Reboot system to complete allocation DIAG NRAM ADDR Get starting address of table RAM segment DIAG DOWN lt address gt lt data gt Download data into table VXI CONF CTABle lt address gt Link table to processor DIAG BOOT Reboot system to implement table 186 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 CONFigure CTABle Example CONFigure DCTable Parameters Comments VXI CONFigure CTABle returns the starting address of the user s commander servant hierarchy table Query Address of the Commander Servant Hierarchy Table VXI CONF CTABle Ask for address enter statement Return address VXI CONFigure DCTa
21. 205 212 WSProtocol COMMand 213 WSProtocol MESSage RECeive 214 WSProtocol MESSage SEND 214 WSProtocol QUERy 215 WSProtocol RESPonse 215 WYSE WY 30 Key Map 81 X XON XOFF Protocol 173 180 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 283
22. 215 217 226 235 Commander Servant Hierarchy setting 38 39 user defined 39 186 187 Commander Servant Hierarchy Table creating 39 data format 41 determining size 40 266 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index downloading data into 41 errors associated with 43 linking command module processor 186 query starting address 187 table format 40 Commands abbreviated SCPI 120 Begin Normal Operation BNO 60 Common Commands 217 222 DIAGnostic subsystem 123 147 executing from terminal interface 76 HP E1328A menu 95 HP E1330A B menu 96 HP E1332A menu 97 HP E1333A menu 99 implied SCPD 120 ionsrq 111 112 114 ireadstb 107 111 112 114 iscanf 112 114 linking other commands 122 multimeter menu 94 OUTPut subsystem 148 156 parameters types of 121 PROGram subsystem 157 160 query version of SCPI 183 quick reference 226 235 quick reference common 235 quick reference SCPI 226 SA select address 84 263 scanning voltmeter menu 92 separator 120 SI select instrument 83 263 STATus subsystem 161 166 switchbox menu 91 system instrument menu 88 SYSTem subsystem 167 183 types of 119 using character 72 VXI subsystem 184 215 word serial commands 213 215 Comment Sheet reader 13 Common Commands CLS 105 217 DMC 217 EMC 217 EMC 217 ESE 108 114 217 ESE 106 108 218 ESR 108 218 format 119 functional groupings 216 GMC
23. 218 IDN 218 IEEE mandated 247 linking with SCPI commands 122 LMC 219 LRN 219 OPC 220 OPC 220 PMC 220 PSC 220 PSE 220 quick reference 235 reference 216 RMC 221 RST 105 221 SRE 108 114 163 165 221 SRE 108 221 STB 107 108 111 112 114 222 TST 222 WAI 222 COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess 168 COMMiunicate SERial CONTrol DTR 169 CONTrol DTR 169 CONTrol RTS 170 CONTrol RTS 170 OWNer 125 OWNer 126 RECeive BAUD 171 RECeive BAUD 171 RECeive BITS 172 RECeive BITS 172 RECeive PACE PROTocol 173 RECeive PACE PROTocol 173 RECeive PACE THReshold STARt 174 RECeive PACE THReshold STARt 174 RECeive PACE THReshold STOP 175 RECeive PACE THReshold STOP 175 RECeive PARity 176 RECeive PARity CHECk 177 RECeive PARity CHECk 178 RECeive PARity 177 RECeive SBITs 178 RECeive SBITs 179 STORe 126 TRANsmit AUTO 179 TRANsmit AUTO 179 TRANsmit PACE PROTocol 180 TRANsmit PACE PROTocol 180 ES E A A A A A A A A A A A Condition Bits 105 Condition Register 161 166 bit used 162 description 104 positive transition 163 165 query state 161 164 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 267 reading 104 161 164 standard operation status group 109 unmasking bit 163 164 166 Configuration A16 A24 A32 logical address 29 A24 A
24. 5 0 3 Searching for static devices in mainframe 0 SC device at ladd 0 in slot 0 SC device at ladd 8 in slot SC device in ladd 16 in slot 8 Searching for dynamic devices in mainframe 0 DC device in slot 3 moved to ladd 24 block size 1 The resource manager identifies all statically configured modules and then locates and configures all dynamically configurable modules 4 Searching for pseudo devices Pseudo devices are instruments such as IBASIC 5 Configuring Commander Servant hierarchy ladd 0 cmar ladd 1 ladd 8 cmar ladd 0 ladd 16 cmdr ladd 0 ladd 24 cmdr ladd 0 ladd 32 cmdr ladd 24 ladd 64 cmdr ladd 24 Validating Commander Servant hierarchy Commander ladd 24 granted device ladd 32 Commander ladd 24 granted device ladd 64 The resource manager establishes the VXlbus system s commander servant hierarchies based on the commander s servant area and the servant s logical address 6 Mapping A24 Memory ladd 0 offset 00200000H size 131 072 bytes ladd 24 offset 00220000H size 131 072 bytes ladd 64 offset 00240000H size 131 072 bytes Mapping A32 memory in mainframe 0 The resource manager allocates A24 addresses to access the memory located on the modules at logical addresses 0 24 and 64 The offset is specified in hexadecimal and the size is specified in bytes In this system there are no A32 devices 7 Configuring VME interrupts VME interru
25. 57 195 196 Using in command 72 backplane trigger lines 101 103 backplane trigger ports 101 103 display terminal interface 61 87 display terminal menus 62 63 HP VIC 15 loader instrument 72 message available MAV bits 112 117 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 281 service request SRQ 114 SRQ to detect errors 114 supported terminals 79 switchbox menu 72 system instrument menu 65 terminals without menus 83 unsupported terminals 82 Utility Register Configuration 31 UTILS Key 65 V Variable SCPI Command Syntax 121 VERSion 183 VMEbus address space 45 allocating address space 45 interrupt lines 54 logical addresses 29 reserved memory location 30 reserving A24 A32 address space 48 reserving A24 A32 addresses 48 51 VT100 key map 79 mode 80 VT220 key map 80 mode 81 VXI Subsystem VXI CONF CTAB 186 VXI CONF CTAB 187 VXI CONF DCT 187 VXI CONF DCT 188 VXI CONF DLAD 188 VXI CONF DLIS 189 190 237 VXI CONF DNUM 190 VXI CONF ETAB 191 VXI CONF ETAB 191 VXI CONF HIER ALL 193 VXI CONF HIER 192 VXI CONF INF ALL 195 VXI CONF INF 193 194 VXI CONF ITAB 195 VXI CONF ITAB 196 VXI CONF LADD MEXT 196 VXI CONF LADD 196 VXI CONF MEXT ECLTrgn 197 VXI CONF MEXT INTn 198 VXI CONF MEXT TTLTren 199 VXI CONF MTAB 200 VXI CONF MTAB 201 VXI CONF NUMB MEXT 201 VXI CONF NUMB 201 VXI QUER 201 VXI READ 202 VXI REC MESS 203
26. Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 25 Comments e Errors associated with dynamic configurations are ERROR 1 FAILED DEVICE This error occurs when a dynamically configured device at logical address 255 failed during its power on sequence ERROR 4 DC DEVICE ADDRESS BLOCK TOO BIG This error occurs when the block size specified in the table is greater than 127 ERROR 7 DC DEVICE MOVE FAILED This error occurs when a dynamically configured device was not set to the logical address specified possibly due to a hardware failure on the module The error also occurs when all devices in an address block did not move ERROR 9 UNABLE TO MOVE DC DEVICE This error occurs when there are not enough successive logical addresses available for the specified block size or if the logical address specified is already occupied by another static or dynamic module ERROR 39 INVALID UDEF DC TABLE This error occurs when the user defined dynamic configuration table is not true valid flag does not equal 1 ERROR 40 INVALID UDEF DC TABLE DATA This error occurs when there are 0 or greater than 254 entries in the user defined dynamic configuration table e The logical addresses assigned by the dynamic configuration table are used by the system until DIAGnostic BOOT COLD or VXI CONFigure DCTable 0 is executed 26 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 Setting VXI MXI Configuration Logical Address Configuration
27. ENABle EVEN1 NTRansition lt unmask gt PTRansition lt unmask gt PRESet QUEStionable CONDition ENABle lt event gt ENABle EVEN1 NTRansition lt unmask gt PTRansition lt unmask gt OPERation STATus OPERation CONDition returns the state of the Condition CONDition Resister in the Operation Status Group The state represents conditions which are part of an instrument s operation Comments e Bit 8 in the register is used by the System instrument command module to indicate when an interrupt set up by the DIAG INTerrupt commands has been acknowledged e Reading the Condition Register does not change the setting of bit 8 Bit 8 is cleared by the DIAG INTerrupt RESPonse command e Related Commands STAT OPER ENABle STAT OPER EVENt Example Read the Contents of the Condition Register STAT OPER COND Query register enter statement Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 161 OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle lt event gt sets an enable mask to allow events monitored by the Condition Register and recorded in the Event Register to send a Summary bit to the Status Byte Register bit 7 Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt event gt numeric 256 none Comments e Bit 8 in the Condition Register is used by the System instrument command module to indicate when an interrupt set up by the DIAG INTerrupt commands has been acknowledge
28. RESPonse R Retrieves the response one word of integer data resulting from a WSProtocol COMMand command 234 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Common Commands Quick Reference The following table summarizes IEEE 488 2 common commands for the HP E1406A Command Module All common commands are available in RUN mode and LOAD mode IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Quick Reference Macros Synchronization Category Command Title All IEEE 488 2 Common Commands are available in RUN mode and LOAD mode General IDN Identification Query RST Reset Command TST Self Test Query Instrument Status CLS Clear Status Command ESE lt mask gt Standard Event Status Enable Register Command ESE Standard Event Status Enable Query ESR Standard Event Status Register Query PSC lt flag gt Power on Status Clear Command PSC Power on Status Clear Query SRE lt mask gt Service Request Enable Command SRE Service Request Enable Query STB Status Byte Register Query DMC lt name gt lt cmds gt EMC lt state gt EMC GMC lt name gt LMC PMC RMC lt name gt OPC OPC WAI Define Macro Command Enable Macro Command Enable Macro Query Get Macro Query Learn Macro Query Purge all Macros Command Remove individual Macro Command Operation Complete Command Operation Complete Query Wait to Continue Command Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference
29. TTLO IN 15936 ECL Triggers C1C016 ECLO enabled OUT 64 remote extender logical address 128 logical address window base 64 logical address window size 128 to 191 255 specify no A16 memory 0 A16 memory size ignored 64 A24 memory base page 64 A24 memory size pages 64 to 127 255 specify no A32 memory 0 A32 memory size ignored 256 interrupt line 1 enabled OUT 770 TTL Triggers TTL1 IN TTLO OUT 15935 ECL Triggers ECLO IN The program on the next page downloads the table shown above into user non volatile memory The program notes each of the steps used to create and load the table 34 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 10 20 30 40 50 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 Assign an I O path and allocate a variable to store MXI configuration Idata to be downloaded to the command module ASSIGN E1406 TO 70900 EOL CHR 10 END INTEGER MXI_config 1 25 Allocate a segment of non volatile user RAM on the command Imodule to store the user defined MXI table 1 module OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 50 Restart the system instrument to allocate the user RAM Wait for the Irestart to complete before continuing OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT WARM ON TIME
30. cmdr ladd 0 Validating Commander Servant hierarchy Commander ladd 24 granted device ladd 32 Commander ladd 24 granted device ladd 64 The resource manager establishes the VXlbus system s commander servant hierarchies based on the commander s servant area and the servant s logical address Mapping A24 Memory Searching for A24 memory in mainframe 128 VXlbus extender 128 A24 window range 00000000 to OOFFFFFF OUTWARD VXlbus extender 127 A24 window range 00000000 to OOFFFFFF INWARD Searching for A24 memory in mainframe 0 ladd O offset 00200000H size 131 072 bytes Mapping A32 memory Searching for A32 memory in mainframe 128 VXlbus extender 128 A32 window range 00000000 to FFFFFFFF OUTWARD VXlbus extender 127 A32 window range 00000000 to FFFFFFFF INWARD Searching for A32 memory in mainframe 0 The resource manager allocates A24 addresses to access the memory located on the modules at logical addresses 0 24 and 64 The offset is specified in hexadecimal and the size is specified in bytes In this system there are no A32 devices Configuring VME interrupts VME interrupt line 1 assigned to ladd 0 handler ID 1 VME interrupt line 2 assigned to ladd 24 handler ID 1 VME interrupt line 3 assigned to ladd 64 handler ID 1 VME interrupt line 4 no handler assigned VME interrupt line 5 no handler assigned VME interrupt line 6 no handler assigned VME interrupt line 7 no handler assigned VXlbus extender 128
31. either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett Packard HP Buyer shall pre pay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with a product will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that product HP does not warrant that the operation of the product or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation Of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied prod ucts or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or im proper site preparation or maintenance The design and implementation of any circuit on this product is the sole responsibility of the Buyer HP does not warrant the Buyer s circuitry or malfunctions of HP products that result from the Buyer s circuitry In addition HP does not warrant any damage that oc curs as a result of the Buyer s circuit or any defects that result from Buyer supplied products NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED
32. event register 165 in status register system 106 negative transition mask 166 positive transition mask 166 query condition register 164 QUEStionable CONDition 164 QUEStionable ENABle QUEStionable EVENt 165 QUEStionable NTRansition 166 QUEstionable PTRansition 166 Quick Reference common commands 235 SCPI commands 226 R RAM creating non volatile areas 134 querying non volatile areas 134 querying non volatile current or allowable size 143 querying non volatile starting address 142 writing data to 127 132 RCL_MENU Key 78 85 RCL_NEXT Key 77 85 RCL_PREV Key 77 85 RDISk ADDRess 144 RDISk CREate 145 RDISk CREate 145 READ 202 Reader Comment Sheet 13 Reading A16 address space 202 212 condition registers 104 161 164 data from Flash ROM 160 data low registers 201 error messages 76 182 249 event register 163 165 event register mask 162 165 HP IB address 65 instruments error queue 249 primary HP IB address 168 register contents 204 status byte 107 111 to a device register 260 Real Time Clock 237 Rebooting 124 125 Receive Pacing Protocol enabling disabling 173 query setting 173 RECeive MESSage 203 Receiving a Message 203 Recharging Battery 20 237 REGister READ 204 REGister WRITe 205 Registers accessing 202 212 addressing 260 276 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index condition register 104 109 161 166 data low register 53 6
33. 1 ROCESS Res E SWITCH_32 SWITCH_32 Enter channel list Enter channel list gt SCPI command used SCPI command used OPEN lt channel_list gt CLOSE lt channel_list gt Enter channel number and press RETURN for example 102 for channel 2 on card 1 Figure 3 10 Opening and Closing Channels SWITCH_32 MONITOR OPEN Si CLOSE SCAN SWITCH_32 ISET UP A STEP IE SWITCH 32 Press f2 to advance to the next channel in the scan list that is to trigger the instrument Enter channel list E iE SS ae Enter channel list and press RETURN for example 100 115 to scan channels 00 to 15 on card 1 Figure 3 11 Scanning Channels Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 73 SWITCH_32 1 SS 2 1 Se A UTE SWITCH_32 Il TYPE 4 DESCR E SA SWITCH_32 SWITCH_32 Enter card number Enter card number 1 gt IESO 5 IES IE a a E IE Enter card number and press RETURN Enter card number and press RETURN SCPI command used SYST CPON lt card_number gt SWITCH_32 HEWLETT PACKARD E1345A 6 A 63 68 El TYPE See RESET 4 SCPI command used SYST CTYP lt card_number gt SWITCH_32 Enter card number 1 OO gt IS gt IESO IE Enter card number and press RETURN SWITCH_32 SCPI command used 16 Channel Relay Mux SYST CDES lt card_number gt Fl TYPE DESCR amp RESET H Figure 3 12 Displaying Card Type and Description or Resetting Card 74 Using
34. 235 Notes 236 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Appendix A HP E1406A Specifications and General Information Device Type Real Time Clock CLK10 Trigger Input Memory This module returns 01416 as the device type in response to a VXI CONF DLIS query if the HP E1406A is set up as a slot zero device and 11416 if the HP E1406A is set up as a non slot zero device Accuracy 0 005 of elapsed time since last set Temperature coefficient 0 001 to 0 012 of time since last set per C change in temperature Resolution 1 0 sec Non volatile lifetime 10 months minimum for a module with 512 Kbyte memory following a 15 hour battery charge 5 months for a module with 1 Mbyte of memory 2 5 months for a module with 2 Mbyte of memory Input TTL or low level AC Minimum input level 40 mVp p Maximum input level 42 5 Vp p Output TTL Jitter 0 03 55 dB Initial Accuracy 50 ppm Maximum Stability 20 ppm year 0 55 C Typical Stability 3 ppm year at 25 C Levels TTL Input load 5 kQ 50 pF Maximum Rate 12 5 MHz TTL 40 MHz ECL Minimum pulse width 30 ns TTL 12 5 ns ECL Maximum trigger delay 30 ns 256 Kbyte user accessible volatile RAM on a module with 512 Kbyte of non volatile memory Memory is expandable to 2 Mbyte NiCad battery backed 10 month minimum lifetime for modules with 512 Kbyte of non volatile RAM 5 months for modules with 1 Mbyte of non volatile RAM and 2 5
35. 255 Errors A24 A32 address allocation table 52 53 command errors 250 commander servant hierarchy table 43 detecting with SRQ 114 device specific 250 dynamic configuration 26 execution errors 250 extender table 36 37 interrupt line allocation table 59 messages and causes 251 255 messages reading 76 182 249 258 negative error numbers 250 positive error numbers 250 query error queue 182 249 270 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index query errors 251 start up errors 255 258 types of 250 ESC Key 64 ESE 108 114 217 ESE 106 108 218 ESR 108 218 Event Register 162 166 clearing 111 218 description 105 ESE common command 217 query set bits 163 165 query state 108 218 query unmasked bit 162 165 218 reading 163 165 reading mask 162 165 standard event status group 108 standard operation status group 109 unmasking bit 162 Example Programs assigning an interrupt line 57 58 assigning secondary HP IB address 42 detecting errors using SRQ 115 117 downloading extender table into memory 35 dynamically configuring a module 25 reading the error queue 249 reserving A24 address for VMEbus 51 setting multimeter logical address 25 using MAV bit 112 117 Execution Errors 250 Extender directing ECL Trigger 197 directing interrupt line 198 directing TTL Trigger 199 MXI extender device 27 query logical address 196 resource manager configuration w
36. 4 Channel Counter Totalizer Menu o o o oo o e 97 HP E1333A 3 Channel Universal Counter Menu o o o o 99 Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status o 101 AGOM EMEC on he eee he a eee ee de eee RS 101 Using VXI Backplane Trigger Lines and Ports 4 4 54446444604 ee 4 Gas 101 Programming the Trigger Lines and the Trigger Ports 102 Programming the Status System soost e ceened bar A 104 General Statis Register Model raos a ee bane dara A 104 Required State Groups sk ko Ewe ES eee REDE A AAA 106 2 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Contents Status System Programming Examples o o o eee 111 Handing SROS A bd he eR RSHEL ADEE e OL RE ROR EEE SG 111 Using Message Available MAV Bits o o e 112 Using 4 Services Request SRO sorpresa A 114 Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 119 About WE CMMI ob ee ES OE SR EO ELE SERED RS ED 119 Coran AA NI ok Bie Be 119 Common Command Format s gt s s ee Heb Re SEHR EEE RE RRO RHR 119 SCPICommand Format 1 4 246 54S eM RRA ERS SSE 119 LEN Commands o a A EER Se 122 SCPI Conma nd Reference 5 acc ck bees hee rs cda a dd 122 DATOG ca AA ARA AAA A A di ERE EO 123 BOOTCOLD iris e ed A AS 124 BOOT EW ARIE z eea aoe a eek ie a RA ok di ide dad 125 COMMunicate SERial 0 OWNer o 0002 eee ee 125 COMMunicate SERial 0 OWNer
37. A comma separated list of seven integers between 0 and 7 inclusive Interrupt lines 1 7 are mapped to the individual return values 0 zero is used to indicate that the particular interrupt handler is not configured A set of return values of 0 0 0 5 2 0 6 would indicate that handler 4 is configured to handle interrupts on line 5 handler 5 is configured to handle interrupts on line 2 handler 7 is configured to handle interrupts on line 6 handlers 1 2 3 and 6 are not configured Interrupters A comma separated list of seven integers between 0 and 7 inclusive Interrupt lines 1 7 are mapped to the individual return values 0 zero indicates that the particular interrupter is not configured A set of return values of 0 0 0 5 2 0 6 would indicate that interrupter 4 is configured to handle interrupts on line 5 interrupter 5 is configured to handle interrupts on line 2 interrupter 7 is configured to handle interrupts on line 6 interrupters 1 2 3 and 6 are not configured Pass Failed An integer which contains the pass fail status of the specified device encoded as follows O FAIL 1 IFAIL 2 PASS 3 READY Manufacturer specific comment Up to an 80 character quoted string that contains manufacturer specific data It is sent with a 488 2 string response data format and will contain the instrument name and its IEEE 488 1 secondary address unless a start up error is detected In that case this field
38. A dynamically configured device failed to move to a new logical address 8 Config error 8 Inaccessible An A24 memory device overlaps a memory space reserved A24 memory by the mainframe s operating system 9 Unable to move DC device The block size for a set of address blocked Dynamically Configured devices is too large for the available space or an attempt was made to move a Dynamically Configured device to an already assigned Logical Address Cannot configure instruments Only the system instrument is started Appendix B HP E1406A Error Messages 255 Table B 3 Start Up Error Messages and Warnings continued Start Up Error Messages and Warnings Code Message Cause 10 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Config error 10 Insufficient system memory Config error 11 Invalid instrument address Invalid user defined commander logical address Invalid user defined secondary address Duplicate secondary address Invalid servant area Slot 0 functions disabled Invalid commander logical address BNO failed Write ready timeout Read ready timeout ERR asserted ENO failed Interrupt line unavailable Invalid user defined handler Invalid user defined interrupter Diagnostic mode on Resource Manager not in Slot 0 Warning Sysfail detected Pseudo instrument logical address unavailable File system startup failed I
39. ASIA Figure 3 3 Accessing the Utility Usi ng the System The System instrument menu allows you to Instrument Menu Read the command module HP IB address Display logical address and instrument information Configure the RS 232 port Program message based devices Set the system clock and calendar Reset the system The menus on the following pages demonstrate how to do each of the above Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 65 Select an instrument _ Al SYSTEM VOLTMTR amp SWITCH j IBASIC SYSTEM_B CONFIG 4 HP IB amp EA AA IS Typical HP IB address 9 SCPI command used SYST COMM GPIB ADDR Figure 3 4 Reading the Command Module HP IB Address 66 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 Select an instrument _ ah SYSTEM AE A A IBASIC SYSTEM_B 11 MAS HP IB amp AAA DEBUG SYSTEM_B AOS 4 DEVICE a For information on a single instrument enter its logical address and press RETURN For information on all instruments enter a single space and press RETURN SYSTEM_B gt in this case 8 was entered 0 8 32 240 LADOS 4 DEVICE S k Logical address of selected device Instrument name a o 8 8 4895 65344 1 8 REG A16 1HOBBBBBBO HAAAAAABA READY Y YY UOLTMTR INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 1 AI LADOS DEC PRU MENU UTILS HP IB secondary address Note See page 189 for a description of each field of instrument inform
40. AUTO STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on any active port READ R_BYTE PORTO DIG HANDO MODE NONE MEAS DIG DATA0 Reads port 0 after handshake PORT1 DIG HAND1 MODE NONE MEAS DIG DATA1 Reads port 1 after handshake PORT2 DIG HAND2 MODE NONE MEAS DIG DATA2 Reads port 2 after handshake PORT3 DIG HAND3 MODE NONE MEAS DIG DATA3 Reads port 3 after handshake R_BIT PORTO bit 0 7 DIG HANDO MODE NONE MEAS DIG DATAO BITm Reads bit m on port 0 after handshake PORT1 bit 0 7 DIG HAND1 MODE NONE MEAS DIG DATA1 BITm Reads bit m on port 1 after handshake PORT2 bit 0 7 DIG HAND2 MODE NONE MEAS DIG DATA2 BITm Reads bit m on port 2 after handshake PORT3 bit 0 7 DIG HAND3 MODE NONE MEAS DIG DATA3 BITm Reads bit m on port 3 after handshake WRITE W_BYTE PORTO data 0 255 DIG HANDO MODE NONE DIG DATAO lt data gt Writes data to port 0 PORT1 data 0 255 DIG HAND1 MODE NONE DIG DATA1 lt data gt Writes data to port 1 m PORT2 data 0 255 DIG HAND2 MODE NONE DIG DATA2 lt data gt Writes data to port 2 PORT3 data 0 255 DIG HAND3 MODE NONE DIG DATAS lt data gt Writes data to port 3 _W_BIT _7 PORTO bit 0 7 value 0 1 DIG HANDO MODE NONE DIG DATAO BITm lt value gt Writes data to bit m on port 0 PORT1 bit 0 7 value 0 1 DIG HAND1 MODE NONE DIG DATA1 BITm lt value gt Writes data to bit m on port 1 m PORT2 bit 0 7 value 0 1 DIG HAND2 MODE NONE DIG DATA2 B
41. B size plug in serial interface modules Be aware that the HP E1324A module stores its settings in an on board EEROM This EEROM write cycle takes nearly one second to complete Wait for this operation to complete before attempting to use that serial interface The HP E1324A s EEROM used to store its serial communication settings has a finite lifetime of approximately 10 000 write cycles Even if your application program sent the DIAG COMM SER n STORe command once every day the lifetime of the EEROM would still be over 27 years Be careful that your application program sends the DIAG COMM SER n STORe command to an HP E1324A no more often than is necessary e Related Commands All SYST COMM SER n commands Example Store the Serial Communications Settings in the Third HP E1324A DIAG COMM SER3 STOR 126 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 DOWNload CHECked DIAGnostic DOWNload CHECked MADDress lt address gt lt data gt writes M ADDress data into a non volatile user RAM segment starting at address using error correction The user RAM segment is allocated by the DIAG NRAM CREate or DIAG DRAM CREate command Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric 0 to 16 777 215 4 HFFFFFE none lt data gt arbitrary block See Parameter Types none program data on page 121 Comments e This command is typically used to send a block of data to a block of
42. COMMands VXI WSProtocol COMMand VXI WSProtocol QUERy Example Send 1 Data Byte to Logical Address 241 VXI SEND COMM 241 BAV 452 End bit 1 and data byte is 196 Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 209 SEND COMMand VXI SEND COMMand lt logical_addr gt lt command gt lt datal gt lt data2 gt sends the specified word serial command and optional dataN values using the word serial protocol to the module at logical_addr It then waits for and returns a 16 bit response value Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt numeric Must round to O through 255 none The command field and any required data fields are specified in the following table lt command gt lt datal gt lt data2 gt Description AHLine lt hand_id gt 1 7 lt line_ gt 0 7 Assign Handler Line A line number of 0 means the handler is to be disconnected AlLine lt int_id gt 1 7 lt line_ gt 0 7 Assign Interrupter Line A line number of 0 means the handler is to be disconnected AMControl lt rspns_mask gt Asynchronous Mode Control 0 15 ANO Abort Normal Operation ANY lt cmd_word gt Specify any VXlbus command 32768 32767 BNO lt top_level gt Begin Normal Operation 0 non zero BREQuest Byte Request CEVent lt enable gt lt event_ gt 0 127 Control Event 0 1 OFF ON CRESponse lt rspns_mask gt Control Response
43. Configuration Register 20 UCONfigure Utility Configuration Register 24 The optional register names are decoded into the equivalent register address You will get correct results if you use any one of the words for a given register address even if the word itself does not make sense for the device you are using e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI REGister READ Write to a Register on the Currently Selected Device VXI REG WRIT DHIG 64 Writes 64 to Data High Register Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 205 RESet Parameters Comments Example RESet Comments VXI RESet lt logical_addr gt performs a soft reset of the device at logical_adadr Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt numeric Must round to 0 through 255 none e VXI RESet sets the Sysfail Inhibit bit in the device s Control Register then sets the Reset bit waits 100us then clears Reset When the device has passed its self test Sysfail Inhibit is cleared If the device fails during the reset does not assert Passes within 4 9 sec Sysfail Inhibit remains asserted e If the command module is the resource manager it can reset any device within the mainframe If the command module is not the resource manager it can only reset devices within its servant area You cannot use VXI RESet to reset the command module use DIAG BOOT When a device is reset the command m
44. DIAG BOOT COLD will set BAUD to 9600 e RST condition No change Set the Baud Rate to 1200 SYST COMM SERO BAUD 1200 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BAUD MIN MAX returns The current baud rate setting if no parameter is sent The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent Query the Current Baud Rate SYST COMM SERO BAUD enter statement Statement enters a numeric value Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 171 COMMunicate SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BITS lt bits gt sets the SERial n RECeive number of bits to be used to transmit and receive data BITS Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt bits gt numeric 7 8 MIN MAX none Comments e Attempting to set bits to other than those values shown will result in anError 222 Data out of range e While this command operates independently of either the PARity lt type gt or SBITs commands there are two combinations which are disallowed because of their data frame bit width The following table shows the possible combinations BITS PARity lt type gt SBITS Frame Bits 7 NONE 1 9 disallowed 7 NONE 2 10 7 Yes 1 10 7 Yes 2 11 8 NONE 1 10 8 NONE 2 11 8 Yes 1 11 8 Yes 2 12 disallowed e DIAG BOOT COLD will set BITS to 8 e Related Comm
45. IB serial poll IEEE 488 1 message Both methods return the weighted sum of all set bits in the register The difference between the two methods is that STB does not clear bit 6 Service Request serial poll does clear bit 6 No other Status Byte Register bits are cleared by either method with the exception of the Message Available bit bit 4 which may be cleared as a result of reading the response to STB Example 10 OUTPUT 70900 STB Send Status Byte Register query 20 ENTER 70900 A Place response in variable 30 PRINT A Print response 40 END TST Self Test causes an instrument to execute an internal self test and returns a response showing the results of the self test A 0 zero response indicates that self test passed A value other than zero indicates a self test failure or error Example 10 OUTPUT 70900 TST Execute self test return response 20 ENTER 70900 A Place self test response in variable 30 PRINT A Print response 40 END WAI wWait to continue prevents an instrument from executing another command until the operation caused by the previous command is finished sequential operation Since all instruments normally perform sequential operations executing the WAI command causes no change to the instrument s operation 222 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 HP IB Message Reference Device Clear DCL or Selected Device Clear SDC Example Go To Local GTL Comments Example This sect
46. MB of the A24 address space This space becomes inaccessible to the command module ERROR 32 INACCESSIBLE A32 MEMORY This error occurs when all or part of an A32 device overlaps the top 500 MB or bottom 500 MB of the A32 address space ERROR 33 INVALID UDEF MEMORY BLOCK This error occurs when an invalid base address is specified or when the size of the memory exceeds the A24 or A32 address space given the base address specified ERROR 34 UDEF MEMORY BLOCK UNAVAILABLE This error occurs when the memory block specified in the A24 A32 address allocation table has already been assigned Also in a system with VXI MXI extenders A24 A32 window restrictions may force some addresses to be unavailable on a given VMEbus ERROR 35 INVALID UDEF ADDRESS SPACE This error occurs when the address space Addr space specified in the table is A24 and an A32 device is installed or vice versa ERROR 36 DUPLICATE UDEF MEMORY LADD This error occurs when a logical address is specified more than once in the same A24 A32 address allocation table This does not apply to VMEbus devices address 1 ERROR 43 INVALID UDEF MEM TABLE This error occurs when the user defined A24 A32 address allocation table is not true valid flag does not equal 1 52 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 ERROR 44 INVALID UDEF MEM TABLE DATA This error occurs when an invalid logical address is specified in the A24 A32 address allocation table e Th
47. MEASure lt channel gt TINTerval RATio NPERiods TINTerval NPERiods Appendix A HP E1406A Specifications and General Information 243 D A Converter The following tables apply to the HP E1328A 4 Channel D A Converter Commands Table A 9 HP E1328A SCPI 1994 0 Confirmed Commands CALibration STATus STATe QUEStionable STATe CONDition ENABle SYSTem ENABle ERRor EVENt VERSion OPERation CONDition ENABle ENABle EVENt Table A 10 HP E1328A Non SCPI Commands CALibration SOURce CURRent CURRent lt channel gt VOLTage CURRent lt channel gt FUNCtion lt channel gt DISPlay VOLTage lt channel gt MONitor VOLTage lt channel gt CHANnel CHANnel STATe STRing Digital I O The following tables apply to the HP E1330A B Quad 8 bit Digital T O Commands Module Table A 11 HP E1330A B SCPI 1994 0 Confirmed Commands STATus OPERation CONDition ENABle ENABle EVENt PREset QUEStionable CONDition ENABle ENABle EVENt SYSTem ERRor VERSion 244 HP E1406A Specifications and General Information Appendix A Table A 12 HP E1330A B Non SCPI Commands DISPlay MONitor PORT PORT STATe STRing MEASure DIGital DATA lt port gt BIT lt number gt BLOCk FLAG lt port gt MEMory DELete MACRo V
48. NONE R Configures the selected mainframe extender to direct the ECL trigger specified by lt line gt INTerrupt lt line gt lt direction gt IN OUT INONE R Configures the selected mainframe extender to direct the interrupt line specified by lt line gt TTLTrg lt line gt lt direction gt IN OUT NONE R Configures the selected mainframe extender to direct the TTL trigger specified by lt ine gt MTABle lt address gt R Link A24 A32 Address Allocation table to command module resource manager processor 230 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 SCPI Commands Quick Reference Command Mode Description Mode R active in RUN mode L active in LOAD mode MTABle R Query A24 A32 address allocation table starting address NUMber R Gets the number of devices in the system when issued to a resource manager Generates an error if received by a device other than the resource manager MEXTender R Gets the number of mainframe extenders in the system when issued to a resource manager Generates an error if received by a device other than the resource manager QUERy lt logical_addr gt R Read Data Low Register of device at logical_addr READ lt logical_addr gt lt register_addr gt R Read the contents of the device register at register_adar RECeive MESSage lt logical_addr gt lt end_of_msg gt R Receive message from message based device at logical_addr REGister READ lt register
49. ON or OFF e DIAG BOOT COLD will set PARity to NONE 176 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Example COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PARity Example COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PARity CHECk Parameters Comments Example e Related Commands SYST COMM SERJn REC PAR CHEC 1 0 ON OFF SYST COMM SER n REC BITS 7 8 SYST COMM SER n REC SBIT 1 2 e RST Condition No change Set Parity Check Generation to ODD SYST COMM SERO PAR ODD Set parity type SYST COMM SERO PAR CHEC ON Enable parity check generation SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PARity lt type gt returns the type of parity checked and generated What Type of Parity Checking is Set SYST COMM SERO PAR Ask for parity type enter statement Returns the string EVEN ODD ZERO ONE or NONE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PARity CHECk lt check_cntrl gt controls whether or not the parity bit in received serial data frames will be considered significant Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt check_cntrl gt boolean 0 1 OFF ON none e When check_cntrl is set to O or OFF received data is not checked for correct parity Transmitted data still includes the type of parity configured with PARity lt type gt DIAG BOOT COLD will set CHECk to OFF Related Commands SYST COMM SER n REC PAR lt type gt RST Condition No change Set Pari
50. RAM or none MIN MAX DEF lt size gt is the number of bytes to be allocated to DRAM use A size of zero will remove the DRAM segment lt num_drivers gt is the maximum number of drivers to be loaded The DRAM segment will be created only after the System instrument has been rebooted cycle power or execute DIAG BOOT Based on the size specified DIAG DRAM CRE rounds the size up to an even value DRAM will de allocate previously allocated NRAM and RDISk segments Using all of the available RAM MAX for the DRAM segment will limit some functions such as IBASIC program space instrument reading storage space and full functionality of the display terminal interface Use DIAG DRIVer LOAD and DIAG DRIVer LIST to load and manage DRAM Related Commands DIAG DRAM AVAilable DIAG DRIVer LOAD DIAG DRIVer LIST Allocate a 15 Kbyte Non Volatile Driver RAM Segment DIAG DRAM CRE 15360 Allocate 15 Kbyte segment of driver RAM DIAGnostic DRAM CREate lt MIN MAX gt lt MIN MAX DEF gt returns the size in bytes of a previously created Non volatile RAM area for loading instrument drivers and the number of drivers currently loaded If you specify one of the parameters you must specify both 134 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 DRIVer INSTall Comments DRIVer LIST type Parameters Comments DIAGnostic DRIVer INSTall makes the drivers downloaded to Flash ROM available instal
51. REN line true and addresses System instrument Serial Poll SPOLL The SPOLL command like the STB Common Command returns the weighted sum of all set bits in an instrument s Status Byte Register status byte Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual for more information on the Status Byte Register Comments e The SPOLL command differs from the STB command in that SPOLL clears bit 6 SRQ Executing STB does not clear bit 6 Example 10 P SPOLL 70900 Send Serial Poll and place response into P 20 DISP P Display response 30 END Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 225 SCPI Commands Quick Reference The following table summarizes SCPI commands for the HP E1406A Command Module System Instrument and Loader Instrument The Mode column shows the active mode s for the command SCPI Commands Quick Reference MADDress lt address gt lt data gt SADDress lt address gt lt data gt MADDress lt address gt lt data gt SADDress lt address gt lt data gt DRAM AVAilable CREate lt size gt lt num_drivers gt CREate lt MIN MAX gt lt MIN MAX DEF gt DRIVer INSTall LIST ALL FROM RAM ROM LOAD lt driver_block gt Command Mode Description Mode R active in RUN mode L active in LOAD mode DIAGnostic BOOT COLD R L Restarts System processor clears stored configurations WARM R L Same as cycling power COMMunicate SERial 0
52. SER n TRAN AUTO RST Condition No change Enable XON XOFF Handshaking SYST COMM SERO PACE PROT XON SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE PROTocol returns the current receive pacing protocol See if XON XOFF Protocol is Enabled SYST COMM SERO PACE PROT enter statement Statement enters the string XON or NONE Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 173 COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE THReshold STARt Parameters Comments Example COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE THReshold STARt Comments Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE THReshold STARt lt char_count gt configures the input buffer level at which the specified interface may send the XON character ASCII 1116 assert the DTR line and or assert the RTS line Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt char_count gt numeric 1 through 99 for built in none 1 through 8191 for HP E1324A To determine the size of the input buffer of the serial interface you are using send SYST COMM SER n PACE THR STARt MAX The returned value will be the buffer size less one STARt must be set to less than STOP The THR STAR command has no effect unless PACE PROT XON CONT DTR IBF or CONT RTS IBF has been sent Related Commands SYST COMM SER n REC PACE PROT XON NONE SYST COMM SER n CONT DTR SYST COMM SER n CONT RTS RST Condition No c
53. SERial COMMunicate SERial COMMunicate SERial COMMunicate SERial COMMunicate SERial COMMunicate SERial COMMunicate SERi SRBC ene AP OR ee SR wee COMMunicate SERial n RECeive SBITs 0 0 02084 COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit AUTO 4 COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit AUTO o COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit PACE PROTocol COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit PACE PROTocol n i RECeive PACE THReshold STARt RECeive PACE THReshold STARt RECeive PACE THReshold STOP RECeive PACE THReshold STOP n n TIMES nada baeA PEAS MEd eee He hee SEAR e COON E oi gk OAS RRR EERE Oe EERE EER CONF Ome CTAB 44 44 445646 EA HOR ROSE ERS COIN NET URIS ae he bende Ronde re eo de Rede ede Bek de de CONFienrs DLADIdESS 4 ed coh RE wR EERE DARA CONEA PS DISC aa aa eek a ek ok ae Wik He OUR ek WS et i eoi LONE et VB iio a ro pot he oh ete th ae Ee ob aby Seok CONFigues HTERA CH 4 4664 ea ae Kb bdo oe ba pete ee EERE SO CONEigure HIER Athy ALL 25 544 88 Sok Sees SEE ERE wee CONF ure INFORME DO 2 554 h4 6 eS bho Ke a ORES PEER REO 168 179 179 179 180 180 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Contents 5 CONE gure INFonmatonw ALL ast eiea eee AA 195 CONFigurecTTABle co ee
54. STOP MAX The returned value will be the buffer size less one STOP must be set to greater than STARt The THR STOP command has no effect unless PACE PROT XON CONT DTR IBF or CONT RTS IBF has been sent Related Commands SYST COMM SERJn REC PACE PROT XON NONE SYST COMM SER n CONT DTR SYST COMM SER n CONT RTS RST Condition No change Set Interface to Send XOFF When Input Buffer Contains 80 Characters SYST COMM SERO PACE THR STOP 80 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE THReshold STOP MIN MAX returns The current stop threshold if no parameter is sent The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent To determine the size of the input buffer of the serial interface you are using send SYST COMM SER n PACE THR STOP MAX The returned value will be the buffer size less one Return Current Stop Threshold SYST COMM SERO PACE THR STOP Query for threshold enter statement Statement enters a numeric value Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 175 COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PARity Parameters Comments SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PARity lt type gt configures the type of parity to be checked for received data and generated for transmitted data Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt type gt discrete EVEN ODD ZERO ONE NONE none
55. TION information to avoid personal injury or damage to the product Direct current DC Indicates hazardous voltages Indicates the field wiring terminal that must l be connected to earth ground before operat E ing the equipment protects against electri WARNING Calls attention to a procedure practice or con cal shock in case of fault dition that could cause bodily injury or death f gt CAUTION Calls attention to a procedure practice or con Frame or chassis ground terminal typically dition that could possibly cause damage to rh e connects to the equipment s metal frame equipment or permanent loss of data WARNINGS The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this product Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the product Hewlett Packard Company assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Ground the equipment For Safety Class 1 equipment equipment having a protective earth terminal an uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable gases or fumes For continued protection against fire replace
56. The DIAGnostic subsystem allows control over the System instrument s internal processor system BOOT and INTerrupt access to the Loader instrument allocation and contents of user RAM and disc volume RAM GNRAM and RDISk and allocation of the built in serial interface DIAG COMM SER 0 OWN Subsystem Syntax DIAGnostic BOOT COLD WARM COMMunicate SERial 0 OWNer lt owner gt SYSTem IBASic NONE OWNer SERial n STORe DOWNload CHECked MADDress lt address gt lt data gt SADDress lt address gt lt data gt MADDress lt address gt lt data gt SADDress lt address gt lt data gt DRAM AVAilable CREate lt size gt MIN MAX lt num_drivers gt MIN MAX DEF CREate lt MIN MAX gt lt MIN MAX DEF gt DRIVer INSTall LIST ALL FROM 2 RAM ROM LOAD lt driver_block gt CHECked lt driver_block gt FROM AVAilable CREate lt num_drivers gt CREate SIZE INTerrupt ACTivate lt mode gt O 1 OFF ON PRlority n lt level gt MIN MAX DEF PRlority n RESPonse SETup n lt mode gt 0 1 OFF ON SETupl n NRAM ADDRess CREate lt size gt MIN MAX CREate MIN MAX PEEK lt address gt lt width gt POKE lt address gt lt width gt lt data gt Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 123 RDISk ADDRess CREate lt size gt MIN MAX CREate MIN MAX UPLoad MADDress lt address gt
57. Type Range of Values Units n numeric 1 through 7 1 e SETup1 through SETup7 specifies the VXI interrupt lines 1 through 7 e Sending SETup without an n value specifies VXI interrupt line 1 e If 1 is returned interrupt handling is set up for the specified interrupt line using the System instrument DIAG INT commands If O is returned interrupt handling is done by the operating system Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 141 e Related Commands DIAG INTerrupt SETup 7 DIAG INTerrupt PRlority n DIAG INTerrupt AC Tivate DIAG INTerrupt RESPonse Example Determine Interrupt Setup for Line 4 DIAG INT SET4 enter statement Statement returns 0 or 1 NRAM ADDRess _ DiAGnostic NRAM ADDRess returns the starting address of the 8 Non volatile user RAM segment allocated using DIAG NRAM CREate Comments e DIAG NRAM CREate does not allocate the RAM segment until after a subsequent reboot To get accurate results execute DIAG NRAM ADDRess after the reboot e Related Commands DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG DOWNload DIAG UPLoad Example Determine Address of the Most Recently Created User RAM Segment DIAG NRAM ADDR enter statement Statement returns decimal numeric address NRAM CREate DiAGnostic NRAM CREate lt size gt allocates a segment of Non volatile user RAM for a user defined table Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units
58. VXI SEND can be used to communicate with message based devices from an RS 232 monitor via the command module If the command module is the resource manager the message based devices can be inside or outside its servant area If the command module is not the resource manager the message based devices must be in the command module s servant area VXI REC uses the Byte Transfer Protocol which uses the DIR and DOR bits in the Response Register This protocol and DIR DOR are described in the VXIbus System Specifications Send a Device Clear to unlock the System instrument in case the device at logical_addr does not satisfy the end_of_msg condition insufficient data for count or no END LF CRLF This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use the VXI WSP MESS REC command Related Commands VXI SEND MESSagel VXI WSProtocol MESSage RECeive VXI WSProtocol MESSage SEND Query for Message from Module at Logical Address 16 VXI SEND 16 IDN Send command to device at logical address 16 VXI REC 16 Enter message Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 203 REGister READ vxI REGister READ lt register gt returns the contents of the specified 16 bit register at the selected logical address as an integer see VXI SELect Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt register gt numeric Even numbers from 0 to 62 or none re
59. byte bits 108 status byte summary bits 107 stop bits 178 179 summary bits 105 162 165 sysfail inhibit bit 206 unmasking 162 164 166 bogus 88 Boolean Parameters 121 BOOT COLD 124 BOOT WARM 125 Buffer Input Level 174 175 Buffer Input Size 174 175 Byte Transfer Protocol 213 215 C Calendar query setting 181 Calendar setting 181 CAUTIONS 15 Certification 9 Changing command module menus 63 Channel List 72 Check Bits 128 130 159 Clear End Key 78 85 Clear Line Key 85 Clear Status Command 217 Clearing event register 218 interface buffers 65 message available bits 222 Clk In 18 CIk Out 18 CLK10 connectors on faceplate 18 specifications 237 Clock real time 237 setting 182 specifications 237 CLR_INST Key 65 78 85 CLS 105 217 Command Errors 250 Command Module A16 address space 260 adding interrupt lines 54 annunciators 17 battery 20 237 changing menus 63 command reference 119 215 217 226 235 configuring 21 60 connecting multiple 58 cooling requirements 238 default interrupt line 54 error messages 249 258 Flash ROM 157 functional description 16 HP IB address primary 168 HP IB address reading the 65 installing in mainframe 19 memory available 20 237 overview 15 20 physical description 17 power requirements 238 specifications 237 248 system status 101 118 trig in port 101 triggering 101 118 Command Reference 119
60. commands 119 216 dynamically configured modules 22 extraction levers 18 functional 16 HP IB port 18 interrupt line allocation 53 keys terminal interface 77 physical 17 reset button 18 RS 232 port 18 run load switch 18 SCPI command format 119 statically configured modules 22 status group 104 system instrument 119 trigger connectors 18 Device Clear DCL 223 DIAGnostic Subsystem DIAG BOOT COLD 124 DIAG BOOT WARM 125 DIAG COMM SER OWN 125 DIAG COMM SER OWN 126 DIAG COMM SER STOR 126 DIAG DOWN CHEC MADD 127 128 DIAG DOWN CHEC SADD 129 130 DIAG DOWN MADD 131 DIAG DOWN SADD 132 DIAG DRAM AVA 133 DIAG DRAM CRE 134 DIAG DRAM CRE 134 DIAG DRIV INST 135 DIAG DRIV LIST FROM 135 DIAG DRIV LIST RAM 135 DIAG DRIV LIST ROM 135 DIAG DRIV LIST 135 DIAG DRIV LOAD 136 DIAG DRIV LOAD CHEC 136 DIAG FROM AVA 137 DIAG FROM CRE 137 DIAG FROM CRE 137 DIAG FROM SIZE 138 DIAG INT ACT 138 DIAG INT PRI 139 DIAG INT PRI 139 DIAG INT RESP 140 DIAG INT SET 141 DIAG INT SET 141 DIAG NRAM ADDR 142 DIAG NRAM CRE 142 DIAG NRAM CRE 143 DIAG PEEK 143 DIAG POKE 144 DIAG RDIS ADDR 144 DIAG RDIS CRE 145 DIAG RDIS CRE 145 DIAG UPL MADD 146 DIAG UPL SADD 147 Digital I O Commands 244 245 Disabling ECL Triggers 30 receive pacing protocol 173 transmit pacing protocol 180 TTL Triggers 30 Discrete Parameters 121 Display Terminal Interface 61 88 91
61. configuration routine You can define your own logical address and memory mapping in a system with extenders by using the user defined extender table This table is created as follows 1 Table space in the command module s non volatile user RAM is made available by allocating a segment of RAM with the command DIAGnostic NRAM CREate lt size gt 2 Reset the command module NRAM is created during the boot up process DIAGnostic BOOT WARM 3 The location starting address of the table in RAM is determined with the command DIAGnostic NRAM ADDRess 4 Data is downloaded into the table with the command DIAGnostic DOWNload lt address gt lt data gt 5 The table is linked to the appropriate algorithm in the command module processor with the command VXI CONFigure ETABle lt address gt Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 31 Table Format The user defined extender table consists of a two byte header followed by the required number of extender records The first byte of the header is a table Valid Flag 1 valid and the second byte specifies the number of records in the table Table 2 3 Extender Table Format valid flag 0 1 of records N extender record 1 extender record 2 extender record N Any single item in an extender record can be disabled so that the resource manager will perform the default configuration for the item For example to use the reso
62. e Attempting to set type to other than the values shown results in Error 222 Data out of range e The following table defines each value of lt type gt Value Definition EVEN If PARity CHECk is ON the received parity bit must maintain even parity The transmitted parity bit will maintain even parity ODD If PARity CHECk is ON the received parity bit must maintain odd parity The transmitted parity bit will maintain odd parity ZERO If PARity CHECk is ON the received parity bit must be a zero The transmitted parity bit will be a zero ONE If PARity CHECKk is ON the received parity bit must be a logic one The transmitted parity bit will be a logic one NONE A parity bit must not be received in the serial data frame No parity bit will be transmitted e While this command operates independently of either the BITS or SBITs commands there are two combinations which are disallowed because of their data frame bit width The following table shows the possible combinations BITS PARity lt type gt SBITS Frame Bits 7 NONE 1 9 disallowed 7 NONE 2 10 7 Yes 1 10 7 Yes 2 11 8 NONE 1 10 8 NONE 2 11 8 Yes 1 11 8 Yes 2 12 disallowed e Received parity will not be checked unless PAR CHEC ON is has been sent Transmitted data will include the specified parity whether PAR CHEC is
63. gt R Returns the contents of the specified 16 bit register at the selected logical address see VXI SELect WRITe lt register gt lt data gt R Writes data to the specified 16 bit register at the selected logical address see VXI SELect RESet lt logical_addr gt R Resets the device at the specified logical address RESet R Resets the device at the selected logical address see VXI SELect ROUTe ECLTrg lt line gt R Sets the routing of the specified trigger line in all mainframe extenders so that the device selected by VXI SEL can source the trigger and all other devices in the system can monitor it INTerrupt lt line gt R Sets the routing of the specified interrupt line in all mainframe extenders so that the device selected by VXI SEL can handle the interrupts and all other devices in the system can monitor it TTLTrg lt line gt R Sets the routing of the specified trigger line in all mainframe extenders so that the device selected by VXI SEL can source the trigger and all other devices in the system can monitor it SELect lt logical_addr gt R Specifies the logical address to be used by subsequent commands in the VXI subsystem SELect R Returns the logical address to be used by subsequent commands in the VXI subsystem SEND COMMand lt logical_addr gt lt command gt lt data gt R Send word serial command and optional data to device at logical_adar COMMand lt logical_addr gt lt command gt lt data
64. in the Load position the SYSTEM instrument entry will be replaced by LOADER and the rest of the instruments will disappear from the menu The menu select and menu control function keys usually labeled f1 f8 on their key caps are defined by eight function labels located across the bottom of the terminal screen Once you learn how these keys operate using the menus is easy key labels are shown in bold text in this chapter To select a displayed menu choice press the function key f1 f5 which corresponds to the function key label e When there are more than five menu choices function key f6 becomes labeled MORE Press MORE to display the next group of choices By repeatedly pressing MORE you can display all groups of choices After you have displayed all groups of choices pressing MORE again returns to the first group of choices Whenever the screen is requesting information input prompt such as Enter the device s logical address just type the information and press Return may be Enter on a terminal emulator If you pressed the wrong menu key and do not want to enter the requested information you can escape the input prompt and stay at the same menu level by pressing ESC or PRV_MENU If you make an incorrect entry in response to an input prompt the bottom line of the Text Output Area will show an error message When this happens just select that menu choice again f1 f5 keys re type the correct informati
65. in the command Related Commands VXI SELect VXI WSProtocol RESPonse VXI WSProtocol QUERy WSProtocol VXI WSProtocol MESSage RECeive lt count terminator gt receives a M ESSage R ECeive message from the selected logical address using both the word serial protocol and the byte transfer protocol Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt terminator gt numeric count LF CRLF END END Comments e The command will always terminate on the End bit being set Additional termination options are on a specified number of bytes count or on a match to a particular terminator That is LF CRLF END e The response is returned as a string e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI WSProtocol MESSage SEND WSProtocol VXI WSP MESS SEND lt message_string gt END NEN sends the M ESSage SEND specified message_string to the selected logical address The string is sent using the word serial protocol with the byte transfer protocol Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt message_string gt text string Any valid test string none lt end_bit gt discrete END NEN END Comments e The last byte of the string is sent with the end_bit set unless you specify NEN NoENd e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI WSProtocol MESSage RECeive 214 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 WSProtocol QUERy VXI WSProtocol Q
66. interrupt line Idata to be downloaded to the command module ASSIGN E1406 TO 70900 E0L CHR 10 END INTEGER Intr_line 1 7 Allocate a segment of non volatile user RAM on the command module Ito store the interrupt line table 2 data records no interrupters OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 14 Restart the system instrument to define the user RAM Wait for the Irestart to complete before continuing OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT ON TIMEOUT 7 1 GOTO Complete Complete B SPOLL 70900 OFF TIMEOUT 7 Return the starting address of the non volatile user RAM OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM ADDR ENTER E1406 A Download the following the table is valid there are two data records Interrupt line 3 and line 2 is assigned to the handler at logical address 64 There are no programmable interrupters on either line DATA 258 2 64 0 DATA 3 64 0 READ Intr_line OUTPUT E1406 USING 3 K DIAG DOWN A 0 OUTPUT E1406 USING W Intr_line ILink the interrupt line table to the appropriate algorithm OUTPUT E1406 VXI CONF ITAB A Restart the system instrument to set the user defined configuration OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT END Although interrupt line 2 was assigned to the command module at logical address 64 by the resource manager the line must be re assigned when line 3 is assigned Otherwise line 3 will be assigned in place of line 2 The interrupt lines assigned by the interrupt line table are u
67. interrupts 1 OUT 2 DIS 3 DIS 4 DIS 5 DIS 6 DIS 7 DIS VXlbus extender 128 interrupts 1 IN 2 DIS 3 DIS 4 DIS 5 DIS 6 DIS 7 DIS The resource manager allocates interrupt lines to itself and to the other interrupt handlers in the system SYSTEM INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 0 VOLTMTR INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 1 SWITCH INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 2 MBinstr INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 3 SYSTEM instrument started BNO issued to ladd 24 BNO response FFFE Opening HP IB access for message based device at sec addr 03 The resource manager identifies the secondary HP IB addresses used in the system starts the system instrument i e command module issues the Begin Normal Operation BNO command to its direct message based servant and opens HP IB access to the module at secondary HP IB address 03 Figure 2 4 Resource Manager Configuration With Extenders Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 47 Reserving A24 A32 As previously mentioned the resource manager cannot determine when Address Space VME devices have been installed in the system To prevent the resource manager from allocating A24 A32 addresses intended for VME devices to VXIbus devices the address allocation table is used The A24 A32 address allocation table is also used to assign different addresses to VXIbus devices other than those default addresses assigned by the resource manager during power on The A24 A32 Address The A24 A32 address allo
68. is not a programmable interrupter or does not exist HP IB address switch bit 6 is set wrong warning only A command module is configured for slot O and resource manager but is installed in another slot warning only A device was asserting SYSFAIL on the backplane during start up A physical device has the same logical address as IBASIC 240 Insufficient system resources to allow the IBASIC file system to start Device has A32 memory below 20000000016 or above DFFFFFFFi Invalid memory block in user defined Memory table The same base address or memory are specified more than once in the memory table or the addresses in the specified block are already in use The address specified in the memory table is A24 but the device is A32 or vice versa 256 HP E1406A Error Messages Appendix B Table B 3 Start Up Error Messages and Warnings continued Start Up Error Messages and Warnings Code Message Cause 36 Duplicate UDEF memory LADD A logical address is specified more than once in the memory table This does not apply to VME devices address 1 37 Invalid UDEF CNFG table The valid flag in the command servant hierarchy table is not setto 1 38 Invalid UDEF CNFG table data There are more than 254 entries in the commander servant hierarchy table 39 Invalid UDEF DC table The valid flag in the dynamic configuration table is not set to 1 40 Invalid UDEF DC table data There ar
69. logical address e If the command module is the resource manager it can read from any device within the mainframe If the command module is not the resource manager it can only read from devices within its servant area e lt logical_addr gt must be specified in decimal lt register_addr gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal HQ or binary B Accesses are 16 bit non privileged data accesses This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use VXI REG READ Related Commands VXI WRITe VXI REGister READ Example Read from One of a Device s Configuration Registers VXI READ 8 0 enter statement Read ID Register on device at logical address 8 Enter value from Device Register 202 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 RECeive MESSage VXI RECeive MESSage lt logical_addr gt lt end_of_msg gt receives a message from the message based device at logical_addr Parameters Comments Example Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt numeric Must round to 0 through 255 none lt end_of_msg gt discrete numeric END LF CRLF lt count gt none A message ends when the condition specified by the end_of _msg parameter is met When end_of_msg specifies a count it can range from 1 through 2 147 483 647 The default end_of_msg parameter is END VXI REC together with
70. lt modid gt 0 127 Set Lower MODID lines 0 6 0 1 OFF ON SUModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 63 Set Upper MODID lines 7 12 0 1 OFF ON Comments e event_number hand_id int_id line_number modid and response_mask may be specified in decimal hex H octal HQ or binary B formats e top_level selects whether the END bit is set in the command e enable selects whether the Enable bit is set in the command e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI WSProtocol COMMand WSProtocol vVXI WSProtocol RESPonse returns one word of data from the data low RESPonse register on the selected logical address This command obeys the byte transfer protocol The data is returned as an integer HP E1406A Command Reference 215 Common Command Reference This section describes the IEEE 488 2 common commands that can be used to program instruments in the mainframe Commands are listed alphabetically the following table shows the common commands listed by functional group Examples are shown when the command has parameters or returns a response otherwise the command string is as shown in the headings in this section For additional information on any common commands refer to the IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 IEEE 488 2 Common Command Functional Groupings Category Command Title General IDN Identification Query RST Reset Command TST Self test Query Instrument Status CLS Clear Status Comman
71. lt size gt numeric 0 to available RAM or MIN MAX none Comments e The RAM segment will be created only after the System instrument has been rebooted cycle power or execute DIAG BOOT Based on the size specified DIAG NRAM CREate rounds the size up to an even value NRAM will de allocate a previously allocated RDISk segment Using all of the available RAM MAX for the NRAM segment will limit some functions such as IBASIC program space instrument reading storage space and full functionality of the display terminal interface Use DIAG NRAM ADDRess to determine the starting address of the RAM segment Use DIAG DOWNload DIAG UPLoad DIAG PEEK or DIAG POKE to store and retrieve information in the Non volatile RAM segment Use DIAG NRAM CREate MAX to find maximum available segment size Related Commands DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG NRAM ADDRess DIAG DOWNload DIAG UPLoad 142 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Example NRAM CREate Comments Example PEEK Parameters Comments Example Allocate a 15 Kbyte User Non Volatile RAM Segment DIAG NRAM CREate 15360 Allocate 15 Kbyte segment of user RAM DIAGnostic NRAM CREate MIN MAX returns the current or allowable MIN MAX size of the user Non volatile RAM segment e DIAG NRAM CREate does not allocate driver RAM until a subsequent reboot To get accurate results execute DIAG NRAM CREate after the reboot e Related Commands DIAG NRAM ADD
72. lt width gt lt data gt R L Stores an 8 16 or 32 bit value to RAM RDISk ADDRess R L Returns the starting address of an IBASIC RAM volume CREate lt size gt MIN MAX R L Allocates RAM for an IBASIC RAM volume CREate MIN MAX R L Returns the current or allowable size of the RAM volume UPLoad MADDress lt address gt lt byte_count gt R L Returns data from non volatile user RAM starting at address SADDress lt address gt lt byte_count gt R L Returns data from non volatile user RAM at address OUTPut ECLTrg lt line gt ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 IMMediate R Generate pulse on specified ECL trigger line LEVel IMMediate lt evel gt 0 1 OFF ON R Sets the output level of the specified ECL trigger line IMMediate R Returns the output level of the specified ECL trigger line SOURce lt source gt INT IEXT INONE R Setthe source which drives the selected ECL trigger line SOURce R Returns the source driving the selected ECL trigger line STATe lt mode gt 0 1 OFF ON R Enables configuration of the specified ECL trigger line STATe R Returns the current state of the selected trigger line Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 227 SCPI Commands Quick Reference Command Mode Description Mode R active in RUN mode L active in LOAD mode EXTernal IMMediate R Generate pulse on command module Trig Out port LEVel IMMediate lt evel gt 0 1 O
73. not supported a trigger not supported error will be returned This command can only be executed by the System instrument in a command module that is serving as resource manage for the entire VXIbus system Related Commands VXI CONF MEXTender ECLTrg lt n gt VXI CONF MEXTender TTLTrg lt n gt VXI ROUTe INTerrupt lt n gt Example Direct interrupt line 1 from a card cage with child side extender at logical address 5 to an extended card cage with a parent side extender of logical address 6 VXISEL 5 Select logical address 5 VXI CONF MEXT INT1 OUT Configure the logical address 5 extender as OUT VXI SEL 6 Select logical address 6 VXI CONF MEXT INT1 IN Configure the logical address 6 extender as IN 198 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 CONFigure MEXTender TTLTrg lt n gt Parameters Comments VXI CONFigure MEXTender TTLTrg lt n gt lt direction gt is used configure the selected mainframe extender to direct the TTL trigger specified by lt n gt Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric 0 through 1 none lt direction gt discrete IN OUT NONE none Select the logical address of the extender to access with VXI SELect The trigger line affected is specified in the TTLTrg lt n gt node of the command by a number ranging from 0 to 7 Numbers greater than 7 will generate Error 113 Undefined header A mainframe extender can direct a
74. of Values Units lt address gt numeric 0 to 16 777 215 4 HFFFFFE none lt data gt arbitrary block See Parameter Types none program data on page 121 CAUTION Be certain that all of the data you download will be contained entirely within the allocated NRAM segment Writing data outside of the NRAM segment will disrupt the operation of the command module Most computers terminate an OUTPUT PRINT or WRITE statement with a carriage return or carriage return and line feed These End Of Line characters must be either accounted for NRAM segment sized to accommodate them or suppressed using an appropriate IMAGE or FORMAT statement Some helpful methods Size the NRAM segment a little larger than the expected data block Control the End Of Line characters with format statements Use the Definite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format see example on page 121 to send your data rather than the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format This command is generally used to download data into User Configuration Tables These tables allow the user to control the system s dynamic configuration interrupt line allocations commander servant hierarchy address space allocation and mainframe extender configurations lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats DOWNload is done by word 16 bit access so address must be even Be certain that address specifi
75. other number fail Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status About This Chapter This chapter covers the use of the ECLTRG and TTLTRG VXI backplane trigger lines and the HP E1406A Command Module s Trig In and Trig Out ports Also covered is the structure of the status system used by Hewlett Packard VXI instruments The main sections of this chapter include e Using VXI Backplane Trigger Lines and Ports Page 101 e Programming the Status System Page 104 e Status System Programming Examples Page 111 Using VXI Backplane Trigger Lines and Ports Located on the P2 connector of the VXIbus backplane are trigger lines ECLTRGO ECLTRG1 and TTLTRGO TTLTRG7 These lines are available for triggering handshaking timing and so forth The signal characteristics of these trigger lines and of the command module s Trig In port are shown in Figure 4 1 ECLTRG Y N Y TTLTRG N joo Ct ECLTRG Active Hi H gt 0 9V TILTRG Active Lo H gt 2 0V L lt 1 7V L lt 0 8V Figure 4 1 ECLTRG and TTLTRG Signal Characteristics Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status 101 Prog ramming the The programming sequence used to set up the trigger lines and trigger ports Trigger Lines and _ is shown in Figure 4 2 Detailed information on the commands used can be the Tri gger Ports found in Chapter 5 of this manual Note In the following commands lt n gt is 0 or 1 when selecting a
76. re enabled each time an interrupt is acknowledged Enable an Interrupt Acknowledgment on Line 2 DIAG INT SET2 Set up interrupt line 2 DIAG INT ACT ON Enable interrupt acknowledged 138 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 INTerrupt PRlority 7 Comments Example INTerrupt PRlority n Comments Example DIAGnostic INTerrupt PRlority n lt level gt gives a priority level to the VXI interrupt line specified by n Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units n numeric 1 through 7 1 lt level gt numeric 1 7 MIN MAX DEF none e The priority of an interrupt line determines which line will be acknowledged first when more than one line is interrupting For level lower values have lower priority level 1 is a lower priority than level 2 e No parameter or DEF default sets priority to 1 PRlority1 through PRlority7 specifies the VXI interrupt lines 1 through 7 Sending PRlority without an n value specifies VXI interrupt line 1 In order for an interrupt to be serviced using the DIAGnostic INTerrupt commands the interrupt line 7 must be assigned to an interrupt handler using the interrupt line allocation table see page 54 This command has no effect if only one interrupt line is to be set up Related Commands DIAG INTerrupt ACTivate DIAG INTerrupt SETup m DIAG INTerrupt RESPonse Setup Set a Priority and Wait for VXI Interrupt Respo
77. register set bits 163 165 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 275 event register state 108 218 event register unmasked bits 162 165 218 External Trigger driving source 153 External Trigger logic level 152 External Trigger state 153 Flash ROM drivers in FROM 135 hierarchy configuration 192 193 input buffer size 174 175 interrupt acknowledge response 140 interrupt handling 141 interrupt priority level 139 logical addresses 196 209 modules installed 189 190 237 modules logical address 188 non volatile RAM areas 134 non volatile RAM current or allowable size 143 non volatile RAM starting address 142 number of bits 172 179 number of drivers loaded 134 number of Flash ROM drivers 137 number of system devices 201 parity 177 178 primary HP IB address 168 RAM drivers in DRAM 135 receive pacing protocol 173 ROM drivers in table 135 RTS line control 170 SCPI version 183 serial interface owner 126 static information 193 195 stop bits 179 system calendar 181 system drivers 135 system time 183 transmit pacing mode 179 transmit pacing protocol 180 trig out port driving source 153 trig out port logic level 152 trig out port state 153 trigger level 103 trigger source 103 trigger state 103 TTL Trigger driving trigger source 155 TTL Trigger logic level 155 TTL Trigger state 156 word serial commands 215 QUERy 201 Questionable Data Group description 110
78. shield attached Our goal is to make installation of your C size VXI system as easy as possible To oso HP VIC HP VXI Installation Consultant is provided with the HP E1406A Command Module HP VIC is a Microsoft Windows program that helps you configure and install the HP E1406A Command Module based on VXI systems If your system contains an HP E1406A Command Module to be controlled by a computer external to the VXI mainframe it is recommended you configure your system using HP VIC Chapter 1 HP E1406A Command Module Overview 15 Command Module Functional Description The HP E1406A Command Module is the foundation of a VXIbus system see Figure 1 1 Though its role in a VXIbus system is largely transparent for example the user need not program its functions it provides the following key functions e Translates SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands for HP register based instruments e Provides the VXIbus slot O and resource manager capabilities e Can drive the VXIbus TTLTRGO 7 and ECLTRGO 1 trigger lines The module contains SMB connectors for placing an external trigger onto the selected line s and for routing an internal trigger to a device external to the mainframe e Contains an internal clock that allows you to set and read the time and date e Is the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB to VXIbus interface HP E1406A A a Series C Mainframe Terminal io g g o
79. the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 Monitor Mode Monitor mode displays the status of an instrument while it is being controlled from remote Monitor mode is useful for debugging programs Y ou can place an instrument in monitor mode using terminal interface menus or by executing the DISP MON STAT ON command from the terminal interface or by remote Pressing most terminal interface keys will automatically exit monitor mode and return to the instrument menu However you can use the left and right arrow keys in monitor mode to view long displays Note Enabling monitor mode slows instrument operations If the timing or speed of instrument operations is critical such as making multimeter readings at a precise time interval you should not use monitor mode SWITCH_32 MONITOR OPEN El CLOSE di SCAN SWITCH_32 Enter card number or AUTO 1 MU gt IE gt IES IE Enter card number or type AUTO and press RETURN SWITCH_32 Chan 5 313131535 30380 mon card 1 1 IS gt IE gt IE SCPI commands used DISP MON CARD lt card_number gt DISP MON STAT ON Figure 3 13 Selecting Monitor Mode Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 75 Table 3 1 shows the status annunciators that may appear in the bottom line of the screen in monitor mode Some instruments also have device specific annunciators see your specific module user s manual for more information Table 3 1 Monitor Mode Display Annunciators
80. the command is not on the multimeter menu After selecting the VOLTMR menu type the following commands and press the Return key after each command CONF VOLT DC SAMP COUN 10 READ These commands configure the multimeter specify 10 measurements and display the readings on the terminal 76 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 Editing the Terminal Display Note The screen editing keys shown on page 78 allow you to edit user entered data or commands When editing the screen is in insert mode That is typed characters will be inserted into the string at the present cursor position The key labels shown are found on all HP terminals except HP terminals supporting ANSI terminal protocol See Using Supported Terminals on page 79 for equivalent key functions on your terminal General Key Descriptions Menu and Menu Control Keys through f5 SEL_INST PRV_MENU MORE RCL_PREV RCL_NEXT This section explains the function of each of the terminal interface s menu menu control and editing keys If a key is not functional in a particular situation pressing that key does nothing except to cause a beep Label menu choices for corresponding function keys Returns to the Select an instrument menu Returns to the previous menu level within an instrument menu or escapes from an input prompt When you reach the top of an instr
81. the line fuse s only with fuse s of the same voltage and current rating and type DO NOT use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse holders Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields are for use by service trained personnel only Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the equipment switched off To avoid dangerous electrical shock DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless you are qualified to do so DO NOT operate damaged equipment Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into this product have been im paired either through physical damage excessive moisture or any other reason REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until safe operation can be verified by service trained personnel If necessary return the product to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Of fice for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained DO NOT service or adjust alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product Return the product to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office for service and repair
82. to override the default algorithm ERROR 52 DEVICE OUTSIDE OF LADD WINDOW This error occurs when a device or devices were found outside the default maximum or outside the user defined range for the extender You should reconfigure the logical addresses of the V XIbus devices or create a new extender table for the system to override the default algorithm ERROR 53 INVALID EXTENDER A24 WINDOW This error occurs when the configuration routine finds an invalid start address or size for an extender A24 address window You should reconfigure the VMEbus memory devices or create a user defined extender table to override the default algorithm ERROR 54 DEVICE OUTSIDE OF A24 WINDOW This error occurs when an A24 memory device is located outside of the allowable logical address range of an MXIbus extender You should reconfigure the VMEbus memory devices or create a user defined extender table to override the default algorithm ERROR 55 INVALID EXTENDER A32 WINDOW This error occurs when the resource manager finds an invalid start address or size for an extender A32 address window You should reconfigure the VMEbus memory devices or create a user defined extender table to override the default algorithm ERROR 56 DEVICE OUTSIDE OF A32 WINDOW This error occurs when an A32 memory device is located outside of the allowable logical address range of an MXIbus extender You should reconfigure the VMEbus memory devices or create a user defined extender ta
83. value returned by DIAG INT RESPonse If bits 0 15 are used the logical address is determined by adding 65 536 to the value returned if the number returned is negative Only the interrupt lines previously configured with the DIAG INT SETup n commands generate responses for this command If there are interrupts on multiple lines when this command is received or when the acknowledgment was enabled with DIAG INT ACTivate the response data returned will be from the line with the highest priority set using the DIAG INT PRlority n command If interrupt acknowledge has not been enabled with DIAG INT ACTivate then it will be enabled by DIAG INT RESPonse System instrument execution is halted until the interrupt acknowledgment response is received DIAG INT WAIT can also be used to wait for the interrupt response Related Commands DIAG INTerrupt ACTivate DIAG INTerrupt SETup a DIAG INTerrupt PRlority n Setup and Wait for VXI Interrupt Response on Line 2 DIAG INT PRI2 5 Set priority to 5 on line 2 DIAG INT SET2 ON Handle interrupt on line 2 Code which will initiate an action resulting in an interrupt DIAG INT RESP Read the acknowledge response 140 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 INTerrupt SETup n Parameters Comments Example INTerrupt SETup n Parameters Comments DIAGnostic INTerrupt SETup r lt mode gt specifies that an interrupt on VXI backplane interrupt line n will be servi
84. 0 201 215 device register 260 ECL Trigger register 30 enable register 105 108 109 164 217 event register 105 108 109 111 162 166 217 event register clearing 218 event register query set bits 163 165 event register query state 108 218 event register query unmasked bits 162 165 218 event register reading 163 165 event register reading mask 162 165 interrupt register 30 offset 260 reading A16 address space 202 212 reading contents 204 response register 53 standard event registers 108 status byte enable register 108 status byte register 108 162 165 status byte register query 222 status register 104 status register enable query 221 status register programming 104 transition filter 105 TTL Trigger register 30 utility register 31 writing to 205 Remote HP IB message 225 Remove Individual Macro Command 221 Request for Service RQS 107 111 bit 112 114 Request To Send RTS output line 170 query setting 170 Required Status Groups 106 Reserving A24 A32 Address Space 48 51 for VMEbus device 51 Reset 206 bit 206 button 18 configuration in non volatile memory 124 instrument key RST_INST 65 RS 232 configuration 124 serial interface parameters 124 soft 206 using RST command 221 VXIbus devices 206 RESet 206 Resource Manager A24 A32 address allocation 44 45 assigning logical addresses 22 28 assigning servant modules 38 BNO command 60 configure A
85. 100 emulators or ST VT220 followed by Return for VT220 emulators or ST WYSE30 followed by Return for WY 30 emulators or ST WYSES50 followed by Return for WY 50 emulators If you now see the Select an instrument menu labels go to the beginning of this chapter and try the menus or Turn the mainframe off and then on again Continue with this chapter to learn how to use your terminal without menus Using a Terminal You can still control instruments installed in your mainframe without using Without Menus _ the terminal interface menus In this case you will send common commands and SCPI commands to your instruments by typing them on your terminal keyboard or through a computer interface Selecting Instruments To send commands to and receive responses from an instrument you must first select that instrument Two commands are provided to select instruments They are SI Select Instrument and SA Select Address These commands only work from the Select an instrument prompt The commands can be typed in upper case or lower case SI Command Sl selects an instrument by its name exactly as it would appear in the Select an instrument menu see Table 3 2 If your mainframe has more than one instrument with the same name follow the name with a comma and the desired instrument s logical address Here are some examples of Sl commands e si voltmtr selects a voltmeter instrument e si switch selects a switchbox instrument e S
86. 24 A32 memory 29 overriding 27 query number of devices 201 system configuration sequence 21 with extenders 47 without extenders 46 Response Register 53 Return Key 85 Right Arrow Key 78 RMC 221 ROUTe ECLTrgn 207 ROUTe INTerruptn 207 ROUTe TTLTrgn 208 RQS See Request for Service RS 232 correction codes 262 downloading device driver 136 interface 263 port on faceplate 18 reading data from Flash ROM 160 reset configuration 124 transmitting binary data 261 writing into Flash ROM 158 159 RST 105 221 RST_INST Key 65 78 85 RTS See Request To Send RTS Run Load Switch 18 S SA terminal interface command 83 263 Safety Warnings 10 15 Scanning Multimeter See Scanning Voltmeter Scanning Voltmeter menu levels and content 92 SCPI Commands abbreviated 120 arbitrary block program data parameters 121 157 158 boolean parameters 121 conformance information 238 DIAGnostic commands 124 145 147 discrete parameters 121 format 119 HP El328A 244 HP E1330A B 244 HP E1332A 242 HP E1333A 243 implied 120 linking 122 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 277 lower case letters 120 multimeter 240 numeric parameters 121 optional parameters 122 OUTPut commands 149 156 parameter types 121 PROGram commands 157 160 query version of SCPI 183 quick reference 226 reference 122 separator 120 square brackets 120 122 STATus commands 161 166 subsystem example o
87. 32 addresses 44 45 48 51 commander servant hierarchies 38 39 dynamic configuration 23 26 dynamically configured modules 22 ECL Trigger register 30 interrupt line allocation 53 59 interrupt register 30 INTX interrupt register 30 logical addresses 27 29 resource manager with extenders 47 resource manager without extenders 46 statically configured modules 22 system configuration sequence 21 TTL Trigger register 30 utility register 31 VXI MXI 27 36 CONFigure CTABle 186 CONFigure CTABle 187 CONFigure DCTable 187 CONFigure DCTable 188 CONFigure DLADdress 188 CONFigure DLISt 189 190 237 CONFigure DNUMber 190 CONFigure ETABle 191 CONFigure ETABle 191 CONFigure HIERarchy ALL 193 CONFigure HIERarchy 192 CONFigure INFormation ALL 195 CONFigure INFormation 193 194 CONFigure ITABle 195 CONFigure ITABle 196 CONFigure LADDress MEXTender 196 CONFigure LADDress 196 CONFigure MEXTender ECLTrgn 197 CONFigure MEXTender INTerruptn 198 CONFigure MEXTender TTLTrgn 199 CONFigure MTABle 200 CONFigure MTABle 201 CONFigure NUMBer MEXTender 201 CONFigure NUMBer 201 Configuring the Command Module 21 60 Conformity declaration 11 Connecting Command Module to Mainframe 19 Connectors clk in 18 clk out 18 CLK10 18 237 trig in 18 trig out 18 trigger 18 Control bit 128 130 159 DTR output lines 169 keys instrument 78 keys menu 77 RTS outpu
88. 32 window Invalid UDEF EXT table Invalid UDEF extender table data Unsupported UDEF TTL trigger Unsupported UDEF ECL trigger Device not in configure state The interrupter table valid flag is not 1 The valid flag in the memory table is not set to 1 An invalid logical address is specified in the memory table Non volatile RAM was corrupted a cold boot was executed or non volatile RAM was removed after the successful programming of the Flash ROMs or 14 device is violating VXI specification An HP E1406A which is not a slot zero device or a resource manager could not find a module that was granted to its servant area Driver RAM was corrupted a cold boot was executed or Driver RAM was removed after the successful programming of the Flash ROMs VME SYSTEM CONTROLLER switch is disabled on the HP E1406A module VXlbus extender in remote mainframe is not in slot 0 of its mainframe MXI extender cannot be configured with a valid LADD window A device is located outside the allowable logical address window range of an MXIbus extender MXIbus extender cannot be configured with a valid A24 memory window An A24 memory device is located outside the allowable logical address window range of an MXIbus extender MXIbus extender cannot be configured with a valid A32 memory window An A32 memory device is located outside the allowable logical address window range of an MXIlbus extender User defined logical address w
89. 400 Query Errors Command Errors A command error means the instrument cannot understand or execute the command When a command error occurs it sets the Command Error bit bit 5 in the Standard Event Status Register Command errors can be caused by e A syntax error was detected in a received command or message Possible errors include a data element which violates the instruments listening formats or is of the wrong type binary numeric etc for the instrument e Anunrecognizable command header was received Unrecognizable headers include incorrect SCPI headers and incorrect or unimplemented common commands e A Group Execute Trigger GET was entered into the input buffer inside of a common command Execution Errors An execution error indicates the instrument is incapable of doing the action or operation requested by a command When an execution error occurs it sets the Execution Error bit bit 4 in the Standard Event Status Register Execution errors can be caused by the following e A parameter within a command is outside the limits or inconsistent with the capabilities of an instrument e A valid command could not be executed because of an instrument failure or other condition Device Specific A device specific error indicates an instrument operation did not complete Errors possibly due to an abnormal hardware or firmware condition self test failure loss of calibration or configuration memory and so forth When a d
90. 644 644 444 44 Oe OES 226 Common Commands Quick Remerence anc ak hk a Rk ek E E 233 Appendix A HP E1406A Specifications and General Information 237 ENS TE ia a CoE ek id do ee oR de BREE A 231 Real Time Clock oc kine beh dee HER ikert e lie 231 CLRID p cic de AR hehe AAA A dd ewe a 231 Tupper DPI a ad e is a e amp 231 VIEWS gt racore t ee RA aa AAA a 237 Power Requirements rd AA ede A a 238 Cooling Reguibenien s css AA 238 SEPI Conformance EPA oa or a eo de d 238 Switehbox Configuratiod ck RRR RRR RE RED RR ER RRR 238 Multimeter Commands risa EEEY HERES ES 240 A o AA III eV Bok 242 D A Converter Commands esterra si bce be ede eRe EH Ewe EES 244 CARLA A Commands o ce AAA ORES SRR 244 system Instrument COMMANGS s 444465454464 28524 BRE ES DRS A 246 Appendix B HP E1406A Error Messages o e e o 249 Using This Appendix ss 46646 G4 5668 PEGE ARANA 249 Reading an Instrument s Error Queue eoa ea 2 2 040 ss 249 Emor Types arar thee le de A A e a 250 CAN EMO ons AAA AAA 250 Exe iO EROI sar oe Ee oe ee Oe Se a 250 Device Specife Emors oak nee eee ee EGS A EERE RO OER ES 250 CURTIS ak AAA KEE OAKES RAS OE RGR OD 231 Start up Error Messages and Warnings e 255 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Contents 7 Appendix C HP E1406A Command Module A16 Address Space 239 About Thie APpendiE sk i Ge Re rroi ieira ODER A A DEES 259 Register
91. 80 768 logical address 64 19 E1406 fi g c 1 Figure C 1 HP E1406A Command Module A16 Address Space Appendix C HP E1406A Command Module A16 Address Space 259 Register Addressing The Base Address Determining the Base Address Register Offset Register addresses for register based devices are located in the upper 25 of VXI A16 address space Every VXI device up to 256 devices per Command Module is allocated a 64 byte block of addresses A device may or may not use the entire block of addresses Figure C 1 shows the location of A16 address space in the HP E1406A Command Module When you are reading or writing to a device register a hexadecimal or decimal register address is specified This address consists of a base address plus a register offset The base address of a device in A16 address space is computed as 1FC00016 LADDR 64 16 Or 2 080 76810 LADDR 64 10 where 1FC00016 2 080 768 10 is the starting location of the VXI A16 addresses LADDR is the device s logical address and 64 is the number of address bytes per register based device For example the HP E1411B multimeter has a factory set logical address of 24 If this address is not changed the multimeter will have a base address of 1FC00016 24 64 16 1FC00016 60016 1FC6001 or 2 080 76810 24 64 10 2 080 76810 153610 2 082 30410 The register offset is the register s location in the block of 64 address bytes For e
92. 87 Arbitrary Block Program Data format More information on the Arbitrary Block Program format can be found on page 121 of this manual and in the ANSIAEEE 488 2 1987 document The table header is sent as a single 16 bit word which must contain the Valid Flag and the number of modules involved For a valid table the header is 256 plus the number of modules For example to indicate a valid table with seven entries the header is 263 256 7 263 When downloading data into the commander servant hierarchy table DIAGnostic DOWNload does not determine if the table is large enough to store the data If the amount of data sent by DIAGnostic DOWNload is greater than the table space allocated by DIAGnostic NRAM CREate system errors will occur You can recover from these errors by executing DIAGnostic BOOT COLD or by pressing the Ctrl R keys on an RS 232 terminal while cycling mainframe power Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 41 Example Assigninga The following program assigns secondary HP IB address 01 to the Secondary HP IB HP E1411B 514 Digit Multimeter at logical address 25 The program Address notes each of the steps used to create and load the table 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 Assign an I O path and allocate a variable to store commander servant Ihiera
93. 92 94 97 99 editing the display 77 78 executing commands from 76 menus 87 88 91 92 94 97 99 menus control keys 64 65 menus multiple command modules 63 menus select a switchbox 72 menus select an instrument 64 65 menus select keys 64 65 menus switchbox monitor mode 75 menus tutorial 64 menus using 62 63 reading HP IB address 65 select a switchbox menu 72 select an instrument menu 64 65 supported terminals 79 switchbox monitor mode 75 76 switchbox monitor mode display annunciators 76 switchbox monitor mode reading error messages 76 unsupported terminals 82 using terminals without menus 83 DMC 217 Documentation History 10 DOWNload CHECked MADDress 127 128 DOWNload CHECked SADDress 129 130 DOWNload MADDress 131 DOWNload SADDress 132 Downloading driver block 136 driver over RS 232 136 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 269 DRAM loading instrument driver into 136 querying drivers in table 135 DRAM AVAilable 133 DRAM CREate 134 DRAM CREate 134 DRIVer INSTall 135 DRIVer LIST FROM 135 RAM 135 ROM 135 DRIVer LIST 135 DRIVer LOAD 136 DRIVer LOAD CHECked 136 Drivers available in Flash ROM 135 creating area for loading 134 creating Flash ROM driver area 137 downloading a driver block 136 listing 135 loading into DRAM 136 query number in Flash ROM 137 query number loaded 134 DTR See Data Terminal Ready DTR Dynami
94. ABle lt address gt CTABle DCTable lt address gt DCTable DLADdress DLISt lt logical_addr gt DNUMber ETABle lt address gt ETABle HlERarchy ALL INFormation ALL ITABle lt address gt ITABle LADDress MEXTender MEXTender ECLTrg lt n gt lt direction gt INTerrupt lt n gt lt direction gt TTLTrg lt n gt lt direction gt MTABle lt address gt MTABle NUMber MEXTender QUERy lt logical_addr gt READ lt logical_addr gt lt re gister_addr gt RECeive MESSage lt logical_addr gt lt end_of_msg gt REGister READ lt register gt WRITe lt register gt lt data gt RESet lt logical_addr gt RESet ROUTe ECLTrg lt n gt INTerrupt lt n gt TTLTrg lt n gt SELect lt logical_addr gt SELect SEND 184 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 COMMand lt logical_addr gt lt command gt lt data gt COMMand lt ogical_addr gt lt command gt lt datal gt lt data2 gt MESSage lt logical_addr gt lt msg_string gt lt end_of_flag gt WRITe lt logical_addr gt lt register_addr gt lt data gt WSProtocol COMMand AHLine lt hand_id gt lt line_number gt AlLine lt int_id gt lt line_number gt AMControl lt response_mask gt ANO ANY lt cmd_word gt BAVailable lt end_bit gt BNO lt top_level gt BREQuest CEVent lt enable gt lt event_number gt CLR CLOCk CRESponse lt response_mask gt ENO GDEV
95. AN 2 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on channel 2 TCHAN3 DISP MON CHAN 3 STAT ON Monitor instrument operation on channel 3 AUTO DISP MON CHAN AUTO STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on active channel INPUT LEVEL CHAN1 voltage SENS1 EVEN LEV lt value gt Set trigger level voltage for channel 1 CHAN2 voltage SENS2 EVEN LEV lt value gt Set trigger level voltage for channel 2 SLOPE CHAN1 POS SENS1 EVEN SLOP POS Positive trigger slope for channel 1 L NEG SENS1 EVEN SLOP NEG Negative trigger slope for channel 1 CHAN2 IE POS SENS2 EVEN SLOP POS Positive trigger slope for channel 2 NEG SENS2 EVEN SLOP NEG Negative trigger slope for channel 2 COUPLE 7 AC INP COUP AC AC coupled input channels 1 and 2 only DC INP COUP DC DC coupled input channels 1and 2 IMPED 50_OHM INP IMP 50 504 input resistance channels 1 and 2 only 1_MOHM INP IMP 1e6 1MQ input resistance channels 1 and 2 only ATTEN 00B INP ATT O No input attenuation channels 1 and 2 only 20dB INP ATT 20 20dB input attenuation channels 1 and 2 only FILTER 7 ON INP FILT ON Input low pass filter on channels 1 and 2 only OFF INP FILT OFF Input low pass filter off channels 1 and 2 only FREQ CHAN1 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS1 FREQ Frequency measurement on channel 1 CHAN2 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS2 FREQ Frequency measurement on channel 2 CHAN3 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS3 FREQ Frequency measurement on channel 3 PERIOD CHAN1 T
96. Addiessing ek sc ak RAS eR keker k Atii A ES REE G 260 The Bee AdE ok ne Bh eR BEE S BP mw eH S eS do ES EW ERE S 260 pa e och ep oe be cb eh ek oe oh ee eee Oe OAS 260 Appendix D Sending Binary Data Over RS 232 o 261 Aboni THe pete i kw ae UG Bom ee ob a Wo hed ee koh E bod 261 Formatting Binary Data for RS 232 Transmission o o 261 Sending Binary Data Over RS 232 o o kah 263 Seine Up e NAMES oo bk ee a a a oS eee A 263 MUS adri eG bee ROOD eer a de OA ee Ee oe 265 8 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Contents Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technol ogy formerly National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by that organization s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Hewlett Packard product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from date of ship ment Duration and conditions of warranty for this product may be superseded when the product is integrated into becomes a part of other HP products During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option
97. B Bite he The ok 2135 Common Command Reference ecc 66 464 Gea corsa 216 A te Hh ad gh Be BRAS eke a EN 217 DMC lt namie_string gt lt command_DIOCK gt 2c a we eG GE 217 EMC ESTRES eri ed a de dd Heed eS 217 MEDIOS bho ee a RE eh A ic ee RE ae A 217 ESE SWI ee HEH ERD AO ELA OOD ESS OHS HR EES 217 ESET iras add add id e 218 ESR xuxa rad e da dra 218 VIC UE SITAS A ARO IEA AA 218 A eos os Ghee Se be E co ab as oe obs GRIM he coe hw Ses A i ots 218 ENTES Zar b KOSS ERROR RENE S A A ROE G EG 219 LANG 2 thao bd ea kD eee Rae ree ae Rak ee BR es 219 A Ges oh a ip heb ey oe Spe ee oe a gt ob pe vb gi ft abe he ec he Ss oy pooh 220 6 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Contents PMC ce a a A a AA 220 ts aa hak eee e E ae a a eR a CAE eS 220 a ia dd A A A Oe E a 220 ERMC UE SFE aeee taa A AA A 221 EST RE AA A de ARA Rd e e ee 221 A cd da ia OR ae 221 A ee ee ee ee ae a ee eee 221 OL Sk st Bk ee Sh E 222 PES ERR SREP ED 4PM OE RS EEE Ew EL Ewe OR EER 222 ONAL cb eea e em ea ee ee a i aad She Bcd we eae este 222 HP IB Messag Reterence aora AAA 223 Device Clear DCL or Selected Device Clear SDC 0c ononm ooo oros 223 G To Local DE ora a A a E Ree A 223 Group Execute Trgser GET sc ora e Ree RES 224 Merre Cer TFC A IE CAE RS 224 Local Lockout LLO y oa a a RRR RSS 224 REMOTE i 24 808 4 8S eG a TEED EO He GPO RR ROE A 225 senal POMISPOLIO ancad ede kekik AAA RA e e 223 SCPI Commands Quick Reference 44 4644 44
98. Byte Register You enable an event by specifying its decimal weight for lt mask gt To enable more than one event specify the sum of the decimal weights Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual for more information on the Standard Event Status Register OUTPUT 70900 ESE 60 Enable Bits 2 3 4 and 5 Respective weights are4 8 16 32 60 Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 217 ESE Standard Event Status Enable Query returns the weighted sum of all enabled unmasked bits in the Standard Event Status Register Example 10 OUTPUT 70900 ESE Send status enable query 20 ENTER 70900 A Place response in variable 30 PRINT A Print response 40 END ESR Standard Event Status Register Query returns the weighted sum of all set bits in the Standard Event Status Register After reading the register ESR clears the register The events recorded in the Standard Event Status Register are independent of whether or not those events are enabled with the ESE command Example 10 OUTPUT 70900 ESR Send Standard Event Status Register query 20 ENTER 70900 A Place response in variable 30 PRINT A Print response 40 END GMC Get Macro Query returns arbitrary block response data which contains lt name_strin g gt the command or command sequence defined by name_string The command sequence will be prefixed with characters which indicate the number of characters that follow the prefix Example 10 OUTPUT 70900 GMC LIST Ask fo
99. CNFG table The valid flag in the command servant hierarchy table is not set to 1 2138 Invalid UDEF CNFG table data There are more than 254 entries in the commander servant hierarchy table 2139 Invalid UDEF DC table The valid flag in the dynamic configuration table is not set to 1 2140 Invalid UDEF DC table data There are more than 254 entries in the dynamic configuration table 2141 Invalid UDEF Interrupter The logical address specified for an interrupter is a device that is not an interrupter Appendix B HP E1406A Error Messages 253 Table B 2 Error Messages and Causes continued Error Messages and Causes Code Message Cause 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 Invalid UDEF INTR table Invalid UDEF MEM table Invalid UDEF MEM table data Warning Non Volatile RAM contents lost MESG based open access failed Granted device not found Config warning 48 Driver RAM contents lost VME system controller disabled Extender not slot 0 device Invalid extender LADD window Device outside of LADD window Invalid extender A24 window Device outside of A24 window Invalid extender A32 window Device outside of A32 window Invalid UDEF LADD window Invalid UDEF A16 window Invalid UDEF A24 window Invalid UDEF A
100. CONFigure MEXTender ECLTrg lt n gt lt direction gt is used to configure the selected mainframe extender to direct the ECL trigger specified by lt n gt Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric Oori none lt direction gt discrete IN OUT NONE none Select the logical address of the extender to access with the VXI SELect command The trigger line affected is specified in the ECLTrg lt n gt node of the command by an integer of 0 or 1 Integers greater than 1 will generate Error 113 Undefined header A mainframe extender can direct a trigger line into or out of the VXIbus card cage mainframe that it is plugged into If you specify NONE the trigger line will be disabled and will not be directed in or out Some mainframe extender devices do not support some trigger lines These commands will determine whether the specified trigger line is supported before it attempts to execute the command If the trigger line is not supported a trigger not supported error will be returned This command can only be executed by the System instrument in a command module that is serving as resource manager for the entire VXIbus system Related Commands VXI CONF MEXTender INTerrupt VXI CONF MEXTender TTLTrg lt n gt VXI ROUTe ECLTrg lt n gt Example Direct ECL trigger line 1 from a card cage with child side extender at logical address 5 to an extended card cage with a pare
101. CREate 0 removes the Flash ROM driver area but does not affect the operating system program that is also in Flash ROM Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt num_drivers gt numeric 0 to 64 none e lt num_drivers gt is the maximum number of drivers to be loaded into Flash ROM e Use DIAG DRIVer LOAD to load drivers into Flash ROM when the Flash ROMS Run Load switch is in the Load position e Related Commands DIAG FROM AVAilable DIAG DRIVer LOAD DIAG DRIVer LIST Initialize a Flash ROM Driver Segment for a Maximum of Drivers DIAG FROM CRE 8 DIAGnostic FROM CREate returns the maximum number of drivers that a Flash ROM segment was created with e Related Commands DIAG FROM CREate LOAD mode command only Determine Maximum Number of Drivers from a Flash ROM Segment DIAG FROM CRE enter statement Statement returns maximum number of Flash ROM drivers Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 137 FROM SIZE Comments Example INTerrupt ACTivate Parameters Comments Example DIAGnostic FROM SIZE returns the amount of Flash ROM available to be used as Flash ROM driver area This command does not take into account the size of the driver index table checksum field and so forth e Related Commands DIAG FROM CREate LOAD mode command only DIAG FROM AVAilable DIAG DRIVer LOAD DIAG DRIVer LIST ALL Determine Amount of Space Left fo
102. Command language related errors also set a corresponding bit in the Standard Event Status Register refer to Chapter 4 for more information This program reads all errors one error at a time oldest to newest from the System instrument s command module error queue After reading each error that error is automatically erased from the queue When the error queue is empty this program returns 0 No error 10 OPTION BASE 1 20 DIM Message 256 Create array for error message 30 REPEAT Repeat next 3 lines until error number 0 40 OUTPUT 70900 SYST ERR Read error number and message 50 ENTER 70900 Code Message Enter error number and message 60 PRINT Code Message Print error number and message 70 UNTIL Code 0 80 END Error codes read from the error queue are preceded by the number 21 For example error code 11 displayed on a monitor appears as 2111 if read from the error queue instead Appendix B HP E1406A Error Messages 249 Error Types Negative error numbers are language related and categorized as shown in Table B 1 Positive error numbers are instrument specific and for the System instrument are summarized in Table B 2 For other instruments refer to their own user s manual for a description of error messages Table B 1 Negative Error Numbers Error Number Error Type 199 to 100 Command Errors 299 to 200 Execution Errors 399 to 300 Device Specific Errors 499 to
103. Contents HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual WEA 1 era ARE di a A A dere Ro 9 WARS 2434 6024S he a A RA ERE SEE A 10 SUSE SUIS 2 6 ise oh AAA AES EE Eh OE RED ES EES 10 Declitabioo al CORSA ete kk Re ee ok he eA oh od 11 Reader Comment Sheet pk ia eda bbe es PGE LOR OEE ORE EERO EES 13 Chapter 1 HP E1406A Command Module Overview LA About This Chapter cdi a OR dd ot dd E 15 Wammes amd COs o kde oe e a EE OE HES 15 sme HEY a CK DRAKA LAKERS ERED e eE 15 Command Module Functional Description o o 0200004 16 Command Module Physical Description lt c0 lt 24 17 Faceplate NTUNCIA OS 2 es ce hee ARERR EE EEE REE ORS 17 Faceplate CLK10 and Trigger Connectors s s ee ee ee 18 The HP IB and RS lt 232 POs 24 occa wee be Re eR Re EE SRY SO 18 The RuwLoad Soils gue b bee reiih bane cde ee a A 18 The Reset Dikon cecs he Oe GAS Ok Re RE A E EES 18 BC Levee os CR KR eS REESE SEES ee SS ROSS A 18 Installing the Command Module ina Mainframe o o 19 Command Module Memory s ss se eke aka Re aw EERE REE ERED KER BRA 20 Battery Packed Functong lt a e ba eek Be we Se ERE PER CR SS Se 20 Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 21 Abort The Chamet 4444 6 AER AR A E a E A AR A 21 System Configuration Sequerice sche bee OES SORES KE ra 21 Modules Configured Statically and Dynamically o o 22 Identifying Statically Configure
104. DDRess Comments Example COMMunicate SERial n Comments Example SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess returns the HP E1406A Command Module s primary HP IB address e The HP E1406A Command Module primary HP IB address is set using switches on the module Read the Primary HP IB Address SYST COMM GPIB ADDR Read the HP IB address enter statement Enter the HP IB address The SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n commands set and or modify the configuration of the serial interface s that are under control of the System instrument command module The interface to be affected by the command is specified by a number zero through seven which replaces the n in the SERial n command The number is the interface s card number Card number zero specifies the command module s built in interface while one through seven specify one of up to seven HP E1324 B size plug in serial interface modules The serial interface installed at System instrument s logical address 1 becomes card number 1 the serial interface installed at the next sequential logical address becomes card number 2 and so on The logical addresses used by plug in serial interfaces must start at System instrument s logical address 1 and be contiguous no unused logical addresses The factory set logical address of the HP E1406A Command Module is 0 e Serial communication commands take effect after the end of the program message containing the command Se
105. DDress e Related Commands DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG NRAM ADDRess DIAG UPLoad MADDress VXI CONF CTABle VXI CONF DCTable VXI CONF ITABle VXI CONF MTABle Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 127 Byte Format Each byte sent with this command is expected to be in the following format Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Control Bit Check Bits Data Bits Control Bit is used to indicate the serial driver information such as clear reset or end of transmission This bit is ignored by the regular 488 2 driver The control bit should be one for regular data Check Bits are used to detect and correct a single bit error The control bit is not included in the check The check bits are a Hamming single bit error correction code as specified by the following table Data Value Check Bits 0 0 1 7 2 6 3 1 4 5 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 2 12 6 13 1 14 0 15 7 Data Bits are the actual data being transferred four bits at a time Each word to be written requires four data bytes for transmission The significance of the data is dependent on the order received The first data byte received contains the most significant nibble of the 16 bit word to be written bits 15 12 The next data byte received contains the least significant nibble of the most significant byte of the word bits 11 8 The third data byte
106. Device Clear to unlock the System instrument in case the device at logical_addr does not respond VXI QUERy can be used to read the response in the Data Low Register when the VXI SEND COMM command is ANY and the command sent is a query This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use VXI WSP RESP Related Commands VXI SEND COMMand VXI WSProtocol RESP Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 201 Example READ Parameters Comments Read the Data Low Register of Device at Logical Address 72 VXI QUERY 72 enter statement Query value of Data Low Register Input 16 bit value VXI READ lt logical_addr gt lt register_addr gt allows access to the entire 64 byte A16 register address space for the device specified by logical_addr Since the VXIbus system is byte addressed while the registers are 16 bits wide registers are specified by even addresses only This method of identifying registers follows the VXIbus standard format Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt numeric Must round to 0 through 255 none lt register_addr gt numeric Must round to an even value none from O through 62 3En e Specifying an odd register address will cause Invalid word address Error 2003 Specifying a logical address not currently in the system will cause Error 2005 No card at
107. During configuration if an MXI extender device is present the resource manager will attempt to assign logical addresses and memory according to the rules listed below You can override these rules by creating a user defined extender table This table will be ignored if there are no MXI extender devices present The following rules and recommendations apply to assigning logical addresses For a more detailed discussion of how to assign logical addresses please refer to the HP El482B VXI MXI Bus Extender User s Manual The window of a local extender must include the logical addresses of all remote extenders on its interconnect bus The downward window of a local extender cannot include any devices which are not its descendants except its own address It must include all devices on all of its own descendant busses A local extender should have a higher logical address than any statically or dynamically configured devices on 1ts VMEbus excluding other local extenders A local extender should have a lower logical address than any of its corresponding remote extenders and stand alone devices on its interconnect bus A remote extender should have the lowest logical address on its own VMEbus The logical address of a remote extender can be lower than the address of its corresponding local extender on its interconnect bus Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 27 Default Logical The resource manager will attempt to ass
108. ECLTRG trigger line and 0 to 7 when selecting a TTLTRG trigger line Commands in square brackets are implied commands and are therefore optional The brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the instrument Enable Trigger Line or Trig Out Port Y Set the Trigger Line or Trig Out port source Is the Trigger Source INTernal NO Set the Trigger Level Figure 4 2 Backplane Trigger and Trig Out Port Configuration Sequence Enabling Trigger Lines In order to use a trigger line or the Trig Out port the trigger line or port and the Trig Out Port must be enabled This is done with the commands OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe 1 ON Enables a ECL trigger line OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe 1 ON Enables a TTL trigger line OUTPut EXTernal STATe 1 ON Enables the Trig Out port The reset condition for each of these commands is OFF Therefore a trigger line or the Trig Out port must be enabled before it can be used 102 Triggering and System Status Chapter 4 Setting the Trigger Source Setting the Trigger Level Sending a Trigger Pulse Querying the Trigger State Source and Level Once the trigger line or the Trig Out port has been enabled the source which drives the trigger line can be specified The commands used are OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce INT EXT NONE Selects ECL trigger source OUTPut TTLT
109. ENABle Parameters Comments Example QUEStionable ENABle Comments Example QUEStionable EVENt Comments Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt event gt sets an enable mask to allow events monitored by the Condition Register and recorded in the Event Register to send a summary bit to the Status Byte Register bit 7 Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt event gt numeric 256 none e When the summary bit is sent it sets bit 7 in the Status Byte Register e Related Commands STAT QUES ENABle Unmask Bit 8 in the Event Register STAT QUES ENAB 256 Unmask bit 8 STATus QUEStionable ENABle returns which bits in the Event Register Questionable Status Group are unmasked e Reading the Event Register mask does not change the mask setting STAT QUES ENABle lt event gt e Related Commands STAT QUES ENABle Read the Event Register Mask STAT QUES ENAB Query register mask STATus QUEStionable EVENt returns which bits in the Event Register Questionable Status Group are set The Event Register indicates when there has been a positive transition in the Condition Register e Reading the Event Register clears the contents of the register If the Event Register is to be used to generate a service request SRQ you should clear the register before enabling the SRQ SRE This prevents an SRQ from occurring due to a previous event e Related Commands S
110. EST TST Runs self test displays results 0 pass any other number fail Channel lists are of the form ccnn single channel ccnn ccnn two or more channels or ccnn ccnn range of channels where cc is the card number and nn is the channel number For example to access channel 2 on card number 1 specify 102 The card number identifies a module within the switchbox The switch module with the lowest logical address is always card number 01 The switch module with the next successive logical address is card number 02 and so on Scanning Voltmeter Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 User Entry Command s Used Description VOLTMTR MONITOR channel list DISP MON CHAN lt channel_list gt STAT ON Monitor instrument operations or 0 for auto VDC channel list MEAS VOLT DC lt channel_list gt Measure DC voltage on each channel VAC channel list MEAS VOLT AC lt channel_list gt Measure AC voltage on each channel OHM channel list MEAS RES lt channel_list gt Measure 2 wire resistance on each channel TEMP TCOUPLE B channel list MEAS TEMP TC B lt channel_list gt Measure C of B thermocouple on each channel E channel list MEAS TEMP TC E lt channel_list gt Measure C of E thermocouple on each channel EJ channel list MEAS TEMP TC J lt channel_list gt Measure C of J thermocouple on each channel K channel l
111. EVEN or ESR Failure to do so will prevent future SRQs from arriving Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status 107 Standard Event Status Group The meaning of each bit in the Status Byte is explained in the following table Table 4 1 Status Byte Bit Definitions Bit Name Description 0 Instrument dependent 1 Instrument dependent 2 Instrument dependent 3 QUE Summary bit from Questionable Data 4 MAV Messages available in Output Queue 5 ESB Summary bit from Standard Event 6 RQS Service request 7 OPR Summary bit from Standard Operation Status Example commands using the Status Byte and Status Byte Enable Registers SRE16 Generate an SRQ interrupt when messages are available SRE Find out what events are enabled to generate SRO interrupts STB Read and clear the Status Byte Event Register The Standard Event Status Group is frequently used and is one of the simplest The unique aspect of Standard Event is that you program it using common commands while you program all other status groups through the STATus subsystem Standard Event consists of only two registers the Standard Event s Event Register and the Standard Event s Enable Register Figure 4 7 illustrates the structure of Standard Event ESR Standard Event ESE Standard Event ESE Operation Complete OPC Request Control RC Query Error QYE Device Dependent Error DDE EXE
112. FFION R Sets the output level of the Trig Out port MMediate R Returns the output level of the Trig Out port SOURCe lt source gt INT TTLT lt n gt ECLT lt n gt NONE R Sets the source which drives the Trig Out port SOURce R Returns the source driving the Trig Out port STATe lt mode gt 0 1 OFF ON R Enables configuration of the Trig Out port STATe R Returns the state of the Trig Out port TTLTrg lt line gt TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 IMMediate R Generate pulse on the selected TTLT trigger line LEVel IMMediate lt evel gt 0 1 OFFION R Sets the output level of the selected TTLT trigger line MMediate R Returns the output level of the selected TTLT trigger line SOURCe lt source gt INT IEXT INONE R Sets the source driving the selected TTLT trigger line SOURce R Returns the source driving the selected TTLT trigger line STATe lt mode gt 0 1 OFFION R Enables configuration of the selected TTLT trigger line STATe R Returns the state of the selected TTLT trigger line PROGram SELected DEFine lt op_sys gt L Writes an operating system into Flash ROM CHECked lt op_sys gt L Writes an operating system into Flash ROM over an RS 232 line CHECked R L Returns the operating system in Flash ROM as a definite length arbitrary block formatted for sending over RS 232 DEFine R L Returns the operating system in Flash ROM as a definite length arbitrary block DELete L Erases th
113. HP 700 22 HP 700 43 Wyse WY 30 DEC VT 100 and DEC VT 220 The Run Load The run oad switch is located beneath the HP IB port This switch lets you Switch activate the loader instrument so that you can reprogram the Flash ROM or download device drivers to the Flash ROM The Reset Button The reset button is located beneath the run load switch This button is used to reconfigure your V XIbus system and return it to the power on state Extraction Levers The extraction levers provide easy insertion into and extraction from the C size mainframe 18 HP E1406A Command Module Overview Chapter 1 Installing the Command Module in a Mainframe Refer to Figure 1 3 to install the HP E1406A Command Module in a C size mainframe A i 1 Set the extraction levers out 2 Slide the HP E1406A into any slot until the backplane connectors touch Extraction Levers 3 Seat the command module into the mainframe by pushing in the extraction levers 4 Tighten the top and bottom screws to secure the command module to the mainframe S ES NOTE The extraction levers will not seat the backplane connectors on older VXlbus mainframes You must manually seat the connectors by pushing in the module until the module s front panel is flush with the front of the mainframe The extraction levers may be used to guide or remove the command 3 module To remove the co
114. I SWITCH same as above e si switch 16 selects switchbox at logical address 16 Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 83 Table 3 2 Instrument Names for the SI Command Menu Name Instrument SYSTEM The System Instrument built in to the command module VOLTMTR HP E1326B Stand Alone or HP E1326B Scanning Voltmeter Modules SWITCH Switchbox composed of one or more HP Multiplexer Modules DIG_I O HP E1330B Quad 8 Bit Digital Input Output Module IBASIC Optional IBASIC interpreter COUNTER HP E1332A 4 Channel Counter Totalizer or HP E1333A 3 Channel Universal Counter Modules D A HP E1328A 4 Channel Digital to Analog Converter Module SA Command SA selects an instrument by its logical address For multiple module instruments use the logical address of the first module in the instrument For example SA 8 selects the instrument at logical address 8 When you have selected an instrument the terminal interface will respond with an instrument prompt which is the instrument s menu name followed by its logical address e g VOLTMTR_8 To get a list of the logical addresses used in your mainframe send the SCPI command VXI CONF DLAD to the System instrument Then to determine what instrument is at each logical address send the command VXI CONF DLIS lt logical_address gt for each logical address in the list Refer to page 189 for information about this command Returning
115. IAG INT SET 2810 Not a handler for this line An attempt was made to set up an interrupt with DIAG INT SET for a line that has no handler see VXI CONF ITAB Start up Error Messages and Warnings Start up error messages and warnings are most often generated just after the mainframe is powered up or rebooted DIAG BOOT command These messages can be read from the error queue using the SYST ERR command We recommend that you include a routine at the beginning of your application programs which checks for start up errors before the program tries to access individual instruments See your VXIbus Configuration Guide for an example program Table B 3 Start Up Error Messages and Warnings Start Up Error Messages and Warnings Code Message Cause 1 Failed Device VXI device failed its self test 2 Unable to combine device Device type can not be combined into an instrument such as a scanning voltmeter or a switchbox 3 Config warning Device driver ID of device does not match list of drivers available Warning not found only 4 DC device block too big Dynamically configured device address block is greater than 127 5 Config error 5 A24 memory More A24 memory is installed in the mainframe than can be overflow configured into the available A24 memory space 6 A32 memory overflow More A32 memory is installed in the mainframe than can be configured into the available A32 memory space 7 DC device move failed
116. IB primary 168 HP IB query 168 HP IB reading the 65 interrupt line allocation table 195 logical 22 23 28 29 logical query 188 logical switchbox modules 72 non volatile RAM 142 registers 260 VMEbus devices 45 Annunciators faceplate 17 monitor mode status 76 Arbitrary Block Program Data Parameters 121 157 158 Attaching Command Module to Mainframe 19 Backplane interrupt lines 54 interrupt lines enabling interrupts 138 interrupt lines priority level 139 interrupt lines query interrupt acknowledge response 140 interrupt lines query interrupt handling 141 interrupt lines specifying service routine 141 SYSFAIL line 60 trigger lines and ports 101 103 Backspace Key 85 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 265 Base address 260 Battery backed functions 20 lifetime expected 20 237 Baud Rate query setting 171 setting 171 Begin Normal Operation BNO Command 60 Binary Data formatting 261 sending 263 264 Bits check bits 128 130 159 condition bits 105 control bits 128 130 159 data bits 128 130 159 device specific error bit 250 enable register 164 error bit 250 execution error bits 250 master state summary MSS 111 message available MAV 112 117 parity bits 176 177 query error bit 251 query set bits 163 165 query setting 172 179 query unmasking 162 165 request for service bit 112 114 reset bit 206 setting number of 172 178 status
117. ITm lt value gt Writes data to bit m on port 2 PORTS bit 0 7 value 0 1 DIG HAND3 MODE NONE DIG DATA3 BITm lt value gt Writes data to bit m on port 3 HP E1332A 4 Channel Counter Totalizer Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 User Entry Command s Used Description COUNTER MONITOR CHAN1 DISP MON CHAN 1 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on channel 1 CHAN2 DISP MON CHAN 2 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on channel 2 m CHAN3 DISP MON CHAN 3 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on channel 3 CHAN4 DISP MON CHAN 4 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on channel 4 AUTO DISP MON CHAN AUTO STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on active channel INPUT LEVEL CHAN1 amp 2 voltage SENS1 EVEN LEV lt value gt Set level trigger voltage for channels 1 amp 2 CHAN3 amp 4 voltage SENS3 EVEN LEV lt value gt Set level trigger voltage for channels 3 amp 4 SLOPE CHAN1 POS SENS1 EVEN SLOP POS Positive level trigger slope for channel 1 NEG SENS1 EVEN SLOP NEG Negative level trigger slope for channel 1 CHAN2 POS SENS2 EVEN SLOP POS Positive level trigger slope for channel 2 NEG SENS2 EVEN SLOP NEG Negative level trigger slope for channel 2 CHAN3 POS SENS3 EVEN SLOP POS Positive level trigger slope for channel 3 NEG SENS3 EVEN SLOP NEG Negative level trigger slope for channel 3 CHAN4 F POS SENS4 E
118. Interface Chapter 3 Using Supported Terminals The display terminal interface supports several popular terminal brands and models This chapter will show you how to access all of the terminal interface functions described previously using your supported terminal The Su ppo rted The following list names the supported terminals and shows where to go Terminals for more information If your terminal is not named in this list see Using Other Terminals on page 82 HP 700 92 Menu tutorial HP 700 94 Menu tutorial HP 700 22 See this page HP 700 43 and WYSE WY 30 See page 81 The keyboard guides provided for the listed terminals may be removed or copied and placed near your keyboard while you go through the menu tutorial sections Using the HP 700 22 The HP 700 22 terminal emulates the DEC VT100 or VT220 terminals Some functions of the display terminal interface have been mapped into keys with other labels A keyboard map is provided for each of the emulation models Use these keyboard maps to help locate the terminal interface functions VT100 Key Map The symbols shown in the upper left corner of key each are now mapped with the function labeled in the center of each key PF PF2 PF3 PF4 f f2 f3 f4 7 f 4 1 1 9 8 9 a f6 f f 3 6 Roll ext Insert Delete Up age Line Line 1 2 3 Roll Prev Del Down Page Li 0 rcl_prev year Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 79 Selectin
119. L RPRotocol R Sends a Read Protocol command to the logical address set using VXI SEL RSARea R Sends a Read Servant Area command to the logical address set using VXI SEL RSTB R Sends a Read Status Byte command to the logical address set using VXI SEL SLModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 127 R Sends a Set Lower MODID command to the logical address set using VXI SEL 232 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 SCPI Commands Quick Reference Command Mode Description Mode R active in RUN mode L active in LOAD mode SLOCk R Sends the Set Lock command to the logical address set using VXI SEL SUModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 63 R Sends a Set Upper MODID command to the logical address set using VXI SEL TRIGger R Sends a Trigger command to the logical address set using VXI SEL MESSage RECeive lt count terminator gt R Receives a message from the logical address set using VXI SEL using both the word serial protocol and the byte transfer protocol SEND lt message_string gt END NEN R Sends a message to the logical address set using VXI SEL The message is sent using both the word serial protocol and the byte transfer protocol QUERy AHLine lt hand_id gt lt line_number gt R Assigns a handler to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response A line number of 0 means the handler is to be disconnected AlLine lt
120. L1AEND gt e Related Commands PROG SELected DELete 158 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Byte Format Each byte sent with this command is expected to be in the following format Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Control Bit Check Bits Data Bits Control Bit is used to indicate the serial driver information such as clear reset or end of transmission This bit is ignored by the regular 488 2 driver The control bit should be one for regular data Check Bits are used to detect and correct a single bit error The control bit is not included in the check The check bits are a Hamming single bit error correction code as specified by the following table over an RS 232 line Data Value Check Bits 0 0 1 7 2 6 3 1 4 5 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 2 12 6 13 1 14 0 15 7 Data Bits are the actual data being transferred four bits at a time Each word to be written requires four data bytes for transmission The significance of the data is dependent on the order received The first data byte received contains the most significant nibble of the 16 bit word to be written bits 15 12 The next data byte received contains the least significant nibble of the most significant byte of the word bits 11 8 The third data byte received contains the most significant nibble of the least significant byte of t
121. LADDress Comments CONFigure LADDress MEXTender Comments VXI CONFigure ITABle returns the starting address of the user s interrupt line allocation table Query Address of Interrupt Line Allocation Table VXI CONF ITABle Ask for address enter statement Return address VXI CONFigure LADDress returns a comma separated list of logical addresses of devices in the mainframe or a list of devices in the command module s servant area if the command module is not the resource manager This is an integer between 1 and 256 inclusive The logical address of the device responding to the command will be the first entry in the list If the command is received by a device other than the resource manager the response will contain the logical address of the destination device followed by a list of devices which are immediate servants to the destination device e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI CONF NUMBer VXI CONFigure LADDress MEXTender returns a comma separated list of logical addresses of mainframe extender devices in the system This is an integer between 1 and 256 inclusive If there are no extender devices in the system a 1 will be returned An error is reported if the command is received by a device other than the resource manager e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI CONF NUMBer MEXTender 19 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 CONFigure MEXTender ECLTrg lt n gt Parameters Comments VXI
122. Line on page 57 Data Format Data can be sent to the interrupt line allocation table in any convenient format as long as the binary data is preserved This can be accomplished using DIAGnostic PEEK and DIAGnostic POKE by reading the data into a variable in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the Arbitrary Block Program Data format and so forth In the following example this is accomplished by reading the data into 16 bit integer variables in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the ANSVTEEE 488 2 1987 Arbitrary Block Program Data format More information on the Arbitrary Block Program format can be found on page 121 of this manual and in the ANSVIEEE 488 2 1987 document 56 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 CAUTION Example Assigning an Interrupt Line The table header is sent as a single 16 bit word which must contain the Valid Flag and the number of data records For a valid table the header is 256 plus the number of data records For example to indicate a valid table with one data record the header is 257 256 1 257 When downloading data into the interrupt line allocation table DIAGnostic DOWNload does not determine if the table is large enough to store the data If the amount of data sent by DIAGnostic DOWNload is greater than the table space allocated by DIAGnostic NRAM CREate system errors will occur You can recover from these errors by execut
123. MAV bits setting 114 117 available MAV bits using 112 114 based instruments programming 63 based instruments receive messages from 203 string sending 211 MODID 22 Module dynamically configured 22 identification bus MODID 22 number in switchbox 72 168 query extender logical address 196 query hierarchy configuration 192 193 query logical address 196 209 query number installed in mainframe 190 query specific devices 189 190 237 query static information 193 195 statically configured 22 Monitor Mode enabling 75 status annunciators 76 switchbox 75 76 MORE Key 64 77 Multimeter assigning interrupt lines 57 assigning secondary HP IB address 42 confirmed commands 240 confirmed SCPI commands 240 menu levels and content 94 non SCPI commands 241 setting logical address dynamically 25 Multiple Command Modules using 63 MXI VXI Configuration 27 36 logical addresses default 28 logical addresses setting 27 N Negative error numbers 250 transitions NTR 105 transitions NTR setting mask 163 166 Non SCPI Commands HP E1328A 244 HP E1330A B 245 HP E1332A 242 HP E1333A 243 multimeter 241 switchbox 239 system instrument 247 Non Volatile Memory resetting configurations 124 serial communications parameters 126 Non Volatile RAM allocating for user defined table 142 loading instrument drivers 134 querying size 134 143 querying starti
124. ME ADDRess ADDRess SIZE STATE STATe SOURce DIGital CONTrol lt port gt POL arity POLarity VALue DATA lt port gt BIT lt number gt TRACe HANDshake DELay MODE MODE POLarity POLarity VALue FLAG lt port gt POLarity POLarity HANDshake lt port gt DELay MODE MODE TRACe CATalog DATA DATA DEFine DELete Appendix A HP E1406A Specifications and General Information 245 System Instrument Commands Table A 13 System Instrument SCPI 1994 0 Confirmed Commands OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt IMMediate LEVel IMMediate IMMediate SOURce SOURce STATe STATe TTLTrg lt n gt IMMediate LEVel IMMediate IMMediate SOURce SOURce STATe STATe PROGram SELected DEFine DEFine DELete ALL SELected STATus OPERation CONDition ENABle ENABle EVENt NTRansition PTRansition PREset QUEStionable CONDition ENABle ENABle EVENt NTRansition PTRansition SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess SERial CONTrol DTR DTR RTS RTS RECeive BAUD PARity SBITs SBITs TRANsmit AUTO AUTO PACE DATE DATE ERRor TIME VERSion VXI CONFigure DNUMber HIERarchy ALL INFormation ALL LADDress NUMBer REGister READ WRITe RESet SELect VXI
125. MMediate returns the current logic level of the Trig Out port Determine the Current State of Trig Out Port OUTP EXT LEV enter statement Ask for level Return state of trigger bus OUTPut EXTernal SOURce lt source gt selects which source will drive the Trig Out port Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt source gt discrete INT TTLTrg ECLTrg NONE none e INT allows the Trig Out port to be driven by OUTP EXTernal LEVel e TTLTrg or ECLTrg allows the Trig Out port to be driven by the selected VXIbus trigger line e OUTP EXTernal STATe must be ON for the source to operate the Trig Out port Setting STATe OFF does not change the source so the signal driving the port is still present Setting STATe back ON sets the source to NONE 152 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Example EXTernal SOURce Comments Example EXTernal STATe Parameters Comments Example EXTernal STATe Example e Related Commands OUTP EXTernal STATe OUTP EXTernal LEVel MMediate e RST Condition OUTP EXTernal SOURce NONE Select TT LTrg0 to Drive the Trig Out Port OUTP EXT SOUR TTLTO OUTPut EXTernal SOURce queries for the source currently driving the Trig Out port e Querying the source with STATe OFF returns NONE regardless of the actual source setting Determine the Source Driving Trig Out OUTP EXT SOUR enter statement Return Trig Out
126. N and OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce must be set to INT or NONE in order to issue an immediate pulse A settings conflict error is generated if STATE is not e Related Commands OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe Example Send Trigger Pulse to ECLTrg0 ON OUTP ECLTO STAT ON OUTP ECLTO SOUR INT OUTP ECLTO IMM ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate lt level gt sets the selected IM Med late ECLTrg trigger line to logic level 0 or 1 Set System instrument to send a pulse on ECLTO Set trigger source to internal Pulse the ECLTrg0 bus Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric Oori N A lt level gt boolean 0 1 OFF ON none Comments e OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt STATe must be ON OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce must be INTernal OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt STATe must be ON for the source to drive the trigger line Setting STATe OFF does not change the source so the signal driving the line is still present Setting STATe back ON sets the source to NONE and de asserts the line e RST Condition OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel 0 Example ECLTrg0 Set to Logic Level 1 OUTP ECLTO ON OUTP ECLTO SOUR INT OUTP ECLTO LEV 1 Enable ECLTO Set the source to internal Set trigger level Related Commands OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt STATe
127. O O O Please write any comments or suggestions below be specific 14 HP E1406A User s Manual Chapter 1 HP E1406A Command Module Overview About This Chapter This chapter contains WARNINGS and CAUTIONS a functional and physical overview of the HP E1406A Command Module and instructions on installing the command module in a mainframe Chapter contents are as follows e Warnings and Cautions 0 eee eee o Page 15 e Using HP VIC oi deus Heb eet er eet eee eee Page 15 e Command Module Functional Description Page 16 e Command Module Physical Description Page 17 e Installing the Command Module ina Mainframe Page 19 e Command Module Memory 0 0 2 005 Page 20 Warnings and Cautions WARNING CAUTION Using HP VIC SHOCK HAZARD Only qualified service trained personnel who are aware of the hazards involved should install configure or remove the multiplexer module Disconnect all power sources from the mainframe the terminal modules and installed modules before installing or removing a module STATIC ELECTRICITY Static electricity is a major cause of component failure To prevent damage to the electrical components in the multiplexer observe anti static techniques whenever removing configuring and installing a module The multiplexer is susceptible to static discharges Do not install the multiplexer module without its metal
128. OUT 7 1 GOTO Complete Complete B SPOLL 70900 OFF TIMEOUT 7 Return the starting address of the table in non volatile user RAM OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM ADDR ENTER E1406 A Download the required bytes ISee the user defined extender table for the meaning of these bytes DATA 258 63 128 64 255 0 64 64 0 128 257 769 15936 64 128 64 255 0 64 64 255 0 256 770 15935 READ MXI_config OUTPUT E1406 USING 3 K DIAG DOWN A 40 OUTPUT E1406 USING W MXI_config ILink the user defined MXI table to the appropriate algorithm OUTPUT E1406 VXI CONF ETAB A Restart the system instrument to set the user defined configuration OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT WARM END Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 35 Comments e The following errors are associated with the extender table or indicate that you may need to create an extender table ERROR 50 EXTENDER NOT SLOT 0 DEVICE This error occurs when a remote VXIbus extender in a remote mainframe is not in slot 0 of its mainframe The resource manager expects all remote VXIbus extenders to be installed in slot O of their mainframe ERROR 51 INVALID EXTENDER LADD WINDOW This error occurs when the configuration routine finds an invalid start address or size for an extender logical address window You should reconfigure the logical addresses of the VXIbus devices or create a user defined extender table for the system
129. OWNer lt owner gt SYSTem IBASic NONE R L Allocates the built in serial interface OWNer R L Returns SYST IBAS or NONE SERiall n STORe R L Stores serial communication parameters into non volatile storage DOWNload CHECked R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L Write data to non volatile user RAM starting at the specified address using error correction Write data to non volatile user RAM at the specified address using error correction Write data to non volatile user RAM starting at the specified address Write data to non volatile user RAM at the specified address Returns the amount of RAM remaining in the DRAM Driver RAM segment Creates a non volatile RAM area for loading instrument drivers Returns the current or allowable size and maximum number of drivers for Driver RAM Makes the drivers downloaded into Flash ROM available installs them by creating the driver index table Lists all drivers from all driver tables RAM and ROM found on the system Lists all drivers found in the Flash ROM driver table Lists all drivers found in the RAM driver table Lists all drivers found in the ROM driver table Loads the instrument driver contained in the specified driver_block into a previously created DRAM segment or Flash ROM area 226 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 SCPI Commands Quick Reference Command Mode Descripti
130. Once the new serial interface owner has been specified DIAG COMM SER OWN the change will not take effect until you reboot warm the system Related Commands DIAG COMM SER O OWN Give the Serial Interface to IBASIC DIAG COMM SER IBAS Note that 0 zero and OWNer are implied DIAG BOOT WARM Complete the allocation Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 125 COMMunicate DIAGnostic COMMunicate SERial 0 O0WNer returns the current SERial 0 OWNer 2 owner of the built in serial interface The values returned will be SYST IBAS or NONE Comments e Related Commands DIAG COMM SER O OWN Example Determine Which Instrument has the Serial Interface DIAG COMM SER Note that 0 zero and OWNer are implied enter statement Statement returns the string SYST IBAS or NONE COMMunicate DIAGnostic COMMunicate SERial n STORe stores the serial SERial r STORe communications parameters for example BAUD BITS PARity and so on into Non volatile storage for the serial interface specified by n in SERial n Comments e Until DIAG COMM SER n STOREe is executed communication parameter values are stored in volatile memory and a power failure will cause the settings to be lost DIAG COMM SER n STORe stores the serial interface s serial communications parameters Card number 0 in place of n specifies the command module s built in interface while 1 through 7 specifies one of up to seven HP E1324A
131. R n CONT DTR OFF Set DTR line to static V HIBFULL card number SYST COMM SER n CONT DTR IBF Set DTR for hardware handshaking STANDRD card number SYST COMM SER n CONT DTR STAN DTR operates to RS 232 standard RTS READ card number SYST COMM SER n CONT RTS Read current setting for RTS line SET ON card number SYST COMM SER n CONT RTS ON Set RTS line to static V OFF card number SYST COMM SER n CONT RTS OFF Set RTS line to static V IBFULL card number SYST COMM SER n CONT RTS IBF Set RTS for hardware handshaking STANDRD card number SYST COMM SER n CONT RTS STAN RTS operates to RS 232 standard STORE card number DIAG COMM SER n STORE Store current serial communications settings into non volatile storage MT DEBUG READ laddr reg_num VXI READ lt laddr gt lt register_num gt Read register in A16 address space WRITE laddr gea num VXI WRIT lt laddr gt lt register_num gt lt data gt Write data to register in A16 address space SEND 7 MESSAGE laddr string VXI SEND lt laddr gt lt string gt Send SCPI command to message based instrument at ladar M COMMAND laddr command VXI SEND COMM lt laddr gt lt command gt Send word serial command to laddr QUERY laddr query VXI SEND COMM lt laddr gt lt query gt Send word serial command and wait for response RECEIVE laddr VXI REC lt laddr gt Receive message from message based device RESET laddr VXI RES lt laddr gt Soft reset of device at
132. RIG SOUR IMM MEAS1 PER Period measurement on channel 1 CHAN2 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS2 PER Period measurement on channel 2 Continued on next page HP E1333A 3 Channel Universal Counter Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 User Entry Command s Used Description Continued from previous page 4 TIMEINT CHAN1 CHAN2 m POS_PW7 CHAN1 CHAN2 NEG_PW7 CHAN1 CHAN2 RATIO CHAN1 CHAN2 m TOTALIZ CHAN1 7 START READ CHAN2 f START READ TEST Enter voltage values in volts Typical examples are 3 5 2 500E 3 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS1 TINT TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS2 TINT TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS1 PWID TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS2 PWID TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS1 NWID TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS2 NWID TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS1 RAT TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS2 RAT TRIG SOUR IMM CONF1 TOT INIT1 FETC1 TRIG SOUR IMM CONF2 TOT INIT2 FETC2 TST Time interval measurement on channel 1 Time interval measurement on channel 2 Positive pulse width measurement on channel 1 Positive pulse width measurement on channel 2 Negative pulse width measurement on channel 1 Negative pulse width measurement on channel 2 Ratio of channel 1 channel 2 Ratio of channel 2 channel 1 Totalize on channel 1 Display totalize count Totalize on channel 2 Display totalize count Run self test display results 0 pass any
133. RL M RCL_MENU Recalls the last command executed via the CTRL W menu keys RCL_PREV Recalls the last several commands executed CTRL F via user input RCL_NEXT After RCL_PREV RCL_NEXT may be used to CTRL B move forward through the recalled commands SEL_INST Return to Select an instrument menu CTRL D CLR_INST Clear instrument s input and output buffers CTRL C RST_INST Like CLR_INST plus clears CTRL R Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 85 In Case of Difficulty Problem Problem Cause Solution Error 113 undefined header error occurs after entering data in response to a menu prompt For some commands used by the menus the data entered is appended to a command header For example if you enter 1 as the port number for a digital l O module the command used is DIG HAND1 MODE NONE where HAND1 indicates the port number If your entry was invalid or incorrect error 113 occurs Following the power on sequence or system reset the display shows Configuration errors Select SYSTEM Press any key to continue_ An unassigned device incorrect logical address was detected If you cycle power or perform system reset the display will show the logical address of the unassigned device You can also check the logical addresses using the CONFIG LADDS branch of the System instrument menu You can also use SYST ERR in the system instrument The display shows inst
134. Ress DIAG NRAM CREate Check the Size of the User RAM Segment DIAG NRAM CREate enter statement Statement enters size in bytes DIAGnostic PEEK lt address gt lt width gt reads the data number of bits given by width starting at address Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric 0 to 16 777 215 HFFFFFF none lt width gt numeric 8 16 32 none e lt address gt specifies a location within the range of the control processor s addressing capability e lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats e Related Commands DIAG POKE Read Byte from User Non Volatile RAM DIAG PEEK 16252928 8 Ask for byte enter statement Return value of byte Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 143 POKE DIAGnostic POKE lt address gt lt width gt lt data gt writes data number of bits given by width starting at address Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric 0 to 16 777 215 HHFFFFFF none lt width gt numeric 8 16 32 none lt data gt numeric 8 to 32 bit integer none Comments e lt address gt specifies a location within the range of the control processor s addressing capability lt address gt and lt data gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats CAUTION DIAG POKE can chang
135. STATe EVENt TTLTrg lt n gt SYSTem STATe CPON CTYPe ROUTe ERRor CLOSe VERSion CLOSe OPEN TRIGger OPEN IMMediate SCAN SOURce SLOPe Table A 2 Switchbox Non SCPI Commands DISPlay ROUTe MONItor SCAN CARD LIST STATe MODE PORT SYSTem SETTling CDEScription TIME TIME Appendix A HP E1406A Specifications and General Information 239 Multimeter Commands The following tables apply to the HP E1326A B multimeters Table A 3 Multimeter SCPI 1994 0 Confirmed Commands ABORt CALibration VALue ZERO AUTO AUTO CONFigure FRESistance RESistance TEMPerature VOLTage AC DC CONFigure FETCh FORMat DATA INITiate IMMediate MEASure FRESistance RESistance TEMPerature VOLTage AC DC READ SENSe FUNCtion FUNCtion RESistance APERture APERture NPLCycles NPLCycles RANGe AUTO AUTO RANGe RESolution RESolution VOLTage AC RANGe RANGe DC RANGe AUTO AUTO RANGe RESolution RESolution NPLCycles NPLCycles STATus OPERation CONDition ENABle ENABle EVENt PREset QUEStionable CONDition ENABle ENABle EVENt SYSTem CTYPe ERRor VERsion TRIGger COUNt COUNt DELay AUTO AUTO DELay IMMediate SOURCce SOURce 240 HP E1406A Specifications and General Informat
136. T WARM causes the System instrument to restart reboot using the current configuration stored in non volatile memory The effect is the same as cycling power The System instrument goes through its power up self tests The Non volatile system state is used for configuration wherever applicable DRAM NRAM and RDISk memory segments remain intact Related Commands DIAG BOOT COLD Boot the System Instrument warm DIAG BOOT Force boot Note that WARM is implied DIAGnostic COMMunicate SERial 0 OWNer lt owner gt allocates the built in serial interface to the System instrument SYSTem the optional IBASIC interpreter IBASic or to neither NONE Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt owner gt discrete SYSTem IBASic NONE none While the serial interface is allocated to the command module SYSTem it can function as the mainframe user interface when connected to a terminal or computer running terminal emulation software When the built in serial interface is allocated to IBASic it is controlled only by IBASIC The serial interface is given a select code of 9 and any RS 232 device connected to the command module s RS 232 port is programmed accordingly Note that when IBASIC owns the serial interface there is no front panel interface to the system If the built in serial interface is not needed specifying NONE will release memory for use by other instruments
137. TAT QUES ENABle STAT QUES ENABle Read the Event Register STAT QUES EVEN Query returns bit s set Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 165 QUEStionable STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt sets the negative transition NTRansition Parameters Comments Example QUEStionable PTRansition Comments Example mask For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the associated Condition Register will set the same bit in the associated Event Register Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric e Executable when initiated e No coupled commands e RST Condition No change The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by TEEE 488 2 e Related Commands STATus subsystem commands SRE STB Set the Questionable Signal Register Negative Transition Mask STAT QUES NTR 64 Set event bit when wait for arm state is entered STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt sets the positive transition mask For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the associated Condition Register will set the same bit in the associated Event Register e See STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt for parameters and comments Set the Questionable Signal Register Positive Transition Mask STAT QUES PTR 64 Set event bit when wait for arm
138. TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS3 TINT TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS2 PWID TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS4 PWID TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS2 NWID TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS4 NWID TRIG SOUR IMM CONF1 UDC INIT1 FETC1 TRIG SOUR IMM CONF3 UDC INIT3 FETC3 TRIG SOUR IMM CONF1 TOT INIT1 FETC1 TRIG SOUR IMM CONF2 TOT INIT2 FETC2 TRIG SOUR IMM CONF3 TOT INIT3 FETC3 TRIG SOUR IMM CONF4 TOT INIT4 FETC4 TST Time interval measurement on channel 1 Time interval measurement on channel 3 Positive pulse width measurement on channel 2 Positive pulse width measurement on channel 4 Negative pulse width measurement on channel 2 Negative pulse width measurement on channel 4 Up down count subtract ch 2 count from ch 1 count Get up down count from channels 1 amp 2 Up down count subtract ch 4 count from ch 3 count Get up down count from channels 3 and 4 Totalize on channel 1 Get totalize count on channel 1 Totalize on channel 2 Get totalize count on channel 2 Totalize on channel 3 Get totalize count on channel 3 Totalize on channel 4 Get totalize count on channel 4 Run self test display results 0 pass any other number fail HP E1333A 3 Channel Universal Counter Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 User Entry Command s Used Description COUNTER MONITOR CHAN1 DISP MON CHAN 1 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on channel 1 CHAN2 DISP MON CH
139. Table to the Processor DIAG NRAM CRE lt size gt Allocate space for table in user RAM DIAG BOOT Reboot system to complete allocation DIAG NRAM ADDR Get starting address of table RAM segment DIAG DOWN lt address gt lt data gt Download data into table VXI CONF ETAB lt address gt Link table to processor DIAG BOOT Reboot system to implement table CONFigure ETABle vxI CONFigure ETABle returns the starting address of the user s extender table Example Query Address of the Extender Table VXI CONF ETABle Ask for address enter statement Return address Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 191 CONFigu re VXI CONFigure HlERarchy returns current hierarchy configuration HIERarchy information about the selected logical address The individual fields of the response are comma separated If the information about the selected logical address is not available from the destination device that is the requested device is not in the mainframe or the command module s servant area then Error 224 Illegal parameter value will be set and no response data will be sent Comments e This command returns the following values Logical address An integer between 1 and 255 inclusive 1 indicates that the device has no logical address Commander s logical address An integer between 1 and 255 inclusive 1 indicates that the device has no commander or that the commander is unknown Interrupt handlers
140. UERy command is a series of commands which sends command _ the specified Word Serial Command to the address set using the VXI SELect command and waits for a response The returned value is the response to the command and is an integer The following table lists the available commands and their parameters 1f any command parameterl parameter2 Description AHLine lt hand_id gt 1 7 lt line_ gt 0 7 Assign Handler Line A line number of 0 means the handler is to be disconnected AlLine lt int_id gt 1 7 lt line_ gt 0 7 Assign Interrupter Line A line number of O means the handler is to be disconnected AMControl lt rspns_mask gt 0 15 Asynchronous Mode Control ANO Abort Normal Operation ANY lt cmd_word gt Specify any VXlbus command 32768 32767 BNO lt top_level gt Begin Normal Operation 0 non zero BREQuest Byte Request CEVent lt enable gt lt event_ gt 0 127 Control Event 0 1 OFF ON CRESponse lt rspns_mask gt 0 127 Control Response ENO End Normal Operation RDEVice lt logical_addr gt 0 255 Release Device RHANdlers Read Handlers RHLine lt hand_id gt 1 7 Read Handler Line RiLine lt int_id gt 1 7 Read Interrupter Line RINTerrupter Read Interrupters RMODid Read MODID RPERror Read Protocol Error RPRotocol Read Protocol RSARea Read Servant Area RSTB Read STB SLModid lt enable gt
141. VEN SLOP POS Positive level trigger slope for channel 4 NEG SENS4 EVEN SLOP NEG Negative level trigger slope for channel 4 ISOLATE ON INP ISOL ON Input isolation on OFF INP ISOL OFF Input isolation off FILTER ON INP FILT ON Input filter on OFF INP FILT OFF Input filter off FREQ frequency INP FILT FREQ lt value gt Set input filter frequency FREQ CHAN1 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS1 FREQ Frequency measurement on channel 1 CHAN3 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS3 FREQ Frequency measurement on channel 3 PERIOD CHAN1 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS1 PER Period measurement on channel 1 CHAN3 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS3 PER Period measurement on channel 3 y Continued on next page HP E1332A 4 Channel Counter Totalizer Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 User Entry Command s Used Description Continued from previous page 4 TIMEINT CHAN1 CHAN3 POS_PW CHAN2 CHAN4 NEG_PW CHAN2 CHAN4 m UDCOUNT 7 CHAN1 START READ CHAN3 7 START READ TOTALIZ CHAN1 7 START READ E CHAN2 7 START READ CHAN3 7 START READ CHAN4 TT START READ TEST Enter voltage values in volts Typical examples are 3 5 2 500E 3 Enter frequency value in hertz Typical examples are 60 120 1E3 TRIG SOUR IMM MEAS1 TINT
142. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Exclusive Remedies THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CON TRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice HEWLETT PACKARD HP MAKES NO WAR RANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HP shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material This docu ment contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photo copied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Company HP assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by HP U S Government Restricted Rights The Software and Documentation have been developed entirely at private expense They are delivered and licensed as commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 October 1988 DFARS 252 211 7015 May 1991 or DFARS 252 227 7014 June 1995 as a commercial item as defin
143. WSProtocol COMMand AHLine AlLine AMControl ANO ANY BAVailable BNO BRQ CEVent CLR CLOCk CRESponse ENO GDEVice COMmander RDEVice RHANdlers RHLine RlLine RINTerrupter RMODid RPERror RPRotocol MESSage RECeive SEND QUERy AHLine AlLine AMControl BRQuest CEVent CRESponse ENO RDEVice RHANdlers RHLine RlLine RINTerrupter RMODid RPERror RPRotocol RSARea RSTB SLModid SUModid RESPonse 246 HP E1406A Specifications and General Information Appendix A Table A 14 System Instrument Non SCPI Commands DIAGnostic BOOT COLD WARM COMMunicate SERial 0 OWNer OWNer SERial n STOR DOWNload CHECked MADDress SADDress MADDress SADDress AM AVAilable CREate CREate DRIVer INSTAall LIST ALL FROM RAM ROM LOAD CHECked FROM AVAilable CREate CREate SIZE e DR DIAGnostic INTerrupt AC Tivate PRlority n PRlority n RESPonse SETup n SETup n NRAM ADDRess CREate CREate PEEK POKE RDISK ADDRess CREate CREate UPLoad MADDress SADDress OUTPut EXTernal IMMediate LEVel MMediate IMMediate SOURce SOURce STATe STATe READ RECeive MESSage RESe PROGram SELected CHECked CHECked DEFin
144. ZERO ONE NONE lt type gt CHECKk lt check_cntrl gt 0 1 OFF ON CHECk SBITs lt sbits gt 1 2 MIN MAX SBITs MIN MAX TRANsmit AUTO lt auto_cntrl gt 0 1 OFF ON AUTO PACE PROTocol lt protocol gt KON NONE PROTocol L active in LOAD mode R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L Returns value of enable mask in Questionable Status Group Returns value of the bit set in the Event Register Questionable Status Group Sets the negative transition mask Sets the positive transition mask Returns command module primary HP IB address Sets mode for Data Terminal Ready control line Returns current mode of DTR line Sets mode for Request To Send control line Returns current mode of RTS line Sets transmit and receive baud rate of serial interface Returns the current or allowable baud rate setting Sets the number of data bits in the serial data frame Returns the current or allowable BITS setting Sets the receive pacing protocol to XON XOFF or NONE Returns the state of receive pacing protocol Sets the input buffer start threshold for input pacing Returns current or allowable STARt threshold level Sets the input buffer stop threshold for input pacing Returns the current or allowable STOP threshold level Sets the type of receive and transmit parity Retu
145. a EK e OEMS we DOES 160 SUAS oo bh Ok A ek OER eee A 161 OPERation CONDON qes 64464 6 ad bk EO LED DE ER OHS a 161 OPERSHOMENABIC 4 3 6 04 8 544 46 deo da AR OR OS 162 OPERAUGIMENABIC siria AA 162 OPERACOO EVENTS cs 449545 ad IRA a 163 OPER CIO INTEGRO sopo a AR a 163 OPERSHOn PTRA ciar aa ue eE RS OER ES 164 PRES area da REE EO RAS OER EES EEE EER SES 164 CUEStonable CONDON eo aok 06 a le as eR oe ai 164 QUEStionable ENAB E 2 66 ede See ee ER KEES EEG HR OEE RES 165 CUESTE PNA Ble arena he eh eee ee eee FSR SES 165 QUEStonable LEYEN oaa sk hoe ooo a eee ROSS ER RR RS a 165 QUEStonable NTRansitioO 0 HERE ER HE OOS 166 QUEStonable PTRansitl d exis a 166 4 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Contents SUSO rd ER ie Rl he Ro ep yd COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess naaa ee lt CUOMMunicas BRISA 244 6 6 dd RR ARR SE he RR COMMunicate SERial n CONTrol DTR 0 0 0022 ae COMMunicate SERial n CONTrol DTR o o COMMunicate SERial n CONTrol RTS o COMMunicate SERial n CONTrol RTS o o oo COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BAUD COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BAUD COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BITS COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BITS COMMunicate SERial COMMunicate SERial COMMunicate SERial COMMunicate SERial COMMunicate
146. able Register The power on flag Calibration data Protected user data Service Request Enable When a service request event occurs it sets a corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register this happens whether or not the event has been enabled unmasked by SRE The SRE command allows you to identify which of these events will assert a service request SRQ When an event is enabled by SRE and that event occurs it sets a bit in the Status Byte Register and issues an SRQ to the computer sets the HP IB SRQ line true You enable an event by specifying its decimal weight for lt mask gt To enable more than one event specify the sum of the decimal weights Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual for more information on the Status Byte Register OUTPUT 70900 SRE 160 Enables bits 5 and 7 Respective weights are 32 128 160 Status Register Enable Query returns the weighted sum of all enabled unmasked events those enabled to assert SRQ in the Status Byte Register 10 OUTPUT 70900 SRE Send Status Register Enable query 20 ENTER 70900 A Place response in variable 30 PRINT A Print response 40 END Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 221 STB Status Byte Register Query returns the weighted sum of all set bits in the Status Byte Register Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual for more information on the Status Byte Register Comments You can read the Status Byte Register using either the STB command or an HP
147. ain with Poisson half bridge FULL BENDING channel list MEAS STR FBEN lt channel_list gt Measure strain with bending full bridge BENPOIS channel list MEAS STR FBP lt channel_list gt Measure strain with bending Poisson full bridge POISSON channel list MEAS STR FPO lt channel_list gt Measure strain with Poisson full bridge Continued on next page Scanning Voltmeter Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 User Entry Command s Used Description Continued from previous page m UNSTRN channel list MEAS STR UNST lt channel_list gt Measure bridge unstrained DIAG ia eatin channel list MEAS STR QCOM lt channel_list gt Compression shunt diagnostic TENSION channel list MEAS STR QTEN lt channel_list gt Tension shunt diagnostic CARD TYPE card number SYST CTYP lt card_number gt Displays module ID information DESCR card number SYST CDES lt card_number gt Displays module description TEST TST Runs self test displays results 0 pass any other number fail Channel lists are of the form ccenn single channel ccnn ccnn two or more channels or ccnn ccnn range of channels where cc is the card number and nn is the channel number For example to access channel 2 on card number 1 specify 102 The card number identifies a module within the switchbox The switch module with the lowest logi
148. aiting for AR 6 5 Correction 7 BZ Status Byte ID 8 5 O ID 9 NOTE ID Instrument ID 0 Dependent ID 1 ID 2 INSTrument Summary 3 PROGram Running 4 Always Zero 5 Figure 4 8 Standard Operation Status Group Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status 109 Questionable Data Group The Questionable Data Status Group provides information about the quality of instrument output and measurement data Questionable Data is accessed through the STATus subsystem As a beginner you will rarely need to use this status group Figure 4 9 illustrates the structure of Questionable Data Voltage Current Time Power Temperature Frequency Phase Modulation Calibration ID NOTE ID Instrument ID Dependent ID ID INSTrument Summary Command Warning Always Zero m STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable ENABle 0 2 5 5 6 S 7 i Bit 3 gt Status Byte 8 0 9 3 0 1 2 3 5
149. al address set using VXI SEL BREQuest R Sends a Byte Request command to the logical address set using VXI SEL CEVent lt enable gt lt event_number gt R Sends a Control Event command to the logical address set using VXI SEL CLEar R Sends a Clear command to the logical address set using VXI SEL CLOCKk R Sends a Clear Lock command to the logical address set using VXI SEL CRESponse lt response_mask gt R Sends a Control Response command to the logical address set using VXI SEL ENO R Sends an End Normal Operation command to the logical address set using VXI SEL GDEVice lt cmdr_laddr gt R Sends a Grant Device command to the logical address set using VXI SEL COMmander R Sends an Identify Commander command to the logical address set using VXI SEL RDEVice lt logical_addr gt R Sends a Release Device command to the logical address set using VXI SEL RHANdlers R Sends a Read Handlers command to the logical address set using VXI SEL RHLine lt hand_id gt R Sends a Read Handler Line command to the logical address set using VXI SEL RILine lt int_id gt R Sends a Read Interrupter Line command to the logical address set using VXI SEL RINTerrupter R Sends a Read Interrupter command to the logical address set using VXI SEL RMODid R Sends a Read MODID command to the logical address set using VXI SEL RPERror R Sends a Read Protocol Error command to the logical address set using VXI SE
150. all drivers found in the RAM driver table DRAM DIAGnostic DRIVer LIST ROM lists all drivers found in the ROM driver table Related Commands DIAG DRAM AVAilable DIAG DRAM CREate DIAG DRIVer LOAD Example List All Drivers in the System DIAG DRIV LIST Lists all drivers currently loaded Example List All Drivers in ROM DIAG DRIV LIST ROM Lists all of the drivers in ROM Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 135 DRIVer LOAD Parameters Comments Example DRIVer LOAD CHECked Parameters Comments Example DIAGnostic DRIVer LOAD lt driver_block gt loads the instrument driver contained in the driver_block into a previously created DRAM segment Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt driver_block gt arbitrary block See Parameter Types none program data on page 121 e driver_block is the actual binary driver data to be transferred e Related Commands DIAG DRAM AVAilable DIAG DRAM CREate DIAG DRIVer LIST Download a Driver Block DIAG DRIV LOAD lt driver_block gt Downloads the driver lt driver_block gt to DRAM memory or to Flash ROM DIAGnostic DRIVer LOAD CHECked lt driver_block gt loads the instrument driver contained in the driver_block into a previously created DRAM segment The driver_block is formatted in the same data byte format used by DIAG DOWNload CHECked Parameter Parameter Defau
151. amming 102 103 lines VXIbus backplane 101 103 ports programming 102 103 pulse appearing 149 151 154 pulse sending 103 149 151 154 query level 103 query source 103 query state 103 source setting 103 trig out port querying logic level 152 trig out port setting logic level 152 TTL Trigger enabling configuration 156 TTL Trigger mainframe extender 199 208 TTL Trigger querying driving trigger source 155 TTL Trigger querying logic level 155 TTL Trigger querying state 156 TTL Trigger selecting driving source 155 TTL Trigger setting logic level 154 Triggering and System Status 101 118 TST 222 TTL Trigger enabling and setting 30 enabling configuration 156 lines 101 103 mainframe extender directing 199 mainframe extender routing 208 pulse appearing 154 querying driving trigger source 155 querying logic level 155 querying state 156 register configuration 30 selecting driving source 155 setting logic level 154 TTLTrgn IMMediate 154 LEVel MMediate 103 154 LEVel MMediate 103 155 SOURce 103 155 SOURce 155 STATe 156 STATe 156 Tutorial terminal interface menus 64 U UPLoad MADDress 146 UPLoad SADDress 147 User Defined Tables A24 A32 address allocation table 48 50 200 201 commander servant hierarchy 39 41 186 187 dynamic configuration table 23 26 187 188 extender table 31 35 191 interrupt line allocation table 54
152. ands SYST COMM SER n REC PAR e RST Condition No change Example Configure Data Width to 7 Bits SYST COMM SERO BITS 7 COMMunicate SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive BITS MIN MAX SERial n RECeive tums BITS The current data width if no parameter is sent The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent Example Query the Current Data Width SYST COMM SERO BITS enter statement Statement enters 7 or 8 172 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE PROTocol Parameters Comments Example COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE PROTocol Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE PROTocol lt protocol gt enables or disables receive pacing CON XOFF protocol Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt protocol gt discrete XON NONE none While PROT is XON the serial interface will send XOFF when the buffer reaches the STOP threshold and XON when the buffer reaches the STARt threshold For an HP E1324A AUTO is always ON In this case RECeive PACE will also set TRAN PACE The XON character is Control Q ASCII 1710 1116 The XOFF character is Control S ASCII 1910 1316 DIAG BOOT COLD will set PACE to XON Related Commands SYST COMM SERJn REC PACE THR STARt SYST COMM SER n REC PACE THR STOP SYST COMM
153. annot configure instruments Only the system instrument is started A device s logical address is not a multiple of 8 and the device is not part of a combined instrument The commander assigned to a device by a user defined Configuration Table does not assign it a secondary address A secondary address assigned by a user configuration table is illegal A secondary address specified by a user configuration table is used more than once 252 HP E1406A Error Messages Appendix B Table B 2 Error Messages and Causes continued Error Messages and Causes Code Message Cause 2116 Invalid servant area The logical address plus servant area of a commander is greater than 255 or greater than that of a superior commander within this tree 2117 Slot 0 functions disabled A command module is in slot 0 but slot O switches are in the disabled position 2118 Invalid commander logical A device does not have a valid commander address 2119 BNO failed Sending a BEGIN Normal Operation command to a device failed 2120 Write ready timeout A message based device failed to become write ready 2121 Read ready timeout A message based device failed to become read ready 2122 ERR asserted The ERR bit is asserted in a device s response register 2123 ENO failed Sending an End Normal Operation command to a device failed 2124 Interrupt line unavailable No line is available for a programmable interr
154. at the end of this chapter that illustrate how to use Service Requests to monitor events General Status The generalized Status Register model shown in Figure 4 3 is the building Reg ister Model block of the SCPI status system This model consists of a Condition Register Transition Filter an Event Register and an Enable Register A set of these registers is called a status group Condition Transition Event Enable Register Filter Register Register Summary Bit Logical OR A IS AT VU A Bit Name Bit Number Figure 4 3 Generalized Status Register Model When a status group is implemented in an instrument it always contains all of the component registers However there is not always a corresponding command to read or write to every register Condition Register The Condition Register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status of the instrument There is no latching or buffering for this register it is updated in real time Condition Registers are read only If there is no command to read a particular Condition Register it is simply invisible to you 104 Triggering and System Status Chapter 4 Transition Filter Event Register Enable Register An Example Sequence The Transition Filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the Condition Register will set corresponding bits in
155. ation Figure 3 5 Displaying Logical Addresses and System Instrument Information Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 67 Select an instrument _ i SYSTEM AOLTMTR amp SWITCH g IBASIC SYSTEM_B CONFIG 4 HP IB AAA DEBUG BAUD PARITY amp BITS 1 PACE ESMMMBMESCONTROL 3 MORE GPRV MENUS UTILS Note Configuration of the HP E1406A RS 232 port is covered in the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide Figure 3 6 Configuring the Command Module RS 232 Port 68 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 Select an instrument _ SYSTEM O ASE A IBASIC SYSTEM_B CONFIG HP 1B7 Ej RS 232 l DEBUG SYSTEM_B METER 53 1 SESSION AT SYSTEM_B Enter logical address termination option SCPI command used VXI REC lt logical_address gt SYSTEM_B 1 ES A AA SYSTEM_8 Enter logical address string termination option SCPI command used VXI SEND lt logical_address gt lt msg_string gt lt end_flag gt Figure 3 7 Programming Message Based Devices Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 69 Select an instrument _ Bl SYSTEM WOLTMTR Ej SWITCH j IBASIC NARA PESAR s3 1 SEC 7 A eits SYSTEM_ 1 READ 64 SET Og SYSTEM_ Enter time hh mm ss a A SCPI command used SYST TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt SYSTEM_ DATE 64 RESET O SYSTEM_ READ 64 SET O SYSTEM_ Enter date yyyy mm dd 1 gt IESO g
156. ber of address records in the table You must have one record for each VMEbus or VXIbus device for which memory is reserved Number of Records is part of the table header and is represented by the lower eight bits of the header word Laddr is the logical address of the VXIbus device for which A24 A32 addresses are reserved 1 specifies a VMEbus device Field is one word e Addr space 24132 is the address space being reserved 24 specifies A24 addresses are being reserved 32 specifies A32 addresses are being reserved Field is one word Frame ID 0 255 is the logical address of the slot 0 device for the mainframe containing the VMEbus memory block 8 bit byte This field must be included e Base addr 0 to 22 1 0 to 232 1 is the starting address offset of the A24 or A32 addresses to be reserved Field is two words 4 bytes and is specified in decimal e Memory size 1 to 22 1 1to 22 1 1s the amount of memory for which addresses must be reserved This field must be specified but is ignored if a VXIbus A24 A32 device is specified Laddr Field is two words 4 bytes and is specified in decimal Determining the The A24 A32 address allocation table has a one word header the first two Table Size entries in the address record are one word each and the second two entries are two words each The amount of RAM allocated with DIAGnostic NRAM CREate is specified in bytes Since one word is two bytes the amount of RAM to allocate is compu
157. ble lt address gt links a user defined dynamic configuration table to the command module resource manager processor The command module must be the acting resource manager in order for the table to be implemented Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric DIAG NRAM ADDR none Be certain that address specifies the starting address of the area in user RAM allocated using DIAG NRAM CREate where you stored the dynamic configuration table data e Tables must start on an even address Note that DIAG NRAM CREate allocates RAM for the table with an even starting address e lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats e Setting address to O zero prevents the parameters defined by the table from being invoked when the system is rebooted however the table remains in user RAM e For more information see User Defined Dynamic Configuration on page 23 Related Commands DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG NRAM ADDRess DIAG DOWNload VXI CONF DCTable Example Link a Dynamic Configuration Table to the Processor DIAG NRAM CRE lt size gt Allocate space for table in user RAM DIAG BOOT Reboot system to complete the allocation DIAG NRAM ADDR Get starting address of table RAM segment DIAG DOWN lt address gt lt data gt Download data into table VXI CONF DCTable lt address gt Link table to processor DIAG BOOT Reboot syst
158. ble to override the default algorithm 36 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 ERROR 57 INVALID UDEF LADD WINDOW This error occurs when a user defined logical address window violates the VXI 6 Specification has an invalid base or size You should redefine your extender table with correct values ERROR 58 INVALID UDEF A16 WINDOW This error occurs when a user defined A16 window violates the VXI 6 Specification has an invalid base or size You should redefine your extender table with correct values ERROR 59 INVALID UDEF A24 WINDOW This error occurs when a user defined A24 window violates the VXI 6 Specification has an invalid base or size You should redefine your extender table with correct values ERROR 60 INVALID UDEF A32 WINDOW This error occurs when a user defined A32 window violates the VXI 6 Specification has an invalid base or size You should redefine your extender table with correct values ERROR 61 INVALID UDEF EXT TABLE This error occurs when the valid flag is not set to 1 in the extender table You should redefine your extender table with correct values ERROR 62 INVALID UDEF EXT TABLE DATA This error occurs when there is an incorrect number of records for a user defined extender table You should make sure that the number of records shown in the header matches the number of records actually in the table ERROR 63 UNSUPPORTED UDEF TTL TRIGGER This error occurs when there is a user defined ex
159. bytes This value is expressed in hex format first two characters are H c5 Pass Failed Up to 5 data characters which define the status of the device FAIL IFAIL PASS READY FAIL failed self test IFAIL configuration register initialization fails PASS self test passed READY ready to receive commands s1 Extended Field 1 Not currently used returns s2 Extended Field 2 Not currently used returns s3 Extended Field 3 Not currently used returns s4 Manufacturer s Specific Comments Up to 80 character string contains manufacturer specific data in string response data format This field is sent with a 488 2 string response data format and will contain the instrument name and its IEEE 488 1 secondary address unless a start up error is detected In that case this field will contain one or more error codes in the form CNFG ERROR n m z Table B 3 in Appendix B for a complete list of these codes Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 189 Parameters Comments Example CONFigure DNUMber Comments Example Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt numeric 0 to 255 or nothing none e When logical_addr is not specified VXI CONF DLIS returns information for each of the devices installed separated by semicolons If the command module is not the resource manager it returns information on only the devices in its servant area
160. c Configuration errors associated with 26 example program 25 identifying modules 22 logical address 24 25 28 table 23 table data format 24 table downloading data into 24 table format 23 table linking command module processor 187 table query starting address 188 table size 24 user defined 23 26 E ECL Trigger enabling and setting 30 enabling configuration 151 lines 101 103 mainframe extender directing 197 mainframe extender routing 207 pulse appearing 149 querying driving trigger source 150 querying logic level 150 querying state 151 register configuration 30 selecting driving source 150 setting logic level 149 ECLTrgn IMMediate 103 149 LEVel IMMediate 103 149 LEVel MMediate 150 SOURCce 103 150 SOURce 150 STATe 151 STATe 103 151 Editing keys 78 the terminal display 77 78 EMC 217 EMC 217 Enable Macros Command 217 Enable Macros Query 217 Enable Register description 105 ESE common command 217 query state 108 setting bits 164 standard event status group 108 standard operation status group 109 Enabling ECL Triggers 30 ECL Triggers configuration 151 monitor mode 75 receive pacing protocol 173 transmit pacing protocol 180 trig out port 102 trig out port configuration 153 trigger lines 102 TTL Triggers 30 TTL Triggers configuration 156 End of Line Key 85 Erasing Data in Flash ROM 160 Error Queue 249 ERRor 182 249
161. c eee eee ee eee eee SCPI Command Reference 00 0 Common Command Reference 0 HP IB Message Reference 0 0 00 eee eee SCPI Commands Quick Reference Page 226 Common Commands Quick Reference Page 235 Commands are separated into two types IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and SCPI Commands The IEEE 488 2 standard defines the common commands that perform functions like reset self test status byte query and so forth Common commands are four or five characters in length always begin with an asterisk and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space character Some examples of common commands are RST ESE lt mask gt STB SCPI commands perform functions like closing switches making measurements and querying instrument states or retrieving data A subsystem command structure is a hierarchical structure that usually consists of a top level or root command one or more lower level commands and their parameters Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 119 The following example shows part of a typical subsystem ROUTe CLOSe lt channel_list gt SCAN lt channel_list gt MODE ROUTe is the root command CLOSe and SCAN are second level commands with parameters and MODE is a third level command ROUTe is also an implied command and is therefore optional C
162. cal address is always card number 01 The switch module with the next successive logical address is card number 02 and so on HP E1326B E1411B 51 Digit Multimeter Stand Alone Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 User Entry Commands Used Description VOLTMTR MONITOR DISP MON STAT ON Display instrument operations VDC MEAS VOLT DC Measure DC volts HVAC MEAS VOLT AC Measure AC volts OHM MEAS FRES Measure 4 wire ohms TEMP THERMIS 2252 MEAS TEMP FTH 2252 Measure C of 22520 thermistor 4 wire measurement E 5K MEAS TEMP FTH 5000 Measure C of 5kQ thermistor 4 wire measurement 10K MEAS TEMP FTH 10000 Measure C of 10kQ thermistor 4 wire measurement RTD 385 MEAS TEMP FRTD 85 Measure C of 100Q RTD with alpha 385 4 wire measurement 392 MEAS TEMP FRTD 92 Measure C of 1000 RTD with alpha 392 4 wire measurement TEST TST Run self test display results 0 pass any other number fail HP E1328A 4 Channel D A Converter Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 User Entry Command s Used Description D A MONITOR CHAN1 DISP MON CHAN 1 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on channel 1 I CHAN2 DISP MON CHAN 2 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on channel 2 CHAN3 DISP MON CHAN 3 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on channel 3 CHAN4 DISP MON CHAN 4 STAT ON Monitor instrument o
163. cation table is created and stored in the command Allocation Table module as follows 1 Table space in the command module s non volatile user RAM is made available by allocating a segment of RAM with the command DIAGnostic NRAM CREate lt size gt 2 Reset the command module NRAM is created during the boot up process DIAGnostic BOOT WARM 3 The location starting address of the table in RAM is determined with the command DIAGnostic NRAM ADDRess 4 Data is downloaded into the table with the command DIAGnostic DOWNload lt address gt lt data gt 5 The table is linked to the appropriate algorithm in the command module processor with the command VXI CONFigure MTABle lt address gt Table Format The format of the A24 A32 address allocation table is shown in Table 2 6 Table 2 6 A24 A32 Address Allocation Table Format Memory Record Table Format Format Valid Flag Laddr Number of Records Address Record 1 Frame ID Addr space Address Record 2 Base addr Memory size Address Record N 48 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 The table parameters are e Valid Flag 0 1 1 one indicates the table is valid and the addresses reserved accordingly 0 zero will cause an error message Error 43 Valid Flag is part of the table header and is represented by the upper eight bits of the header word Number of Records is the num
164. ced by the System instrument service routine DIAGnostic INTerrupt commands rather than the operating system service routine Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units n numeric 1 through 7 1 lt mode gt boolean 0 1 OFF ON none SETup1 through SETup7 specifies the VXI interrupt lines 1 through 7 Sending SETup without an n value specifies VXI interrupt line 1 ON or 1 specifies that interrupt handling is to be set up for the specified interrupt line OFF or 0 indicates that interrupt handling of the specified line is to be done by the operating system In order for an interrupt to be serviced using the DIAG INT commands the interrupt line n must be assigned to an interrupt handler using the interrupt line allocation table covered in Chapter 2 see page 54 Related Commands DIAG INTerrupt ACTivate DIAG INTerrupt PRlority n DIAG INTerrupt RESPonse RST Condition DIAG INTerrupt SETup OFF for all lines Setup and Wait for VXI Interrupt Response on Line 2 DIAG INT PRI2 5 DIAG INT SET2 ON DIAG INT RESP Set priority to 5 on line 2 Handle interrupt on line 2 code which will initiate an action resulting in an interrupt Read the acknowledge response DIAGnostic INTerrupt SETup n returns the current state set by DIAG INTerrupt SETup m lt mode gt for the VXI interrupt line specified by n in SETup n Parameter Parameter Default Name
165. cess by assigning logical addresses as you choose User defined dynamic configurations are specified with a dynamic configuration table created in the command module The table is created as follows 1 Table space in the command module s non volatile user RAM is made available by allocating a segment of RAM with the command DIAGnostic NRAM CREate lt size gt 2 Reset the command module NRAM is created during the boot up process DIAGnostic BOOT WARM 3 The location starting address of the table in RAM is determined with the command DIAGnostic NRAM ADDRess 4 Data is downloaded into the table with the command DIAGnostic DOWNload lt address gt lt data gt 5 The table is linked to the appropriate algorithm in the command module processor with the command VXI CONFigure DCTable lt address gt The format of the dynamic configuration table is shown in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Dynamic Configuration Table Format Valid Flag Number of Entries Slot Number Slot O Laddr Laddr Block Size Slot Number Slot 0 Laddr Laddr Block Size o o Oo o o o o o Slot Number Slot O Laddr Laddr Block Size The table parameters are e Valid Flag 1 0 1 one indicates the table is valid and the modules can be configured accordingly 0 zero will cause an error message Error 39 Valid Flag is part of the table header and is one byte e Number of Entries 1 254 is the number of entries in the tabl
166. commands to send remove the handler ionsrq id 0 close the session printf nClosing Instrument at s n addr iclose id S J Using a Service A Service Request SRQ can be used to detect errors The following Req uest SRQ example program sets up an SRQ handler to be called when SCPI errors are detected using the Standard Event Status Register The program then prompts for SCPI commands If the SCPI command results in data in the output queue such an query command or an error then the SRQ handler is called and the data is printed The following summarizes the procedure used e Define a SRQ Handler which does the following Read the Status Byte using ireadstb ireadstb returns the RQS request for service bit in bit 6 of the status byte After issuing a ireadstb RQS is cleared indicating that the Service Request is being acknowledged A new SRQ will not be issued unless RQS is cleared Using STB will return the Master State Summary in bit 6 and does not affect RQS Check if the MAV bit bit 4 is set to indicate that a message is available If the MAV bit is set then a message is available and the SRQ handler can process the message In this example the output queue is read using iscanf Check if the Standard Event Status Summary bit bit 5 is set If the bit is set then read the Standard Event Status Group s Event Register to determine which event s caused the SRQ Check fo
167. confused with ASCII characters It also doubles the size of the file to be sent and the transmission time for the file Since a transmission error that required re transmission of the entire data block would be very time consuming a 3 bit error code which allows for correction of single bit errors is added to the transmission byte The following format is sent for each nibble Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 Correction Code Data The error correction code is based on the nibble of data sent The easiest way to implement this code is to use Table D 1 It is indexed based on the value of the nibble to send out so there are 16 elements to the table Appendix D Sending Binary Data Over RS 232 261 Table D 1 Correction Codes for RS 232 Transmission Correction Byte in Data Value Code Byte in Hex Decimal 0 0 8016 128 1 7 F146 241 2 6 E216 226 3 1 9316 147 4 5 D416 212 5 2 A516 165 6 3 B616 182 7 4 C716 199 8 3 B816 184 9 4 C916 201 10 5 DA16 218 11 2 AB16 171 12 6 EC16 236 13 1 9D16 157 14 0 8E16 142 15 7 FF16 255 262 Sending Binary Data Over RS 232 Appendix D Sending Binary Data Over RS 232 Setting Up the Mainframe The RS 232 interface differs from the HP IB interface in that there is no device addressing built into the interface definition Device addressing must be done on top of the RS 232 functions This addressing is done through the same mechanism as the terminal based fron
168. d e Bit 8 is the only bit used in the Condition Register by the System instrument therefore it is the only bit which needs to be unmasked in the Event Register Specifying the bit weight for the event unmasks the bit The bit weight is 256 and can be specified in decimal hexadecimal H Octal Q or binary B e When the Summary bit is sent it sets bit 7 in the Status Byte Register e Related Commands STAT OPER ENABle Example Unmask Bit 8 in the Event Register STAT OPER ENAB 256 Unmask bit 8 OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle returns which bits in the Event Register Operation Status Group are unmasked Comments e Bit 8 in the Condition Register is used by the System instrument command module to indicate when an interrupt set up by the DIAG INTerrupt commands has been acknowledged Bit 8 in the Event Register generally is the only bit which will be unmasked If this bit is unmasked when STAT OPER ENABle is sent 256 is returned Reading the Event Register mask does not change the mask setting STAT OPER ENABle lt event gt Related Commands STAT OPER ENABle Example Read the Event Register Mask STAT OPER ENAB Query register mask enter statement 162 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 OPERation EVENt Comments Example OPERation NTRansition Parameters Comments Example STATus OPERation EVENt returns which bits in the Event Register Operation Status Group are
169. d ESE lt mask gt Standard Event Status Enable Command ESE Standard Event Status Enable Query ESR Standard Event Status Register Query PSC lt flag gt Power on Status Clear Command PSC Power on Status Clear Query SRE lt mask gt Service Request Enable Command SRE Service Request Enable Query STB Status Byte Query Macros DMC lt name gt lt cmds gt EMC lt state gt Define Macro Command Enable Macros Command EMC Enable Macro Query GMC lt name gt Get Macro Query LMC Learn Macro Query PMC Purge all Macros Command RMC lt name gt Remove individual Macro Command Synchronization OPC Operation Complete Command OPC Operation Complete Query WAI Wait to Continue Command 216 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 CLS DMC lt name_string gt lt command_block gt Example EMC lt state gt EMC ESE lt mask gt Example Clear Status Command clears all status registers Standard Event Status Register Standard Operation Event Status Register Questionable Data Event Register and the error queue for an instrument This clears the corresponding summary bits bits 3 5 and 7 and the instrument specific bits bits O 1 and 2 in the Status Byte Register CLS does not affect the enabling of bits in any of the status registers Status Byte Register Standard Event Status Register Standard Operation Event Status Register or Questionable Data Eve
170. d Modules o o o o 22 Identifying Dynamically Configured Modules o a2 User Defined Dynamic Configuration o o e e 2a Setting VALMXI Configuration es eser todo reee era HERE RES 27 Logical Address Configuration 4 4 62 442 64 4 Gs kete AE a 27 A16 A24 A32 Address Window Configuration oaoa a 29 Interrupt Register Configiration ss as ceea aoea rra RA 30 TTL Trigger Register Configuration o r aoe ck ee he RE a 30 ECL Trigger Register Configuration 444 0 cidad 444 AREA 30 Utility Repister CONTIBUTION ok ke ee REE ORS OK 31 User Defined Logical Address and Memory Windows 31 Setting Commander Servant Hierarchies gt o sasa o o tid a a 38 User Defined Commander Servant Hierarchies o 39 AZAJA32 Address Mapping ooh be ee RR ESLER LE a DEER ORS eia 44 Reserving A24 A32 Address Space o o o 48 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Contents 1 hieni Line Allocation oaceae ea a a AB a 53 User Defined Interrupt Line Allocation Table o 54 Starting e AA AIN 60 NAL SUS PALA Le AAA AA 60 Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 61 About This CME 2 AA AAA GORE A A 61 Terminal nterface FEME S oi a a Se dei a 62 Usme Display Terminal Menus a e aa aaora t e aa AAA 62 How Instruments Appear in the Menu oohoo 63 Display Terminal Menn Tutorial s ers ye d
171. d terminals 79 switchbox monitor mode 75 76 switchbox monitor mode display annunciators 76 switchbox monitor mode reading error messages 76 280 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index unsupported terminals 82 using terminals without menus 83 Terminals HP 700 22 79 81 supported 79 testing for compatibility 82 unsupported 82 using without menus 83 WYSE WY 30 81 TIME 182 TIME 183 Transition Filter 105 Transmit Pacing Mode 179 query state of receive 179 Transmit Pacing Protocol enabling disabling 180 query current setting 180 Trig In 18 connector driving ECL Trigger 150 connector driving TTL Trigger 155 Trig Out 18 enabling 102 port enabling configuration 153 port logic level 152 port query logic level 152 port querying driving source 153 port querying state 153 port selecting driving source 152 sending trigger pulse to 151 Trigger connectors on faceplate 18 ECL Trigger enabling configuration 151 ECL Trigger mainframe extender 197 207 ECL Trigger querying driving trigger source 150 ECL Trigger querying logic level 150 ECL Trigger querying state 151 ECL Trigger selecting driving source 150 ECL Trigger setting logic level 149 External Trigger enabling configuration 153 External Trigger querying driving source 153 External Trigger querying state 153 External Trigger selecting driving source 152 input specifications 237 level setting 103 lines progr
172. de 2 Turn on the mainframe and note section 6 of the resource manager s configuration sequence Figure 2 3 Given the starting offset A24 addresses assigned to the devices and the size of each device s memory converted to hexadecimal the A24 addresses not allocated can be determined For example in Figure 2 3 the highest offset is 24000016 with a size of 2000016 131 072 bytes converted to hexadecimal Thus for this system A24 addresses from 26000016 to DFFFFF 16 are available to VMEbus devices Note In systems that include VXI MXI extenders you should use a table to tell the resource manager where your A24 A32 VMEbus memory is located The resource manager cannot find VMEbus memory without this table Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 45 Sequence Display Explanation 1 Testing ROM Testing 512 KB RAM Passed Testing CPU CPU Self Test Passed Non volatile Ram Contents Lost HP IB address 09 Talk Listen command module ladd 0 command module servant area 255 The HP E1406A operating system performs a series of self tests and clears its volatile RAM The command module s HP IB address logical address and servant area based on the switch settings are reported 2 Command Module VMEbus timeout ENABLED The resource manager identifies the status of the command module VMEbus timeout This must be ENABLED for systems without VXlbus extenders HP E1406A Command Module HP IB switch
173. ds Continued on next page 116 Triggering and System Status Chapter 4 send command gt iprintf id s n cmd check cmd for a if found assume it is a query for idx 0 idx lt strlen cmd idx if cmalidx wait up to 1 minute for srq handler if O iwaithdlr 60000 break printf ERROR Failed to process Query n while there are commands to send remove the handler ionsrq id 0 close the session printf nClosing Instrument at s n addr iclose id Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status 117 Notes 118 Triggering and System Status Chapter 4 Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference About This Chapter Command Types Common Command Format SCPI Command Format This chapter describes the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI command set and the IEEE 488 2 Common Commands for the System instrument and the Loader instrument The System instrument is part of the HP E1406A Command Module s internal control processor and is therefore always present in the command module The Flash ROMS Run Load switch on the front of the HP E1406A Command Module must be in the Run position to access the System instrument The Run Load switch must be in the Load position to access the Loader instrument This chapter contains the following sections Command Types 0 0
174. dule 53 Note the following regarding interrupt line allocation e There are seven VXIbus backplane interrupt lines As the resource manager the HP E1406A Command Module assigns itself interrupt line 1 default Additional interrupt lines up to all seven can be assigned to the command module using the interrupt line allocation table Interrupt lines not assigned to programmable handlers remain unassigned e Many Hewlett Packard modules have interrupt line 1 as their factory setting Thus they are available for immediate use with the HP E1406A Command Module e Commander modules which are programmable interrupt handlers are assigned interrupt lines 2 3 4 7 beginning with the commander with the lowest logical address Only one interrupt line is assigned per interrupt handler Servant modules which are programmable interrupt handlers are also assigned interrupt lines beginning with the servant with the lowest logical address Only one interrupt line is assigned per interrupt handler Servant modules which are programmable interrupters are assigned the same interrupt line assigned to their commander For modules which are not programmable the interrupt line is selected using jumpers on the modules The interrupt line allocation table is used to tell the command module which line was selected User Defined The interrupt line allocation table allows you to assign additional interrupt Interru pt Line lines toa e e reserve y ae for T
175. e CONFigure CTABle DCTable DLADdress DLIST ETABle ITABle D Set SEND COMMand MESSage WRITe Table A 15 IEEE Mandated Common Commands CLS ESE ESE ESR IDN OPC OPC RST SRE SRE STB TST WAI Appendix A HP E1406A Specifications and General Information 247 Notes 248 HP E1406A Specifications and General Information Appendix A Appendix B HP E1406A Error Messages Using This Appendix This appendix shows how to read an instrument s error queue discusses the types of command language related error messages and provides a table of all of the System Instrument s error messages and their probable causes e Reading an Instrument s Error Queue Page 249 Error Vy pesis se fea bsg oe LS avec E T E ees deed Page 250 e Startup Error Messages and Warnings Page 255 Reading an Instrument s Error Queue Example Reading the Error Queue Executing the SYST ERR command reads the oldest error message from the instruments error queue and erases that error from the error queue The response format is lt error number gt lt error description string gt Example error message 113 Undefined header Positive error numbers are specific to an instrument Negative error numbers are command language related and discussed in Error Types on page 250
176. e Number of Entries is part of the table header and is one byte Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 23 e Slot Number 1 12 is the mainframe slot the module to be assigned an address is installed in Field is one byte Slot 0 Laddr is the logical address of the slot 0 device This is 0 zero in mainframe 1 but will be different in any additional mainframes Field is one byte Laddr 1 254 is the logical address to which the module in Slot Number is set Field is one byte Block Size 1 128 is the number of devices in an address block When there is more than one device Laddr specifies the logical address of the first device in the set The remaining devices are assigned sequential logical addresses beginning with the next highest address When there are multiple devices in a slot that are not address blocked there must be an entry in the table for each device Field is one byte Determining the The dynamic configuration table has a two byte header and each of the four Table Size fields are one byte The amount of RAM to allocate with DIAGnostic NRAM CREate is computed as 2 4 N where N is the number of modules to be configured For example to dynamically configure three modules based on logical addresses you have selected the table size would be 2 4 3 14 bytes DIAGnostic NRAM CREate would be executed as OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 14 Data Format Data can be sent to the dynamic conf
177. e DIAGnostic DOWNload does not determine if the table is large enough to store the data If the amount of data sent by DIAGnostic DOWNload is greater than the table space allocated by DIAGnostic NRAM CREate system errors will occur You can recover from these errors by executing DIAGnostic BOOT COLD or by pressing the Ctrl R keys on an RS 232 terminal while cycling mainframe power 50 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 Example Reserving A24 Addresses for a VMEbus Device The following program reserves a block of A24 addresses for a VMEbus device The program assumes the device has been configured with a starting A24 address of 30000016 and a size of 8000016 Again this procedure is used when you want to reserve a specific block of A24 A32 addresses for a VMEbus device or when you want to assign addresses to a VXIbus device that are different from those assigned by the resource manager 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 Assign I O path and allocate variable to store A24 A32 memory lallocation data to be downloaded to the command module ASSIGN E1406 TO 70900 EOL CHR 10 END INTEGER Mem_alloc 1 7 Allocate a segment of non volatile user RAM on the command Imodule to store the A24 A32 memory allocation table OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 14 Re
178. e A24 A32 addresses reserved by the A24 A32 address allocation table are reserved within the system until DIAGnostic BOOT COLD or VXI CONFigure MTABle 0 is executed Interrupt Line Allocation In a VXIbus system communication and coordination between a commander module and its servant module s is often achieved using the VXIbus backplane interrupt lines During the configuration sequence the resource manager assigns interrupt lines to programmable interrupt handler modules and interrupter modules Both commanders and servants can be interrupt handlers and or interrupters The command module which is a programmable interrupt handler is not an interrupter Thus in systems where the command module is a servant to another commander it communicates with the commander through its Response and Data Low Registers see the VXIbus System Specification The assignment and use of the interrupt lines is described in Figure 2 5 and with the information which follows Commander e g HP E1406A 1 1 Commander RBS MBS PH RBS Pl P 2 2 2 Modules which are not programmable interrupters must select the interrupt line using the jumpers on the module MBS Message Based Servant RBS Register Based Servant PI Programmable Interrupter 1 Interrupt Line 1 2 Interrupt Line 2 Figure 2 5 Example of Interrupt Line Allocation Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Mo
179. e C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 61 Terminal Interface Features Figure 3 1 shows a typical terminal interface display with its function labels across the bottom of the screen The first five function keys f1 through f5 select instrument menu choices Function keys f6 through f8 provide menu control and access to utility functions The tutorials in this chapter show how to use most of the menu control and utility function keys See General Key Descriptions on page 77 for a complete description of each of these key functions VOLTMTR_8 Instrument Label 9 966606E 637 2 119664E 661 5 274897E 661 5 595674E 661 4 523773E 661 6 446466E 661 meas volt 9 9BBBBBE B37 meas volt7 9 9BB0BBBE B37 meas volt Text Output Area meas volt 2 047310E 000 abcdef Command Entry Line 113 Undef ined header meas volt ac Prompt Line 3 621697E 663 Y Input Line meas ifres _ 1 E IA A 22 11 SE A A TS Y 1 953125E 663 UV Notes 1 Example screens are from HP AdvanceLink terminal emulator 2 Later screen examples are shown compressed only 4 lines high and may show only part of the screen width Figure 3 1 Typical Terminal Interface Display Using Display Terminal Menus A System instrument menu and a variety of other instrument menus depending on the instruments in the command module servant area are availabl
180. e Chapter 5 COMMunicate SERial n RECeive SBITs Example COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit AUTO Parameters Comments Example COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit AUTO Comments Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive SBITs MIN MAX returns The current stop bit setting if no parameter is sent The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent Query the Current Stop Bit Configuration SYST COMM SERO SBITs enter statement REC is implied Statement enters 1 or 2 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit AUTO lt auto_cntrl gt when ON sets the transmit pacing mode to be the same as that set for receive pacing When OFF the transmit pacing mode may be set independently of the receive pacing mode Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt auto_cntrl gt boolean 0 1 ON OFF none e For an HP E1324A AUTO is always ON Trying to set OFF or 0 will generate an error e DIAG BOOT COLD will set AUTO to ON e Related Commands SYST COMM SER n REC PACE PROT SYST COMM SER n TRAN PACE PROT e RST Condition TRAN AUTO ON Link Transmit Pacing with Receive Pacing SYST COMM SERO TRAN AUTO ON SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit AUTO returns the current state of receive to transmit pacing linkage e For an HP E1324A AUTO is always ON In this case AUTO will always r
181. e RRR ERE 144 ROISIGORESES 6 a SS SOR Ch OER EE a EDA OS ERR EER 145 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Contents 3 UPLoad MADDress eos ERE E EER DEE KG 146 UPA RES ADIOS 10 A ee a oe PE ORS 147 CUERO Lio daa se aaa de cda A 148 ECLI gt IM Mediterranea ee A EA em A 149 BL Tiger LEVel Mediateca ee A Eee 149 ECLTrae a gt LEYel IMMediate 2 4644 i446 664 6444 4 smc 150 SEC LISSA SOURCE boca hh A dw A A ee de a 150 FPELT SOUR soria ia A 150 ECLFE RA STATE coria o A 151 ELLIS ARS STA LE E amp eek eee ee AA ae E eo 151 EXTemal M Mediate ico 24 iii A 151 EXTemal LEYel IMMediate 2 44044 2244 iras ORS OHS 152 EX Terpal LEVA EMS ir A A 152 EX Temal SOURCE cerro are A DETER EERE EK SD 152 EX Tettial SOURCE sr rar SOR ORG eS PAS PRED PERE EWES 153 TEXTS TARO La eee eae eek eee eke ho oOo S oe eS 153 EX Terna STATE corssororrsns re AR A 153 TTL Ties ISM oi a ok ek he RR RE RR ORO 154 TIL Tiger EY el IVA ace te aoe A E E 154 TILI Le Vel MMediate 4 4 444 445 0246 AAA 155 TIMES SOUURO 2 ge ee hha LAR EARS SE AEDS OES 155 Tek SOUR AE AS 155 TTEA STATE 5 cod ed 4 He OS AA 150 TITLES ESTRATOS 900000 AAA Leeewe s 156 A bee PR Rhee Seo Oe OMe RS EE ORES 157 ESELSctod WEEDS aw wr eke ee e om Roh Gon kek ake we wk A 157 SELected DEPmes CHECked 4 sake ha ee eee DEKE ERR OER 158 SSELected DEFNE CHECK rra aed Bae Ra aE ERAS OY a 160 SELe ted DEFNE bcc cd cee ke ee E A RE RES 160 ESELscedEDELSS si ereer 4885 4S i
182. e VMEbus devices 29 query 188 query devices 196 209 query extender devices 196 sending commands to 209 210 sequential 39 specifying 208 static information 193 195 statically configured 23 switchbox modules 72 user defined 31 LRN 219 Mainframe extender directing ECL trigger 197 extender directing interrupt line 198 extender directing TTL trigger 199 extender routing ECL trigger 207 extender routing interrupt line 207 extender routing TTL trigger 208 installing command module 19 query extender logical address 196 query hierarchy configuration 192 193 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 273 query modules installed 189 190 237 query modules logical address 196 209 query number of devices 201 query number of modules installed 190 query static information 193 195 Master State Summary MSS 107 111 bit 111 Memory A16 A24 A32 29 A24 A32 address mapping 44 45 command module 20 237 downloading extender table into 35 reset configuration 124 specifications 237 VMEbus reserved memory location 30 VXIbus device 29 windows user defined 31 windows user defined 31 Menu control keys 77 HP E1328A D A Converter 95 HP E1330A B Digital I O 96 HP E1332A Counter Totalizer 97 HP E1333A Universal Counter 99 multimeter stand alone 94 scanning voltmeter 92 switchbox 91 system instrument 88 Message available MAV bits clearing 222 available
183. e ee terrupt handlers and interrupters and assign lines to us devices Allocation Table The Interrupt Line User defined interrupt line allocations are specified with an interrupt line Allocation Table table created in the command module The table is created as follows 1 Table space in the command module s non volatile user RAM is made available by allocating a segment of RAM with the command DIAGnostic NRAM CREate lt size gt 2 Reset the command module NRAM is created during the boot up process DIAGnostic BOOT WARM 3 The location starting address of the table in RAM is determined with the command DIAGnostic NRAM ADDRess 4 Data is downloaded into the table with the command DIAGnostic DOWNload lt address gt lt data gt 5 The table is linked to the appropriate algorithm in the command module processor with the command VXI CONFigure ITABle lt address gt 54 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 Table Format The format of the interrupt line table is shown in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 Interrupt Line Allocation Table Format Table Format Data Record Format Valid Flag Intr Line Number of Records Data Record 1 Handler Laddr Data Record 2 Number of Interrupters e Intr 1 Laddr e __ Intr 2 Laddr Data Record 7 Intr M Laddr The table parameters are e Valid Flag 1 0 1 one indicates the table is valid and the modu
184. e entire contents of the Flash ROMS STATus OPERation CONDition R L Returns the state of the Condition Register ENABle lt event gt R L Set Standard Operation Enable Register mask ENABle R L Returns value of enable mask EVENt R L Returns value of the bit set in the Event Register Standard Operation Status Group NTRansition lt unmask gt R L Sets the negative transition mask PTRansition lt unmask gt R L Sets the positive transition mask PRESet R L Presets Status Registers QUEStionable R L Always returns 0 CONDition R L Returns the state of the Condition Register in the Questionable Status Group ENABle lt event gt R L Set enable mask in Questionable Status Group 228 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 SCPI Commands Quick Reference Command Mode Description SYSTem GPIB Mode R active in RUN mode ENABle EVENt NTRansition lt unmask gt PTRansition lt unmask gt COMMunicate ADDRess SERial n CONTrol DTR lt dtr_cntrl gt ON OFF STAN IBF DTR RTS lt rts_cntrl gt ON OFF STAN IBF RTS RECeive BAUD lt baud_rate gt MIN MAX BAUD MIN MAX BITS lt bits gt 7 8 MIN MAX BITS MIN MAX PACE PROTocol lt protocol gt KON NONE PROTocol THReshold STARt lt char_count gt STARt MIN MAX STOP lt char_count gt STOP MIN MAX PARity lt type gt EVEN ODD
185. e from the terminal interface These menus incorporate the most used functions but do not provide access to the complete functionality of an instrument If a particular function is not available from a menu you can type the corresponding common command or SCPI command string and execute it from the terminal interface See Executing Commands on page 76 for more information 62 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 How Instruments Appear in the Menu Note Multiple Command Modules When you select an instrument you are assigning the terminal interface to that instrument This means that any menu operations commands executed or recalled errors displayed and so forth pertain only to that instrument Terminal interface operation of an instrument is independent from other instruments and independent from the remote operation of the instrument To operate another instrument from the terminal interface you must select that instrument Instruments in the terminal interface menu are register based devices which are in the servant area of the command module Message based devices or register based devices outside the command module s servant area do not appear in the menu Message based instruments which do not appear in instrument menus can be programmed using the SYSTEM instrument menu See Using the System Instrument Menu on page 65 In systems with multiple command modules the instruments in the menu depe
186. e more than 254 entries in the dynamic configuration table 41 Invalid UDEF Interrupter The logical address specified for an interrupter is a device that is not an interrupter 42 Invalid UDEF INTR table The interrupter table valid flag is not 1 43 Invalid UDEF MEM table The valid flag in the memory table is not set to 1 44 Invalid UDEF MEM table data An invalid logical address is specified in the memory table 45 Warning NVRAM contents lost NVRAM was corrupted or a cold boot was executed 46 MESG based open access or 14 device is violating VXI specification failed 47 Granted device not found 48 Warning DRAM contents lost Driver RAM was corrupted or a cold boot was executed 49 VME system controller VME SYSTEM CONTROLLER switch is disabled on the disabled HP E1406A module 50 Extender not slot 0 device VXlbus extender in remote mainframe is not in slot 0 of its mainframe 51 Invalid extender LADD window MXI extender cannot be configured with a valid LADD window 52 Device outside of LADD A device is located outside the allowable logical address window window range of an MXIbus extender 53 Invalid extender A24 window MXIbus extender cannot be configured with a valid A24 memory window 54 Device outside of A24 window An A24 memory device is located outside the allowable logical address window range of an MXIbus extender 55 Invalid extender A32 window MXIbus extender cannot be configured with a valid A32 memory window 56 Device out
187. e register is not defined for this device Manufacturer specific comment Up to an 80 character quoted string that contains manufacturer specific data It is sent with a 488 2 string response data format and will contain the instrument name and its IEEE 488 1 secondary address unless a start up error is detected In that case this field will contain one or more error codes in the form CNFG ERROR n m Z See Table B 3 in Appendix B for a complete list of these codes Comments e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI CONF INFormation ALL VXI CONF LADDress Example Get Static Information on the Currently Selected Logical Address VXI SEL 0 Select the logical address VXI CONF INF Ask for data enter statement Return data 194 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 CONFigure VXI CONFigure INFormation ALL returns the static information about INFormation ALL all logical addresses The information is returned in the order specified in the response to VXI CONF LADDress The information about multiple logical addresses will be semicolon separated and follow the IEEE 488 2 response message format Individual fields of the output are comma separated Comments e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI CONF INFormation VXI CONF LADDress CONFigure TABle vxI CONFigure ITABle lt address gt links a user defined interrupt line allocation table to the command module resource manager processor The command module must be the actin
188. e set to the minimum possible size to include all of the memory addresses found on all of its descendants The window for a remote extender will be set to the minimum possible size to include all of the memory on its VMEbus and all of its descendants e A VXIbus device will be assigned a memory location in the following manner VXIbus devices on a given VMEbus will be assigned memory locations after all descendant busses of the VMEbus have been configured VXIbus devices on a given VMEbus will be assigned memory locations in the range defined by the lowest and highest memory pages available for that bus The first available page for a VMEbus will be the first page that is higher than any reserved page on any of its ancestors VXIbus devices will be assigned the lowest memory locations available on the current bus VXIbus devices will be assigned locations according to memory size and logical address in that order The device with the largest memory size on a given bus will be assigned an address first For devices with the same size the device with the lowest logical address will be assigned a memory location first If possible no devices will be assigned to memory locations in the bottom or top Yg of the total memory for example in A24 memory addresses 00000016 20000016 or E0000016 FFFFFF Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 29 VMEbus reserved memory must be placed in locations
189. e tepee A 64 Using the System Instrument Men 4 4 084484 rss ra 65 Using the Loader Instrument seri a AA 72 Using the Switchbox Mel orar a RA ARA Ta Momie Modep poseo m k kg Re a geg Ree ce ea ee p O a Go 75 Execuline Commands ya ied deed a da e A 76 Editing the Terminal Display lt cae eke rr rar ARA AAA General Key Deseo isaac a A ES e A TI Men and Ment Control Keys s rss tare 25 odo oe treso Ow tia 77 Instrument Control Keys 44444 44h 4 ender ERR ERDAS ERS 78 Boing Kee e OES SOC SE AA EWR S EER 78 OU OS eke ok ob BE aOR Bowe dew hob ahd aah ok ah ade es Soba med 78 Using Supported Terminal sp se cee eae KARR ER ERE YER EE KER RES 79 The Supported Temas A OE ERE EL A 79 Usine MeF ee uta aa ee de e a 79 Using the WYSE WY 3U 64464 oer ae amen E a 81 Using Other Terminals oo a eh A EERE Re SEEKER 82 What Not Supported Means gt 4124464644544 44446 A 82 Testing Terminals for Compatibility ooo o 82 Using a Terminal Without Menus o o e 83 10S eet OMY 0 e EA RARE AAA AREA 86 System Instrument Switchbox Menus o o e 87 System Insmument MeN cr id A 88 SWCD MEW e e cms AAA ARA OHSS EES 91 Scanning Voltmetr Memi cao ara A RRA ARA 92 HP E1326B E1411B 514 Digit Multimeter Stand Alone Menu 94 HP E1328A 4 Channel D A Converter Menu o o e 95 HP E1330A B Quad 8 Bit Digital Input Output Menu 96 HP E1332A
190. e the System instrument execute this command will generate Error 113 Undefined header OPC Operation Complete causes an instrument to set bit O Operation Complete Message in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending operations have been completed By enabling this bit to be reflected in the Status Byte Register ESE 1 command you can ensure synchronization between the instrument and an external computer or between multiple instruments OPC Operation Complete Query causes an instrument to place an ASCII 1 into the instrument s output queue when all pending instrument operations are finished By requiring the computer to read this response before continuing program execution you can ensure synchronization between one or more instruments and the computer PMC Purge Macros Command purges all currently defined macros in the selected instrument PSC lt flag gt Power on Status Clear Command controls the automatic power on clearing of the Service Request Enable Register and Standard Event Status Enable Register Executing PSC 1 disables any previously enabled bits at power on preventing the System instrument from requesting service when power is cycled Executing PSC 0 causes any previously enabled bits to remain enabled at power on which allows the System instrument to request service if it has been enabled SRE when power is cycled The value of flag is stored in non volatile memory Example This example confi
191. e the contents of any address in RAM Changing the contents of RAM used by the command module s control processor can cause unpredictable results Related Commands DIAG PEEK Example Store Byte in User Non Volatile RAM DIAG POKE 16252928 8 255 RDISk ADDress DIAGnostic RDISk ADDRess returns the starting address of the RAM disc volume previously defined with the DIAG RDISk CREate command The RAM disc volume is defined for use only by the IBASIC option Comments e DIAG RDISk CREate does not allocate the RAM volume segment until after a subsequent reboot To get accurate results execute DIAG RDISk ADDRress after the reboot e Related Commands DIAG RDISk CREate DIAG RDISk CREate Example Return the Starting Address of the IBASIC RAM Volume DIAG RDIS ADDR enter statement Statement returns decimal numeric address 144 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 RDISk CREate DIiAGnostic RDISk CREate lt size gt allocates memory for a RAM disc volume The RAM disc volume is defined for use only by the IBASIC option Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt size gt numeric 0 to available RAM or MIN MAX none Comments e The RAM disc segment will only be created after the System instrument has been rebooted cycle power or execute DIAG BOOT e Using all of the available RAM MAX for the disc volume segment will limit some functions such as IBASIC program space
192. e to 9600 19200 card number SYST COMM SER n BAUD 19200 Sets the serial interface baud rate to 19200 PARITY READ card number SYST COMM SER n PAR Read current parity type SET EVEN card number SYST COMM SER n PAR EVEN Sets the serial interface parity to even ODD card number SYST COMM SER n PAR ODD Sets the serial interface parity to odd TONE card number SYST COMM SER n PAR ONE Sets the serial interface parity to one E ZERO card number SYST COMM SER n PAR ZERO Sets the serial interface parity to zero NONE card number SYST COMM SER n PAR NONE Sets the serial interface parity to none BITS READ card number SYST COMM SER n BITS Read current data bit width SET 7 card number SYST COMM SER n BITS 7 Sets the data width to 7 bits 8 card number SYST COMM SER k BITS 8 Sets the data width to 8 bits PACE READ card number SYST COMM SER n PACE Read current pacing type SET XON OFF card number SYST COMM SER n PACE XON Enables XON XOFF software handshaking S id NONE card number SYST COMM SER n PACE NONE Disables XON XOFF software handshaking System Instrument Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 User Entry Command s Used Description Continued from previous page CONTROL DTR READ card number SYST COMM SER n CONT DTR Read current setting for DTR line SET ON card number SYST COMM SER n CONT DTR ON Set DTR line to static V H OFF card number SYST COMM SE
193. ed in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved O Brees HP E1406A User s Manual Edition 4 Copyright 1996 Hewlett Packard Company All Rights Reserved HP E1406A User s Manual 9 Documentation History All Editions and Updates of this manual and their creation date are listed below The first Edition of the manual is Edition 1 The Edi tion number increments by 1 whenever the manual is revised Updates which are issued between Editions contain replacement pages to correct or add additional information to the current Edition of the manual Whenever a new Edition is created it will contain all of the Update information for the previous Edition Each new Edition or Update also includes a revised copy of this documentation his tory page Edd a Eh eo June 1992 O A E February 1993 Edition 3 tit A A E AA Dd October 1994 Edito a bade ns ar des de Dees May 1996 Trademark Information Mircosoft and MS DOS are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp Safety Symbols Instruction manual symbol affixed to prod uct Indicates that the user must refer to the Ay Alternating current AC manual for specific WARNING or CAU
194. efinite block or a and carriage return for an indefinite block 264 Sending Binary Data Over RS 232 Appendix D Index HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual CLS 105 217 DMC 217 EMC 217 EMC 217 ESE 108 114 217 ESE 106 108 218 ESR 108 218 GMC 218 IDN 218 LMC 219 LRN 219 OPC 220 OPC 220 PMC 220 PSC 220 PSC 220 RMC 221 RST 105 221 SRE 108 114 163 165 221 SRE 108 221 STB 107 108 111 112 114 222 difference from ireadstb 107 TST 222 WAT 222 A A16 address space 260 A16 A24 A32 Configuration logical addresses default 29 logical addresses setting 29 memory 29 A24 A32 Address allocation 44 45 allocation table 48 allocation table data format 50 allocation table downloading data into 50 allocation table errors associated with 52 53 allocation table linking command module processor 200 allocation table query starting address 201 allocation table table format 48 49 allocation table table header 50 allocation table table size 49 allocation table user defined 200 201 mapping 44 45 reserving address space 48 reserving for VMEbus device 51 Abbreviated SCPI Commands 120 Address A24 A32 allocation 44 45 200 A24 A32 mapping 44 45 base address 260 commander servant hierarchy table 186 187 dynamic configuration table 187 188 extender table 191 HP IB secondary 42 HP
195. em to implement table Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 187 CONFigure DCTable VXI CONFigure DCTable returns the starting address of the user s dynamic configuration table Example Query Address of Dynamic Configuration Table VXI CONF DCTable Ask for address enter statement Return address CONFigure VXI CONFigure DLADdress returns a comma separated decimal DLADdress numeric list of device logical addresses currently installed in the mainframe If the command module is not the resource manager it only returns the logical addresses of the devices in its servant area Comments e Use the VXI CONF DNUM command to determine the number of values which will be returned by VXI CONF DLAD Use each of the logical addresses returned by VXI CONF DLAD with VXI CONF DLIS to determine the types of devices installed VXI CONF DEVICELAD is also accepted e This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use the VXI CONF LADDress command Related Commands VXI CONF DLISt VXI CONF DNUMber VXI CONF LADDress Example Determine the Device Addresses within the System VXI CONF DLAD Query for list of addresses enter statement List of addresses 188 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 CONFigure DLISt vxi CONFigure DLISt lt logical_addr gt returns information about the device specified by logical_addr Response data is in the form n1 n2 n3
196. ength Arbitrary Block Program Data format see example on page 121 to send your data rather than the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format e A register address in A16 address space can be determined by 1FC00016 LADDR 64 register_number Where 1FC00016 is the base address in the command module A16 space LADDR is the device logical address 64 is the number of address bytes per device and register_number is the register to which the data is written If the device is an A24 device the address can be determined using the VXI CONFigure DLISt command to find the base address in A24 and then adding the register_number to that value A24 memory between address 20000016 and address E0000016 is directly addressable by the command module e lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal HQ or binary B formats DOWNload is done by word 16 bit access so address must be even e Related Commands DIAG UPLoad SADDress Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 129 Byte Format Each byte sent with this command is expected to be in the following format Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Control Bit Check Bits Data Bits Control Bit is used to indicate the serial driver information such as clear reset or end of transmission This bit is ignored by the regular 488 2 driver The control bit should be one for regular data Check Bits are used to detect and correc
197. ent as a single 16 bit word which must contain the Valid Flag and the number of modules involved For a valid table the header is 256 plus the number of modules For example to indicate a valid table with seven entries the header is 263 256 7 263 CAUTION When downloading data into the user defined extender table DIAGnostic DOWNload does not determine if the table is large enough to store the data If the amount of data sent by DIAGnostic DOWNload is greater than the table space allocated by DIAGnostic NRAM CREate system errors will occur You can recover from these errors by executing DIAG BOOT COLD or by pressing the Ctrl R keys on an RS 232 terminal while cycling mainframe power Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 33 Example User Defined This example shows a single interconnect bus with a local extender at Extender Table logical address 63 in the root mainframe and a remote extender at logical address 64 in the secondary mainframe 258 valid upper byte 2 records lower byte 63 local extender logical address 128 logical address window base 64 logical address window size 128 to 191 255 specify no A16 memory A16 memory size ignored 64 A24 memory base page 64 A24 memory size pages 64 to 127 A32 memory base page 128 A32 memory size pages 0 to 127 257 interrupt line 1 enabled IN 769 TTL Triggers TTL1 OUT
198. ent of executing RST RST_INST also clears the instrument s terminal interface and remote input and output buffers RST_INST is the only terminal interface key that can affect an instrument being operated from remote Clears the terminal interface input and output buffers remote buffers are not cleared of the selected instrument and returns to the top level of the instrument menu Press CLR_INST whenever an instrument is busy is not responding to terminal interface control or to abort a command being entered from the terminal interface Moves the cursor one character space to the right while leaving characters intact Moves the cursor one character space to the left while leaving characters intact Erases the character at the present cursor position for user entered data only Erases all characters from the present cursor position to the end of the input line for user entered data only Selects alternate key definitions These CTRL key sequences provide short cuts to some of the menu sequences and also provide some functions not directly available from dedicated terminal keys Some alternate key definitions are CTRL R Instrument Reset CTRL C Clear Instrument CTRL D Select an instrument menu See Table 3 3 on page 85 for a complete list of all control sequence functions Users of the optional IBASIC interpreter should refer to their IBASIC manual set for additional editing functions 78 Using the Display Terminal
199. ents Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric Oor 1 none e The routing is set so the device selected by the VXI SELect command can source the trigger line and all other devices in the system may monitor that trigger line Some mainframe extender devices do not support some trigger lines This command will determine whether the specified trigger line is supported while it attempts to execute the command and return a trigger not supported error if it encounters any extenders that do not support the specified trigger It will attempt to direct all extenders that do support the specified trigger even if it encounters some extenders that do not e This command can only be executed by the System instrument in a command module that is serving as resource manager for the entire VXIbus system Related Commands VXI SELect VXI ROUTe TTLTrg lt n gt VXI ROUTe INTerrupt lt n gt VXI CONFigure MEXTender ROUTe INTerru pi lt n gt VXI ROUTe INTerrupt lt n gt configures the routing of the interrupt line specified by lt n gt for all mainframe extenders in the system Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric 0 through 7 none The routing is set so the device selected by the VXI SELect command can handle the interrupt line and all other devices in the system may assert that interrupt line Some
200. ents VXI CONFigure MTABle returns the starting address of the user s A24 A32 address allocation table Query Address of A24 A32 Address Allocation Table VXI CONF MTABle Ask for address enter statement Return address VXI CONFigure NUMBer returns the number of devices in the system when it is issued to a resource manager This is an integer between 1 and 256 inclusive If the command is received by a device that is not the resource manager it returns the number of devices which are immediate servants to the destination device including the destination device For example a commander with 3 servants would return a value of 4 or a resource manager for a system of 4 devices would return a value of 5 e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI CONF LADDress VXI CONFigure NUMBer MEXTender returns the number of devices in the system when it is issued to a resource manager This is an integer between 1 and 256 inclusive which indicates the number of mainframe extender devices in the system If the command is received by a device other than the resource manager an error is reported e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI CONF LADDress VXI CONF NUMBer VXI QUERy lt logical_addr gt returns one 16 bit data word from the Data Low Register of the message based device at logical_addr Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt numeric Must round to 0 through 255 none e Send a
201. er processor DCTable R Gets the dynamic configuration table starting address DLADdress R Returns a list of the logical addresses in the system DLISt lt logical_addr gt R Returns information about one or all installed devices DNUMber R Returns the number of installed devices ETABle lt address gt R Links the extender device table to the command module resource manager processor ETABle R Gets the extender device table starting address HIERarchy R Gets the current hierarchy configuration data for the selected logical address see VXI SELect ALL R Gets the current hierarchy configuration data for all logical addresses INFormation R Gets the static information about the selected logical address see VXI SELect ALL R Gets the static information about all logical addresses ITABle lt address gt R Links the interrupt line allocation table to the command module resource manager processor ITABle R Gets the interrupt line allocation table starting address LADDress R Gets a list of all logical addresses of devices in the system when issued to a resource manager Generates an error if received by a device other than the resource manager MEXTender R Gets list of all logical addresses for mainframe extenders in the system when issued to a resource manager Generates an error if received by a device other than the resource manager MEXTender ECLTrg lt line gt lt direction gt INJOUT
202. errupt ACTivate 138 INTerrupt PRlority 139 INTerrupt PRIority 139 INTerrupt RESPonse 140 INTerrupt SETup 141 INTerrupt SETup 141 INTX Interrupt Register configuration 30 interrupt enable bits 30 ionsrq Command 111 112 114 ireadstb Command difference from STB 107 reading status byte 111 112 114 iscanf Command 112 114 K Keys backspace 85 clear end 78 85 clear line 85 CLR_INST 65 78 85 CTRL 78 delete char 78 85 delete line 85 descriptions of 77 editing terminal interface 78 end of line 85 ESC 64 function instrument 64 function switchbox 72 77 insert line 85 instrument control 78 left arrow 78 menu control 64 65 77 menu select 64 65 MORE 64 77 PRV_MENU 64 77 RCL_MENU 78 85 RCL_NEXT 77 85 RCL_PREV 77 85 return 85 right arrow 78 RST_INST 65 78 85 SEL_INST 64 65 77 85 start of line 85 UTILS 65 VT100 key map 79 VT220 key map 80 WYSE WY 30 key map 81 L Learn Marcos Query 219 Learn Query Command 219 Left Arrow Key 78 Linking Commands 122 LLO Local Lockout 224 LMC 219 Loader Instrument using 72 Loading instrument driver in DRAM 136 Local Lockout LLO 224 Logical Address 22 assigning 27 29 168 assigning by resource manager 22 28 configuration of 27 29 default 28 29 device specified by 189 190 dynamically configured 24 25 28 factory setting 168 hierarchy configuration 192 193 multipl
203. es a location within the user RAM segment allocated using DIAG NRAM CREate if you are downloading a configuration table DIAG DOWNload can change the contents of System RAM causing unpredictable results This command can also be used to write data to a device with registers in the A16 address space See DIAGnostic DOWNload SADDress Related Commands DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG NRAM ADDRess DIAG UPLoad MADDress VXI CONF CTABle VXI CONF DCTable VXI CONF ITABle VXI CONF MTABle Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 131 Example Load Dynamic Configuration Information into an Allocated RAM Segment DIAG NRAM CRE 6 DIAG BOOT WARM DIAG NRAM ADDR enter value to variable X DIAG DOWN lt value of X gt table data VXI CONF DCTAB lt value of X gt DIAG BOOT WARM Allocate a segment of user RAM Reboot system to complete allocation Query starting address Get starting address into X Download table data Link configuration table to configuration algorithm Reboot to set new configuration DOWNload DiAGnostic DOWNload SADDress lt address gt lt data gt writes data to SADDress Non volatile user RAM at a single address specified by address and writes data to devices with registers in A16 address space Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric 0 to 16 777 215 4HFFFFFE none lt data gt arbitrary block See Parameter Type
204. es are waiting in the queue each SYST ERR query will return the oldest error message and that message will be deleted from the queue e If the error queue fills to 30 entries the last error in the queue is replaced with Error 350 Too many errors No further errors are accepted by the queue until space becomes available using SYST ERR or the queue is cleared using CLS The SYST ERR command can be used to determine if any configuration errors occurred during the power on sequence Example Read All Error Messages From and Empty the Error Queue loop statement SYST ERR enter statement until statement Related Commands ESE ESR SRE RST Condition Error queue is cleared When SYST ERR is sent while the error queue is empty the System instrument responds with 0 No error Loop to read all errors Ask for error message Input the error a number and error message a string until error number is 0 TIME SYSTem TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt sets the command module s internal clock Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt hour gt numeric Must round to 0 to 23 none lt minute gt numeric Must round to 0 to 59 none lt second gt numeric Must round to 0 to 60 none Comments e Related Commands SYST DATE SYST DATE SYST TIME e RST Condition RST does not change the command module s real time clock Exa
205. es whether only bug fixes and minor changes were made Example Get and Print the ID Fields from the System 10 DIM AS 50 Dimension array for ID fields 20 OUTPUT 70900 IDN Query identity 30 ENTER 70900 A Place ID fields in array 40 PRINT A Print ID fields 50 END LMC Learn Macros Query returns a quoted string name for each currently defined macro If more than one macro is defined the quoted strings are separated by commas If no macro is defined then a quoted null string is returned LRN Learn Query Command causes the instrument to respond with a string of SCPI commands which define the instrument s current state Your application program can enter the LRN response data into a string variable later to be sent back to the instrument to restore that configuration Example response from an HP E1326B multimeter in the power on state RST CAL ZERO AUTO 1 CAL LFR 60 VAL 0 00000000E 000 DISP MON STAT 0 CHAN 0 FORM ASC 7 FUNC VOLT MEM VME ADDR 2097152 SIZE 0 STAT 0 RES APER 1 666667E 002 OCOM 0 RANG 1 638400E 004 RANG AUTO 1 VOLT APER 1 666667E 002 RANG 8 000000E 000 RANG AUTO 1 TRIG COUN 1 DEL 0 00000000E 000 DEL AUTO 1 TRIG SOUR IMM SAMP COUN 1 SOUR IMM TIM 5 000000E 002 S Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 219 Note The System instrument no longer implements the LRN command Attempting to hav
206. ess must be set to 255 using the logical address switches 10 Assign an I O path and allocate a variable to store dynamic configuration 20 Idata to be downloaded to the command module 30 ASSIGN E1406 TO 70900 EOL CHR 10 END 40 INTEGER Dy_config 1 6 50 60 Allocate a segment of non volatile user RAM on the command 70 Imodule to store the dynamic configuration table 1 module 80 OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 6 90 100 Restart the system instrument to allocate the user RAM Wait for the 110 restartto complete before continuing 120 OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT WARM 130 ONTIMEOUT 7 1 GOTO Complete 140 Complete B SPOLL 70900 150 OFF TIMEOUT 7 160 170 Return the starting address of the table in non volatile user RAM 180 OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM ADDR 190 ENTER E1406 A 200 210 Download the following bytes the table is valid one module is dynamically 220 configured it s installed in slot 6 the logical address of the slot O module 230 lis 0 the logical address to be set is 32 and the block size is 1 240 DATA 257 1 6 0 32 1 250 READ Dy_config 260 OUTPUT E1406 USING 3 K DIAG DOWN A 0 270 OUTPUT E1406 USING B Dy_config 280 290 Link the dynamic configuration table to the appropriate algorithm 300 OUTPUT E1406 VXI CONF DCT A 310 320 Restart the system instrument to set the user defined configuration 330 OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT WARM 340 END
207. eturn a 1 Query if AUTO is ON or OFF SYST COMM SERO TRAN AUTO enter statement Statement enters the number 1 or 0 Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 179 COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit PACE PROTocol Parameters Comments Example COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit PACE PROTocol Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit PACE PROTocol lt protocol gt enables or disables the transmit pacing XON XOFF protocol Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt protocol gt discrete XON NONE none e For an HP E1324A AUTO is always ON In this case TRAN PACE will also set RECeive PACE Receipt of an XOFF character ASCII 1910 1316 will hold off transmission of data until an XON character ASCII 1710 1116 is received DIAG BOOT COLD will set PACE to XON Related Commands SYST COMM SER n TRAN AUTO e RST Condition No change Set XON XOFF Transmit Pacing SYST COMM SERO TRAN PACE PROT XON SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n TRANsmit PACE PROTocol returns the current transmit pacing protocol Check Transmit Pacing Protocol SYST COMM SERO TRAN PACE PROT enter statement Statement enters the string XON or NONE 180 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 DATE Parameters Comments Example DATE Example SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt sets the command module s internal calendar
208. evice specific error occurs it sets the Device Specific Error bit bit 3 in the Standard Event Status Register 250 HP E1406A Error Messages Appendix B Query Errors A query error indicates a problem has occurred in the instrument s output query p queue When a query error occurs it sets the Query Error bit bit 2 in the Standard Event Status Register Query errors can be caused by the following e An attempt was made to read the instrument s output queue when no output was present or pending e Data in the instrument s output queue has been lost for some reason Table B 2 Error Messages and Causes Error Messages and Causes Code Message Cause 101 102 103 104 108 109 113 123 128 131 138 141 160 178 211 222 224 240 252 253 258 310 350 Invalid character Syntax error Invalid separator Data type error Parameter not allowed Missing parameter Undefined header Numeric overflow Numeric data not allowed Invalid suffix Suffix not allowed Invalid character data Block data error Expression data not allowed Trigger ignored Data out of range lllegal parameter value Hardware error Missing media Corrupt media Media protected System error Too many errors Unrecognized character in specified parameter Command is missing a space or comma between parameters Command parameter is separated by
209. f 119 switchbox 239 SYST ERR 255 SYSTem commands 168 183 system instrument 246 upper case letters 120 VXI commands 184 215 word serial commands 213 215 SDC Selected Device Clear 223 SEL_INST Key 64 65 77 85 SELect 208 Select an Instrument Prompt 84 263 SELect 209 Selected Device Clear SDC 223 Selecting a switchbox from menu 72 an instrument from menu 64 65 ECL Trigger driving source 150 External Trigger driving source 152 instruments using commands 83 trig out port driving source 152 TTL Trigger driving source 155 Self Test Command 222 SEND COMMand 209 SEND COMMand 210 SEND MES Sage 211 Sending binary data over RS 232 263 264 commands to logical address 209 210 message string 214 message strings 211 trigger pulse 103 149 154 trigger pulse to trig out port 151 Separator SCPI commands 120 Serial interface command module 125 interface communications parameters 126 interface configure input buffer 174 175 interface IBASIC 125 interface NONE 125 interface parity 176 178 interface query owner 126 interface query input buffer size 174 175 interface resetting parameters 124 poll SPOLL 124 poll SPOLL description 222 225 Service Request SRQ 221 defining SRQ handler 111 114 detecting errors with 114 generating 107 111 112 114 163 165 handling 111 112 querying 221 Setting A16 A24 A32 logical address 29 commander serva
210. f these terminals try it Here is a list of terminals you should try HP 2392A HP 2394A DEC VT100 DEC VT220 WYSE WY 50 HP AdvanceLink terminal emulation software configure as HP 2392A Here is how you test an unsupported terminal for compatibility with the display terminal interface 1 Connect your terminal and configure its communication parameters to match the mainframe s serial interface see Appendix C 2 With your terminal turned on and set to remote mode turn on the mainframe After the mainframe power on self test the display interface sends sequences of characters to your terminal which should cause it to return its identification If the terminal ID matches one in a list kept by the terminal interface it will send character sequences to program the function keys and their labels 3 If you now see the Select an instrument prompt and the Select an instrument menu labels your terminal is ready to try Go to the beginning of this chapter and try the menus 82 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 4 If you see only the Select an instrument prompt without the Select an instrument menu labels your terminal did not return a recognized ID To set the terminal type manually type the terminal interface command ST HP followed by Return for HP terminals 700 94 700 92 26Xx 23XX or ST HP70043 followed by Return for the HP 700 43 terminal or ST VT100 followed by Return for VT
211. format so statement will not terminate on CRs or LFs and so forth Line Feed LF and EOI follow the last character retrieved Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 147 OUTPut The OUTPut subsystem controls the output of pulses and levels to the ECLTrg and TTLTrg trigger buses as well as the command module s front panel Trig Out connector Signals connected to the front panel Trig In connector can also operate the ECLTrg and TTLTrg trigger buses Note The HP E1406A Command Module s TTLTrg trigger lines and Trig Out port use low true or negative logic When a trigger level is set for example OUTPut EXTernal LEVel 1 a low voltage is present Subsystem Syntax OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 IMMediate LEVel IMMediate lt evel gt IMMediate SOURCe lt source gt SOURce STATe lt mode gt STATe EXTernal IMMediate LEVel IMMediate lt evel gt IMMediate SOURCe lt source gt SOURce STATe lt mode gt STATe TTLTrg lt n gt TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 IMMediate LEVel IMMediate lt evel gt IMMediate SOURCe lt source gt SOURce STATe lt mode gt STATe 148 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 ECLTrg lt N gt OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt IMMediate causes a pulse to appear on the specified IMMediate ECL Trigger line Comments e ECLTrg lt n gt represents either ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 e OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe must be O
212. g VT100 Mode To use the HP 700 22 in VT100 mode press the Set Up key and set the following configuration Fields Value Terminal Mode EM100 7 bit Ctrls Columns 80 EM100 ID EM100 Inhibit Auto Wrap YES VT220 Key Map The function keys that are normally labeled f6 through f14 are now labeled Note Because the HP 700 22 keyboard has nine function keys in the center of the keyboard f4 is mapped twice The symbols shown in the upper left corner of key each are now mapped with the function labeled in the center of each key Select Insert Here Delete Insert Delete Line Line Char 8 9 C d Prev Next Screen Screen t 80 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 Selecting VT220 Mode To use the HP 700 22 in VT220 mode press the Set Up key and set the following configuration Fields Value Terminal Mode EM200 7 bit Ctrls Columns 80 EM100 ID EM220 Inhibit Auto Wrap YES Using the WYSE with the WYSE WY 30 terminal some functions of the display terminal WY 30 _ interface have been assigned to keys with other labels Use this keyboard map to help locate these functions The symbols shown in the upper left corner of key each are now mapped with the function labeled in the center of each key Where two function key labels are shown the one following the character is accessed by pressing and holding the CTRL key while pressing the des
213. g resource manager in order for the table to be implemented Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric DIAG NRAM ADDR none Comments e Be certain that address specifies the starting address of the area in User RAM allocated using DIAG NRAM CREate where you stored the interrupt line allocation table data e Tables must start on an even address Note that DIAG NRAM CREate allocates RAM for the table with an even starting address e lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats Setting address to 0 zero prevents the parameters defined by the table from being invoked when the system is re booted however the table remains in user RAM e For more information see the section User Defined Interrupt Line Allocation Table on page 54 Related Commands DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG NRAM ADDRess DIAG DOWNload VXI CONF ITABle Example Link an Interrupt Line Allocation Table to the Processor DIAG NRAM CRE lt size gt Allocate space for table in user RAM DIAG BOOT Reboot system to complete the allocation DIAG NRAM ADDR Get starting address of table RAM segment DIAG DOWN lt address gt lt data gt Download data into table VXI CONF ITAB lt address gt Link table to processor DIAG BOOT Reboot system to implement Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 195 CONFigure ITABle Example CONFigure
214. gger line specified by n 0 through 7 e TTLTrg lt n gt represents TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 Determine Current State of TTLTrg1 OUTP TTLT1 LEV enter statement Ask for level Return state of trigger line OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce lt source gt selects which source will drive the selected trigger line Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric 0 through 7 N A lt source gt discrete INT EXT NONE none e INT allows the selected trigger line to be driven by OUTP TTLTrgn LEVel commands e EXT allows the selected trigger line to be driven by the Trig In front panel SMB connector e OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe must be ON for the source to drive the trigger line Setting STATe OFF does not change the source so the signal driving the line is still present Setting STATe back ON sets the source to NONE and de asserts the line e Related Commands OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate e RST Condition OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce NONE Select the Trig In Connector to Drive TTLTrg0 OUTP TTLTO SOUR EXT OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce queries the source currently driving the selected trigger line e TTLTrg lt n gt represents TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 e Querying the source with STATe OFF returns NONE regardless of the actual source setting Determine the Source Driving TTLTrg1 OUTP TTLT1 SOUR enter statement Return tr
215. gister name see below Comments e The register parameter can be all even numbers from 0 to 62 inclusive as a numeric value or the following optional words A16 Window A16 Window Map Register 12 A24Low A24 Pointer Low Register 18 A24High A24 Pointer High Register 16 A24 Window A24 Window Map Register 14 A32Low A32 Pointer Low Register 22 A32High A32 Pointer High Register 20 A32 Window A32 Window Map Register 16 ATTRibute Attribute Register 8 DHIGh Data High Register 12 DLOW Data Low Register 14 DTYPe Device Type Register 2 ETConfigure ECL Trigger Configuration Register 22 ICNF Interrupt Configuration Register 18 ICONtrol Interrupt Control Register 28 ID ID Register 0 ISTatus Interrupt Status Register 26 LAWindow Logical Address Configuration Register 10 TTConfigure TTL Trigger Configuration Register 20 MODid MODID Register 8 OFFSet Offset Register 6 PROTocol Protocol Register 8 RESPonse Response Register 10 SNHigh Serial Number High Register 10 SNLow Serial Number Low Register 12 STATus Status Register 4 SUBClass Subclass Register 30 UCONfigure Utility Configuration Register 24 VNUMber Version Number Register 14 Note The optional register names are decoded into the equivalent register address You will get correct results if you use any one of the words for a given register address even if the word itself does not
216. gister to determine 1f the device requires a block of A24 or A32 addresses Figure 2 2 shows the address mapping concept A24 Address Space FFFFFF 00000 C00000 800000 520000 500000 400000 200000 000000 HP E1406A 2 Mbytes RAM RAM Module Accessed at These Addresses 2 Mbytes Non RAM Module Accessed at These Addresses 1 Mbyte HP E1406A 256 Kbytes size 131072 Accessed at These Addresses 1 Mbyte Accessed at These Addresses 2 Mbytes RAM 2 Mbytes Module ROM HP E1406A Non RAM Module E1406A F2 2 Figure 2 2 A24 A32 Address Mapping Concept A24 A32 Address Allocation The resource manager allocates A24 and A32 addresses as follows e The top and bottom 2 MB of A24 addresses are used by the command module for its own RAM and ROM e VXIbus modules are allocated addresses from the bottom of the address space up e The order of address allocation is based on the number of addresses required memory size and the logical address Modules with the largest amount of memory are allocated addresses first Modules with the same amount of memory are allocated addresses beginning with the lowest logical address e The top 2 MB of A24 addresses used internally by the command module RAM can be allocated However the command module cannot access those addresses on the ot
217. gisters 108 byte group 106 107 byte query register 222 byte reading 107 111 byte register 108 162 165 byte summary bit 107 enable register command 217 enable register query 218 event register query 218 group description of 104 group required 106 registers enable query 221 registers model of 104 registers programming 104 system programming 104 system programming examples 111 117 STATus Subsystem STATus OPERation CONDition 161 STATus OPERation ENABle 162 STATus OPERation ENABle 162 STATus OPERation EVENt 163 STATus OPERation NTRansition 163 STATus OPERation PTRansition 164 STATus PRESet 164 STATus QUEStionable CONDition 164 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 165 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 165 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 165 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 166 STATus QUEstionable PTRansition 166 function keys 72 77 logical address 72 menu keys 72 75 76 menu levels and content 91 modules 238 monitor mode 75 76 non SCPI commands 239 reading error messages 76 selecting 72 Syntax variable command 121 Sysfail Inhibit Bit 206 SYSFAIL Line 60 System configuration sequence 21 operation starting 60 query number of devices 201 status and triggering 101 118 System Instrument calendar query setting 181 calendar setting 181 clock setting 182 commands 246 247 confirmed SCPI commands 246 description of 119 error messages 249 menu keys 64 65
218. gures the System instrument to request service from the external computer whenever power is cycled Status Byte Register and Standard Event Status Register bits remain enabled unmasked after cycling power 10 OUTPUT 70900 PSC 0 Enable bit 5 Standard Event Status Register Summary bit in the Status Byte Register 20 OUTPUT 70900 SRE 32 Enable bit 7 Power on bit in the Standard Event Status Register to be reflected as bit 5 in the Status Byte Register 30 OUTPUT 70900 ESE 128 PSC Power on Status Clear Query returns a response indicating whether an instrument s Status Byte Register and Standard Event Status Register bits remain enabled or become disabled at power on A 1 means the bits are disabled at power on a 0 means the bits remain enabled at power on 220 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 RMC lt name_string gt Example RST SRE lt mask gt Example SRE Example Remove Individual Macro Command purges an individual macro identified by the name_string parameter OUTPUT 70900 RMC LIST Remove macro command from DMC example Reset Resets an instrument as follows Sets the instrument to a known state usually the power on state Aborts all pending operations Disables the OPC and OPC modes RST does not affect The state of the HP IB interface The HP IB address The output queue The Service Request Enable Register The Standard Event Status En
219. hange Set Interface to Send XON When Input Buffer Contains 10 Characters SYST COMM SERO PACE PROT XON SYST COMM SERO PACE THR STAR 10 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE THReshold STARt MIN MAX returns The current start threshold if no parameter is sent The maximum allowable setting if MAX is sent The minimum allowable setting if MIN is sent To determine the size of the input buffer of the serial interface you are using send SYST COMM SER n PACE THR STARt MAX The returned value will be the buffer size less one Return Current Start Threshold SYST COMM SERO PACE THR STAR Query for threshold value enter statement Statement enters a numeric value 174 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE THReshold STOP Parameters Comments Example COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE THReshold STOP Comments Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PACE THReshold STOP lt char_count gt configures the input buffer level at which the specified interface may send the XOFF character ASCII 1316 de assert the DTR line and or de assert the RTS line Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt char_count gt numeric 1 through 99 for built in none 1 through 8191 for HP E1324A To determine the size of the input buffer of the serial interface you are using send SYST COMM SER n PACE THR
220. he word bits 7 4 The fourth data byte received contains the least significant nibble of the least significant byte of the word to be written bits 3 0 Once all four bytes have been received the word will be written Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 159 SELected DEFine CHECked Comments SELected DEFine Comments SELected DELete Comments CAUTION PROGram SELected DEFine CHECked reads data from Flash ROM over an RS 232 line e This command returns a definite length arbitrary block of data in the same format used to send data over RS 232 PROGram SELected DEFine reads data from the Flash ROM e This command returns the operating system program loaded in Flash ROM as a definite length arbitrary block PROGram SELected DELete erases the entire contents of the Flash ROM e This command returns an error if executed from the System instrument This command will remove the HP E1406A operating system and should NEVER be used unless you are updating the operating system Do not use this command when addressing instruments other than the command module as the results may be undetermined and may cause the instrument to fail 160 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 STATus The STATus subsystem commands access the Condition Event and Enable Registers in the Operation Status Group and the Questionable Data Group Subsystem Syntax STATus OPERation CONDition ENABle lt event gt
221. her device e An address allocation table can be used to reserve blocks of A24 A32 addresses for VMEbus devices This table is also used to assign addresses other than the default addresses assigned by the resource manager 44 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 e A24 address space is 16 MB and A32 address space is 4 GB The command module does not have A32 address lines and cannot access A32 address space However it will allocate A32 address space for devices which can access 1t A32 memory allocation is similar to A24 memory allocation e A32 address space is 0000000016 through FFFFFFFF16 Allocating Address The resource manager command module has no way to determine when Space for VMEbus VMEbus devices have been installed in the system As a result the Devices resource manager allocates addresses to VXIbus A24 A32 devices rather than to VMEbus devices There are two ways to prevent addresses intended for a VMEbus device from being assigned to VXIbus devices The first method is described below The second method uses an address allocation table to reserve a block of addresses The table used for this is described in the section Reserving A24 A32 Address Space beginning on page 48 Allocating Address Space for VMEbus Devices Method 1 1 Configure and install all modules except VMEbus devices in the HP 75000 Series C Mainframe This process is described in the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Gui
222. ice lt cmdr_laddr gt I COMmander RDEVice lt logical_addr gt RHANdlers RHLine lt hand_id gt RILine lt int_id gt RINTerrupter RMODid RPERror RPRotocol RSARea RSTB SLModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 127 SLOCk SUModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 63 TRIGger MESSage RECeive lt count terminator gt SEND lt msg_string gt END NEN QUERy AHLine lt hand_id gt lt line_number gt AlLine lt int_id gt lt line_number gt AMControl lt response_mask gt ANO ANY lt cmd_word gt BNO lt top_level gt BREQuest CEVent lt enable gt lt event_number gt CRESponse lt response_mask gt ENO RDEVice lt logical_addr gt RHANdlers RHLine lt hand_id gt RILine lt int_id gt RINTerrupter RMODid RPERror Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 185 RPRotocol RSARea RSTB SLModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 127 SUModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 63 RESPonse CONFigure CTABle vxI CONFigure CTABle lt address gt links a user defined commander servant hierarchy table to the command module resource manager processor The command module must be the acting resource manager in order for the table to be implemented Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric DIAG NRAM ADDR none Comments e Be certain that address specifies the starting address of the area in
223. ices will be assigned the lowest available addresses within the allowable range for that VMEbus 28 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 A16 A24 A32 The following rules and recommendations apply to assigning A16 A24 A32 Address Window logical addresses Refer to the HP E1482B VXI MXI Bus Extender User s Conti gur ation Manual for a more detailed discussion of how to assign logical addresses e Systems with multiple VMEbus devices should be configured so that the VMEbus devices in mainframes whose remote extenders have the highest logical addresses should also have the highest logical addresses e VMEbus devices should be configured to have the lowest addresses on their particular VMEbus Default A16 A24 A32 The resource manager will not attempt to perform any A16 address window Address Window configuration as a default It will attempt to configure A24 and A32 Assig nments memory according to the following rules e A memory page is 1256 of the total memory space The minimum size of an A24 or A32 memory window is 2 pages and the maximum size of the window is 256 pages as defined in VXI 6 Specifications For A24 memory a single page is 65 536 bytes and the minimum window size is 131 072 bytes For A32 memory a single page is 16 777 216 bytes and the minimum window is 33 554 432 bytes The base address of a memory window must be zero or an even multiple of the size of the window e The window for a local extender will b
224. ified in decimal hex H octal HQ or binary B format e This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use the VXI REG WRIT command Accesses are 16 bit non privileged data accesses e Related Commands VXI READ VXI REGister WRITe Example Write a Value into a Device s Device Dependent Register VXI WRIT 8 24 H4200 Write hex 4200 16 896 decimal to register 24 of device at logical address 8 212 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 WSProtocol VXI WSProtocol COMMand command is a series of commands which sends COMMand command _ the specified Word Serial Command to the address set using the VXI SELect command and continues without waiting for a response The response to this command can be read with the VXI WSProtocol RESPonse command The following table lists the available commands and their parameters if any command parameter parameter2 Description AHLine lt hand_id gt 1 7 lt line_ gt 0 7 Assign Handler Line A line number of 0 means the handler is to be disconnected AlLine lt int_id gt 1 7 lt line_ gt 0 7 Assign Interrupter Line A line number of 0 means the handler is to be disconnected AMControl lt rspns_mask gt 0 15 Asynchronous Mode Control ANO Abort Normal Operation ANY lt cmd_word gt Specify any word serial command as a 32768 32767 16 bit value in cmd_word BAVailable lt end_bit gt l
225. igger source Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 155 TTLTrg lt n gt STATe OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt controls whether the System instrument may drive the specified trigger line Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric 0 through 7 N A lt mode gt boolean 0 1 OFF ON none Comments e OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe must be ON in order to specify a trigger source issue a pulse or set a trigger level e OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe must be ON for the source to drive the trigger line Setting STATe OFF does not change the source so the signal driving the line is still present Setting STATe back ON sets the source to NONE and de asserts the line e Related Commands OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt SOURCce OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate e RST Condition OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe 0 Example Enable the TTLTrg1 Trigger Line OUTP TTLT1 STAT ON TTLTrg lt n gt STATe OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe returns the current state ON or OF F of the selected trigger line Comments e TTLTrg lt n gt represents TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 Example Query the State of TTLTrg1 OUTP TTLT1 STAT enter statement Return the current state 156 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 PROGram The PROGram subsystem allows you to write an operating system into the command module Flash ROM to read data from the Flash ROM or to delete the c
226. ign logical addresses to Address Assignments dynamically configured devices according to the following rules e The window for a local extender will be set outward to the minimum possible size to include all of the logical addresses found on all of its descendant busses This includes all stand alone devices and all remote extenders that are descendants of the local extender Note The window for a local extender may or may not include the logical address of the local extender itself e The window for a remote extender will be set inward to the minimum possible size to include all of the devices on its VMEbus and all of its descendants Note The window for a remote extender may or may not include the logical address of the remote extender itself e A dynamically configured device will be assigned a logical address as follows Dynamically configured devices on a given VMEbus will be assigned logical addresses after all descendant busses of that VMEbus have been configured Dynamically configured devices on a given VMEbus will be assigned addresses in the range defined by the statically configured device with the lowest logical address on that VMEbus and the maximum allowable logical address for that VMEbus Each dynamically configured device will be assigned an address that is a multiple of 8 within the allowable range for that VMEbus until all of these addresses have been used Any additional dynamically configured dev
227. iguration table in any convenient format as long as the binary data is preserved This can be accomplished using DIAGnostic PEEK and DIAGnostic POKE by reading the data into a variable in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the Arbitrary Block Program Data format and so forth In the following example this is accomplished by reading the data into 16 bit integer variables in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the ANSI IEEE 488 2 1987 Arbitrary Block Program Data format More information on the Arbitrary Block Program format can be found on page 121 of this manual and in the ANSVIEEE 488 2 1987 document CAUTION When downloading data into the dynamic configuration table DIAGnostic DOWNload does not determine if the table is large enough to store the data If the amount of data sent by DIAGnostic DOWNload is greater than the table space allocated by DIAGnostic NRAM CREate system errors will occur You can recover from these errors by executing DIAGnostic BOOT COLD or by pressing the Ctrl R keys on an RS 232 terminal while cycling mainframe power 24 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 Example Dynamically Configuring a Module The following program dynamically sets the logical address of the HP E1412A 61 Digit Multimeter in slot 6 to 32 The program notes each of the steps used to create and load the table To dynamically configure the multimeter its logical addr
228. in the VXI subsystem If no logical address has been selected this query will return 1 SEND COMMand vxXI SEND COMMand lt logical_addr gt lt command gt lt data gt sends the specified word serial command and optional data to logical_addr Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt numeric Must round to 0 through 255 none The command field and any required data fields are specified in the table below lt command gt lt data gt Description BAVailable lt byte gt 0 511 Byte Available bit 8 1 END bits 7 0 data byte CLEar Clear CLOCk Clear Lock GDEVice lt device_laddr gt 0 255 Grant Device ICOMmander lt cmdr_laddr gt 0 255 Identify Commander SLOCk Set Lock TRIGger Trigger ANY lt cmd_word gt Specify any word serial command as a 16 bit value in cmd_word Read response from the Data Low Register using VXI QUERy Comments e lt data gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal HQ or binary B formats VXI SEND COMMand uses the Word Serial Transfer Protocol This protocol is described in the VXIbus System Specifications VXI SEND COMMand is recommended for use with devices conforming to VXIbus System Specifications revision 1 3 or later This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use VXI WSP COMM Related Commands VXI SEND
229. indow has incorrect base address or size User defined A16 memory window has incorrect base address or size User defined A24 memory window has incorrect base address or size User defined A32 memory window has incorrect base address or size The valid flag in the extender table is not set to 1 There are more than 254 records in the extender table There is an extender table TTL trigger entry for a device which does not support TTL triggers There is an extender table ECL trigger entry for a device which does not support ECL triggers A message based device was not in CONFIGURE state during reboot 254 HP E1406A Error Messages Appendix B Table B 2 Error Messages and Causes continued Error Messages and Causes Code Message Cause 2166 INTX card not installed The INTX daughter card on the VXI MXI module is not installed or is not functioning correctly 2167 Config warning Flash ROM The contents of the Flash ROM driver area have been corrupted driver contents lost 2201 Unexpected interrupt from A message based card interrupted when an interrupt service message based card routine has not been set up 2202 Unexpected interrupt from A register based card interrupted when an interrupt service non message based card routine had not been set up 2809 Interrupt line has not been set A DIAG INT ACT or DIAG INT RESP command was executed up before setting the interrupt with D
230. ing DIAGnostic BOOT COLD or by pressing the Ctrl R keys on an RS 232 terminal while cycling mainframe power The following example shows how an additional interrupt line is assigned to a programmable interrupt handler and reserved for a non programmable interrupter Figure 2 6 Top Level Commander Logical Address 0 HP E1406A Command Module Servant Area 1 255 Logical Address 64 Servant Pointer 32 Servant Area 65 96 Assigned VXI Interrupt Line 2 HP E1406A Command Module 2 Logical Address 80 Y HP E1411B Multimeter VXI Interrupt Jumper 3 Y Figure 2 6 Assigning an Additional Interrupt Line The program assumes that a VXIbus system contains an HP E1411B 5 Digit Multimeter that is a servant to a second HP E1406A Command Module at logical address 64 Since the command module is the only other commander and is a programmable interrupt handler it is assigned interrupt line 2 by the resource manager The HP E1411B however has its interrupt jumper set for line 3 For the multimeter to communicate with the command module the command module must also be assigned to handle interrupt line 3 Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 57 10 20 30 40 50 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 Comments Assign an I O path and allocate a variable to store
231. instrument reading storage space and full functionality of the display terminal interface e Related Commands DIAG RDISk ADDRess DIAG RDISk CREate Example Allocate a 64 Kbyte Segment for the IBASIC Options RAM Volume DIAG RDIS CRE 65536 RDISk CREate DIAGnostic RDISk CREate MIN MAX returns the current or allowable MIN MAX size of the RAM disc volume segment Comments e DIAG RDISk CREate does not allocate driver RAM until a subsequent reboot To get accurate results execute DIAG RDISk CREate after the reboot e Related Commands DIAG RDISk CREate DIAG RDISk ADDRess Example Return the Size of the Current RAM Disc Volume DIAG RDIS CRE enter statement Returns numeric size Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 145 UPLoad MADDress DIAGnostic UPLoad MADDress lt address gt lt byte_count gt returns the number of bytes specified by byte_count starting at address Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric 0 to 16 777 215 HRHFFFFFE none lt byte_count gt numeric 0 to 999 999 998 none lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats UPLoad is done by word 16 bit access so address and byte_count must be even Data is returned in the Definite Block Response Data format lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt Where the value of lt non ze
232. int_id gt lt line_number gt R Assigns an interrupter line to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response A line number of 0 means the handler is to be disconnected AMControl lt response_mask gt R Sends an Asynchronous Mode Control command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response ANO R Sends an Abort Normal Operation command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response ANY lt cmd_word gt R Sends cmd_word as a word serial command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for return value BNO lt top_level gt R Sends a Begin Normal Operation command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response BREQuest R Sends a Byte Request command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response CEVent lt enable gt lt event_number gt R Sends a Control Event command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response CRESponse lt response_mask gt R Sends a Control Response command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response ENO R Sends an End Normal Operation command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response RDEVice lt logical_addr gt R Sends a Release Device command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response RHANdlers R Sends a Read Handlers command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and wai
233. ion Appendix A Table A 4 Multimeter Non SCPI Commands CALibration LFRequency LFRequency STRain CONFigure STRain FBENding FBPoisson FPOisson HBENding HPOisson QCOMpression QTENsion QUARter UNSTrained DISPlay MONitor CHANnel CHANnel STATe STATe MEASure STRain FBENding FBPoisson FPOisson HBENding HPOisson QCOMpression QTENsion QUARter UNSTrained MEMory VME ADDRess ADDRess SIZE SIZE STATe STATe ROUTe FUNCtion SAMPle COUNt COUNt SOURce SOURce TlMer TlMer SENSe RESistance OCOMpensated OCOmpensated STRain GFACtor POISson UNSTrained SYSTem CDEScription Appendix A HP E1406A Specifications and General Information 241 Counter Commands The following tables apply to the HP E1332A 4 Channel Counter Totalizer and the HP E1333A 3 Channel Universal Counter Table A 5 HP E1332A SCPI 1994 0 Confirmed Commands ABORt READ CONFigure SENSe FREQuency FREQuency PERiod APERiture PWIDth APERture NWIDth FUNCtion FREQuency CONFigure PERiod FETCh STATus OPERation FORMat CONDition DATA ENABle ENABle INITiate EVENt IMMediate PREset QUEStionable INPut CONDition FiLTer ENABle LPASs ENABle STATe EVENt STATe FREQuency SYSTEM FREQuency ERRor VERSion MEAS
234. ion describes IEEE 488 1 defined messages and their affect on instruments installed in the mainframe The examples shown are specifically for HP 9000 Series 200 300 computers using BASIC language Although any IEEE 488 controller can send these messages the syntax may be different from that shown here DCL clears all instruments in the command module servant area SDC clears a specific instrument The purpose of DCL or SDC is to prepare one or more instruments to receive and execute commands usually RST DCL or SDC do the following to each instrument Clear the input buffer and output queue Reset the command parser Disable any operation that would prevent RST from being executed Disable the Operation Complete and Operation Complete Query modes DCL or SDC does not affect Any settings or stored data in the instrument except the Operation Complete and Operation Complete Query modes Front panel operation Any instrument operation in progress except as stated above The status byte except for clearing the Message Available bit as a result of clearing the output queue CLEAR 7 Clear all instruments CLEAR 70900 Clear the System instrument Places an instrument in local state e Refer to the Local Lockout message later in this chapter for information on how GTL affects front panel lockout Set HP IB remote enable line false all instruments go to local You must now execute REMOTE 7 to ret
235. ired function key for example to access the f6 function press CTRL f2 f6 Fl F2 F3 F4 f1 f5 f2 f6 f3 f5 f4 f8 7 8 9 not Delete Clear not used Char End used 4 5 6 Insert Delete Clear not Line Line Screen used 1 2 3 ENTER not Copy Page used Prt Up not used k P Print Page Doan Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 81 Using Other Terminals What Not Supported Means Testing Terminals for Compatibility This section discusses using terminals which are not on the Supported Terminals list Primarily this section is to help you use terminals which do not provide programmable soft keys function keys Without this capability a terminal cannot access the display terminal interfaces menus Instead the terminal interface provides a set of terminal interface commands which allow you to select instruments by name or logical address Once selected you can type common commands or SCPI commands to the instrument In addition keyboard accessible control codes provide display control for terminals which may not have keys dedicated to those functions Strictly speaking a terminal is not supported if it has not been rigorously tested with the display terminal interface There are several HP terminals which may be compatible with the terminal interface Terminals such as the DEC VT100 DEC VT220 and WYSE WY 50 or emulations of these may also work properly with the terminal interface If you have one o
236. ist MEAS TEMP TC K lt channel_list gt Measure C of K thermocouple on each channel E N14 channel list MEAS TEMP TC N14 lt channel_list gt Measure C of N14 thermocouple on each channel tL N28 channel list MEAS TEMP TC N28 lt channel_list gt Measure C of N28 thermocouple on each channel ER channel list MEAS TEMP TC R lt channel_list gt Measure C of R thermocouple on each channel ES channel list MEAS TEMP TC S lt channel_list gt Measure C of S thermocouple on each channel LT channel list MEAS TEMP TC T lt channel_list gt Measure C of T thermocouple on each channel H THERMIS 2252 channel list MEAS TEMP THER 2252 lt channel_list gt Measure C of 2252 Q thermistor on each channel 5K channel list MEAS TEMP THER 5000 lt channel_list gt Measure C of 5k Q thermistor on each channel 10K channel list MEAS TEMP THER 10000 lt channel_list gt Measure C of 10k Q thermistor on each channel RTD 385 channel list MEAS TEMP RTD 85 lt channel_list gt Measure C of 385 RTD on each channel 4 wire L 392 channel list MEAS TEMP RTD 92 lt channel_list gt Measure C of 392 RTD on each channel 4 wire STRAIN QUARTER channel list MEAS STR QUAR lt channel_list gt Measure strain with quarter bridge HALF BENDING channel list MEAS STR HBEN lt channel_list gt Measure strain with bending half bridge POISSON channel list MEAS STR HPO lt channel_list gt Measure str
237. ith 47 resource manager configuration without 46 routing ECL Trigger 207 routing interrupt line 207 routing TTL Trigger 208 Extender Table creating 31 data format 33 determining table size 33 downloading data into 33 downloading into memory 35 errors associated with 36 37 example of 34 linking command module processor 191 query starting address 191 table format 32 table record 32 user defined 31 191 EXTernal IMMediate 103 151 LEVel IMMediate 103 152 LEVel MMediate 152 SOURce 103 152 SOURce 103 153 STATe 153 STATe 153 External Trigger enabling configuration 153 pulse appearing 151 querying driving source 153 querying logic level 152 querying state 153 selecting driving source 152 setting logic level 152 Extraction Levers 18 F Faceplate annunciators 17 connectors 18 extraction levers 18 HP IB port 18 reset button 18 RS 232 port 18 run load switch 18 Flash ROM 157 creating driver area 137 erasing data from 160 installing drivers 135 query amount available 137 138 query number of drivers 137 reading data from 160 writing operating system into 157 writing operating system into over RS 232 line 158 159 Format binary data for RS 232 261 common commands 119 SCPI commands 119 FROM AVAilable 137 FROM CREate 137 FROM CREate 137 FROM SIZE 138 Function Keys instrument 64 switchbox 72 77 Functional Description 16
238. ither the commander does not exist or it is not a message based device ERROR 14 INVALID UDEF SECONDARY ADDRESS This error occurs when the user defined secondary address Sec Addr is invalid in the commander servant hierarchy table Valid secondary addresses are 1 1 30 The error also occurs if the device to which the secondary address is assigned is outside the servant area of the command module ERROR 15 DUPLICATE SECONDARY ADDRESS This error occurs when the same secondary address is specified for more than one module in the commander servant hierarchy table ERROR 18 INVALID COMMANDER LADD This error occurs when the commander specified in the user defined commander servant hierarchy table is not a valid message based commander or the device does not exist ERROR 37 INVALID UDEF CNFG TABLE This error occurs when the user defined commander servant hierarchy table is not true valid flag does not equal 1 ERROR 38 INVALID UDEF CNFG TABLE DATA This error occurs when there are O or greater than 254 entries in the user defined commander servant hierarchy table e The secondary HP IB addresses and or commanders assigned by the commander servant hierarchy table are used by the system until DIAGnostic BOOT COLD or VXI CONFigure CTABle 0 is executed Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 43 A24 A32 Address Mapping During the configuration sequence the resource manager reads each VXIbus device s ID Re
239. its interrupts If Number of Interrupters is 0 Intr Laddr is not specified Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 55 Determining the The interrupt line allocation table has a one word header and each data Table Size record contains three words plus one word for each programmable interrupter logical address specified The amount of RAM allocated with DIAGnostic NRAM CREate is specified in bytes Since one word is two bytes the amount of RAM to allocate is computed as N 2 6 N 2 YM 0 where 2 is the two byte header 6 is the number of bytes data record N is the number of data records for example interrupt lines and M is the number of programmable interrupters per data record For example to create a table for the following one interrupt handler two interrupt lines one interrupter on one line three interrupters on second line the table size would be 2 6 2 2 4 22 bytes 2 records 4 interrupters DIAGnostic NRAM CREate would be executed as OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 22 Note When assigning an additional interrupt line to an interrupt handler you must specify each line Otherwise the table will overwrite the line currently assigned giving the handler only one line For example if the resource manager assigns interrupt line 2 to a handler and you want to also assign line 3 to the handler lines 2 and 3 must be specified in the table See Example Assigning an Interrupt
240. k dee ee Ee et eeraa ERRER 195 CONFEWMeTTABET opa AAA A A 196 CONFIG LADDIE o a RA A ES EM e X 196 CONFigure LADDress MEXTender 2 e e we eS 196 CONFigure MEX Tender BCL ee EERE A Eek 197 CONFigure MEX Tender INTE ici RR ER RE 198 CONFigute MEX Tender TTL Gt se s o kk eh he Oe EO a 199 CONFewe MTAB 44005 S46 kk eS eA ARERR ER EEE GR EO 200 CONM aie MTAB yawns een he Cee Se SSeS RES ROE ER 201 CONFISmeNUNMBI o sad amp he eek EE RE e ES 201 CONFigure NUMBer MEXTender o o e 2s 201 QUERY Pie ERE AAA 201 REE acantilado 202 RECAE MESS soriano ea 203 REOR EEA 2 2 abs A CROSS GES 204 REGi ter WRITE s eor a ae cae Boe o A R eR a eek ca 205 RES s ce otk de bbe bh beeke PES ded Oo Gd OS ee Re heee e d 206 RESP A hee SS A Rw ek Be SOSA RIA RE ERS SES 206 ROUTER LTO cw ee ee Sk he ah ee Re oe Ge Se A 207 ROL eIN Tempers a0 be OME SDE ee eee oR A ES 207 ROUTE TILI gcc dh ARERR SOR A RE RE SE EES REO 208 A A ee Bee ny IA 208 SES ia ed Re River de gee ek bh dd de de deere 209 A A A ee RG Re OREO De RARER ES 4 209 SENDGCOMN and 24 68 be 2G ESEG EE ERE EH EES SSE SREHS 210 SEND MES ONCE iss do 5d dw em ee He oR EG OAS EE OH dS 211 a API IIA AE 212 WsProtocol COMMand command 0 464644 56 4s 4s be eR RR Ew 213 WSProtocol MESSage RECEIVE acca oa RA A BR 214 WSProtocol MES Sage SEND o i 44 ee bce Ree eRe Bw 214 WSProtocol QUERy command o 0 0 ee 213 Wa Protocol RESP OUR 4 aw Rog on AA A RR A e
241. l be asserted when the serial interface is ready to send output data Data will be sent if the connected device asserts DSR and CTS IBFull While the input buffer is not yet at the STOP threshold DTR is asserted When the input buffer reaches the STOP threshold DTR will be unasserted e DIAG BOOT COLD will set DTR to ON e Related Commands SYST COMM SER n CONT RTS SYST COMM SER n REC PACE THR STARt SYST COMM SER n REC PACE THR STOP e RST Condition No change Assert the DTR Line SYST COMM SERO CONT DTR ON SYSTem COMMunicate SERial m CONTrol DTR returns the current setting for DTR line control Check the Setting of DTR Control SYST COMM SERO CONT DTR enter statement Statement enters the string ON OFF STAN or IBF Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 169 COMMunicate SERial n CONT rol RTS Parameters Comments Example COMMunicate SERial n CONTrol RTS Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n CONTrol RTS lt rts_cntrl gt controls the behavior of the Request To Send output line RTS can be set to a static state ON OFF can operate as a modem control line STANdard or can be used as a hardware handshake line IBFull Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt rts_cntrl gt discrete ON OFF STAN IBF none e The following table defines each value of rts_cntrl
242. l gt R Send word serial command to device at logical_addr lt data2 gt and then wait for response from Data Low Register MESSage lt logical_addr gt lt msg_string gt R Send specified message string to the message based lt end_flag gt device at logical_adar WRITe lt logical_addr gt lt register_addr gt lt data gt R Write data to the device register at logical_adar WSProtocol COMMand AHLine lt hand_id gt lt line_number gt R Assigns a handler to the logical address set using VXI SEL A line number of 0 means the handler is to be disconnected Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 231 SCPI Commands Quick Reference Command Mode Description Mode R active in RUN mode L active in LOAD mode AlLine lt int_id gt lt line_number gt R Assigns an interrupter line to the logical address set using VXI SEL A line number of 0 means the handler is to be disconnected AMControl lt response_mask gt R Sends an Asynchronous Mode Control command to the logical address set using VXI SEL ANO R Sends an Abort Normal Operation command to the logical address set using VXI SEL ANY lt cmd_word gt R Sends cmd_word as a word serial command to the logical address set using VXI SEL BAVailable lt end_bit gt R Sends a Byte Available command to the logical address set using VXI SEL BNO lt top_level gt R Sends a Begin Normal Operation command to the logic
243. laddr QUERY laddr VXI QUER lt laddr gt Read Data Low register Continued on next page System Instrum ent Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 User Entry Command s Used Description Continued from previous page TIME READ SYST TIME Read the current system clock SET time SYST TIME lt time gt Set the system clock PA DATE 17 READ SYST DATE Read the current system calendar SET date SYST DATE lt date gt Set the system calendar _ RESET DIAG BOOT Resets mainframe using the configuration stored in non volatile memory Switchbox Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 User Entry Command s Used Description SWITCH MONITOR card number or AUTO DISP MON CARD lt card_number gt STAT ON Monitor instrument operations OPEN channel list OPEN channel_list Open channel s CLOSE channel list CLOS channel_list Close channel s SCAN SET_UP channel list TRIG SOUR HOLD SCAN lt channel_list gt INIT Set up channels to scan STEP channel list TRIG Step to next channel in scan list CARD TYPE card number SYST CTYP lt card_number gt Display module ID information DESCR card number SYST CDES lt card_number gt Display module description RESET card number SYST CPON lt card_number gt Return module to power on state T
244. latile RAM The command module s HP IB address logical address and servant area based on the switch settings are reported Command Module VMEbus timeout DISABLED The resource manager identifies the status of the command module VMEbus timeout This must be DISABLED for systems without VXlbus extenders HP E1406A Command Module HP IB switch 5 0 Searching for static devices in mainframe 0 SC device at ladd 0 in slot 0 SC device at ladd 8 in slot SC device in ladd 16 in slot 8 SC device at ladd 127 in slot 5 VXlbus extender Searching for static devices on interconnect bus 127 SC device at ladd 128 in slot O VXlbus extender Searching for static devices in mainframe 128 SC device at ladd 144 in slot 7 Searching for dynamic devices in mainframe 128 DC device in slot 3 moved to ladd 136 block size 1 VXIbus extender 128 Ladd window range 128 to 159 INWARD VXIbus extender 127 Ladd window range 128 to 159 OUTWARD Searching for dynamic devices in mainframe 0 DC device in slot 3 moved to ladd 24 block size 1 The resource manager identifies all statically configured modules and then locates and configures all dynamically configurable modules Searching for pseudo devices Pseudo devices are instruments such as IBASIC Configuring Commander Servant hierarchy ladd 0 cmar ladd 1 ladd 8 cmar ladd 0 ladd 16 cmdr ladd 0 ladd 24 cmdr ladd 0 ladd 136 cmdr ladd 0 ladd 144
245. le Send a Message to a Message Based Device at Logical Address 16 VXI SEND 16 MEAS VOLT DC Send command to message based multimeter last by is sent with END bit set VXI REC 16 Retrieve voltage measurement WRITe vxi WRiTe lt logical_addr gt lt register_addr gt lt data gt allows access to the entire 64 byte A16 register address space for the device specified by logical_addr Since the VXIbus system is byte addressed while the registers are 16 bits wide registers are specified by even addresses only This method of identifying registers follows the VXIbus standard format Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt decimal numeric Must round to O through 255 none lt register_addr gt numeric Must round to an even value none from 0 through 62 3En lt data gt numeric Must round to 32768 to 32767 none 0 to FFFFh Comments e Specifying an odd register address will cause Error 2003 Invalid word address Specifying a logical address not currently in use in the system will cause Error 2005 No card at logical address e If the command module is the resource manager it can write to any device within the mainframe If the command module is not the resource manager it can only write to those devices within its servant area lt logical_addr gt must be specified in decimal lt register_addr gt and lt data gt may be spec
246. les should be configured accordingly O zero will cause an error message Error 41 Valid Flag is part of the table header and is represented by the upper eight bits of the header word Number of Records 1 7 is the number of data records in the table A data record is required for each interrupt line assigned Number of Records is part of the table header and is represented by the lower eight bits of the header word Intr Line 1 7 is the interrupt line to be assigned to the programmable interrupt handler or interrupter or the line reserved for a non programmable interrupter handler or VMEbus device Field is one word Handler Laddr is the logical address of the programmable handler which will handle interrupts on the line specified by Intr Line If 1 is specified the line is reserved and no handler is assigned The field is one word Number of Interrupters is the number of programmable interrupters on the interrupt line specified by Intr Line If 0 is specified there are no programmable interrupters This reserves the line for a non programmable interrupter The field is one word Intr Laddr is the logical address of the programmable interrupter on the interrupt line specified The logical address of each programmable interrupter on the line must be specified Programmable interrupters can be assigned to interrupt lines with no handler This allows a programmable interrupter to have a non programmable interrupt handler handle
247. ls them by creating the driver index table You cannot download any additional drivers into Flash ROM after you have executed this command To download any new drivers you must recreate the Flash ROM driver area with the DIAG FROM CREate command This will erase any drivers you have already downloaded which will then have to be reloaded Related Commands DIAG FROM CREate DIAGnostic DRIVer LIST type lists all drivers from the specified table found on the system If no parameter is specified all driver tables are searched and the data from each driver table is separated from the others by a semicolon Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units type discrete ALL RAM ROM FROM ALL For each driver listed the system returns NAME IDN_MODEL REV_CODE and TABLE Parameter Description NAME The instrument name This is the same label that appears on the instrument selection menu IDN_MODEL The model name This is the same model name as used in the response to the IDN command REV_CODE The revision code It is in the form A nn nn A is an alpha character TABLE The name of the table the driver was found in This will be RAM ROM or FROM DIAGnostic DRIVer LIST lists all drivers found in the system DIAGnostic DRIVer LIST FROM lists all drivers found in the Flash ROM driver table DIAGnostic DRIVer LIST RAM lists
248. lt Name Type Range of Values Units lt driver_block gt arbitrary block See Parameter Types none program data on page 121 e lt driver_block gt is the actual binary driver data to be transferred e This is the only way to download a device driver over a serial RS 232 line e Related Commands DIAG DRAM AVAilable DIAG DRAM CREate DIAG DRIVer LIST Download a Driver Named Over RS 232 DIAG DRIV LOAD CHEC lt checked_driver_block gt Downloads the lt checked_driver_block gt to DRAM memory or Flash ROM 136 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 FROM AVAilable Comments Example FROM CREate Parameters Comments Example FROM CREate Comments Example DIAGnostic FROM AVAilable returns the amount of Flash ROM remaining to hold new device drivers This is the amount of Flash ROM in the segment minus any previously loaded drivers and overhead e DIAG FROM AVAilable returns zero if you have not created a valid flash driver area using DIAG FROM CREate while the system is in LOAD mode e Related Commands DIAG FROM CREate LOAD mode command only DIAG FROM SIZE DIAG DRIVer LOAD DIAG DRIVer LIST ALL Determine Amount of Space Left for Drivers in the Flash ROM Segment DIAG FROM AVA enter statement Statement returns available Flash ROM in bytes DIAGnostic FROM CREate lt num_drivers gt creates a driver area in Flash ROM for loading instrument drivers DIAGnostic FROM
249. lt byte_count gt SADDress lt address gt lt byte_count gt BOOT COLD DIAGnostic BOOT COLD causes the System instrument to restart reboot Configurations stored in non volatile memory and RS 232 configurations are reset to their default states e DRAM NRAM and RDISk memory segments are cleared e Serial Interface parameters for the internal serial interface and for any plug in serial cards HP E1324A that are in the command module s servant area are set to BAUD 9600 BITS8 PARity NONE SBITs 1 DTRON RTS ON PACE XON e Serial 0 Owner system Note Resetting the serial interface parameters takes about 0 01 seconds for the built in serial port and 0 75 seconds per serial plug in card While this is taking place the System instrument will still respond to serial polls If you are using a serial poll to determine when the cold boot cycle is complete you should insert a delay of 1 second per plug in serial card HP E1324A before polling the System instrument This will prevent incorrectly determining that the System instrument has completed its boot cycle Comments e The System instrument goes through its power up self tests e Related Commands DIAG BOOT WARM Example Reboot the System Instrument cold DIAG BOOT COLD Force boot 124 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 BOOT WARM Comments Example COMMunicate SERial 0 OWNer Parameters Comments Example DIAGnostic BOO
250. lt n gt SOURce queries the source currently driving the selected trigger line e ECLTrg lt n gt represents either ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 e Querying the source with STATe OFF returns NONE regardless of the actual source setting Determine the Source Driving ECLTrg1 OUTP ECLT1 SOUR enter statement Return trigger source 150 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 ECLTrg lt n gt STATe Parameters Comments Example ECLTrg lt n gt STATe Comments Example EXTernal MMediate Comments Example OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt enables configuration for example source and level of the specified trigger line Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric Oori N A lt mode gt boolean 0 1 OFF ON none e When a trigger line is asserted OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel 1 it remains asserted when STATe OFF is set Setting STATe ON again de asserts the line by setting the source to NONE e Related Commands OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce e RST Condition OUTP ECLTrg lt n gt STATe 0 Enable the ECLTrg1 Trigger Bus OUTP ECLT1 STAT ON OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe returns the current state ON or OFF of the selected trigger line e ECLTrg lt n gt represents either ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 Query the State of ECLTrg1 OUTP ECLT1 STAT enter statement Return the current state OUTPu
251. ltimeter configuration error Command execution cannot continue since the mainframe s command input and data output buffers are full Clearing the instrument restores control There is not enough available Flash ROM to create a FROM driver area Event In signal already allocated to another instrument such as a Switchbox A value less than 0 or greater than 255 was specified for logical address An odd address was specified for a 16 bit read or write Always use even addresses for 16 bit word accesses A non existent logical address was specified with the VXI READ or VXI WRITE command An error has occurred in a word serial protocol command The program block sent had an improper size A RAM Disc volume was removed after successful programming of the Flash ROMs An attempt was made to install drivers before the DIAG DRIV INST command was executed An attempt was made to install drivers after the DIAG DRIV INST command had already been executed VXI device failed its self test Device type can not be combined into an instrument such as a scanning voltmeter or a switchbox ID of device does not match list of drivers available Warning only More A24 memory installed in the mainframe than can be configured into the available A24 memory space A24 memory device overlaps memory space reserved by the mainframe s operating system Too many instruments installed for the amount of RAM installed in the mainframe C
252. mainframe extender devices do not support directing interrupt lines This command will determine whether the specified interrupt line is supported while it attempts to execute the command and return a trigger not supported error if it encounters any extenders that do not support the specified line It will attempt to direct all extenders that do support the specified line even if it encounters some extenders that do not This command can only be executed by the System instrument in a command module that is serving as resource manager for the entire VXIbus system Related Commands VXI SELect VXI ROUTe TTLTrg lt n gt VXI ROUTe ECLTrg lt n gt VXI CONFigure MEXTender Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 207 ROUTe TTLTrg lt N gt VXI ROUTe TTLTrg lt n gt configures the routing of the TTL trigger line specified by lt n gt for all mainframe extenders in the system Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric 0 through 7 none Comments e The routing is set so the device selected by the VXI SELect command can source the trigger line and all other devices in the system may monitor that trigger line Some mainframe extender devices do not support some trigger lines This command will determine whether the specified trigger line is supported while it attempts to execute the command and return a trigger not supported error if it encounters any extenders that do not
253. make sense for the device you are using e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI REGister WRITe 204 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Example REGister WRITe Parameters Comments Note Example Read from a Register on the Currently Selected Device VXI READ ICON Read from the Interrupt Control Register of the currently selected device VXI REGister WRITe lt register gt lt data gt writes data to the specified 16 bit register at the selected logical address see VXI SELect Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt register gt numeric Even numbers from 0 to 62 or none register name see below lt data gt numeric 32768 to 32767 none e The register parameter can be all even numbers from 0 to 62 inclusive as a numeric value or the following optional words A16 Window A16 Window Map Register 12 A24 Window A24 Window Map Register 14 A32 Window A32 Window Map Register 16 CONTrol Control Register 4 DEXTended Data Extended Register 10 DHIGh Data High Register 12 DLOW Data Low Register 14 ETConfigure ECL Trigger Configuration Register 22 ICNF Interrupt Configuration Register 18 ICONtrol Interrupt Control Register 28 LAWindow Logical Address Configuration Register 10 MODid MODID Register 8 LADDress Logical Address Register 0 OFFSet Offset Register 6 SIGNal Signal Register 8 TTConfigure TTL Trigger
254. mander VXI SYSFAIL Line One of the signals on the VXI backplane is SYSFAIL This signal is intended to indicate that some VXI module in the system has failed During power on or rebooting the HP E1406A VXI modules may briefly generate the SYSFAIL signal VXI modules that fail to operate may continue to generate SYSFAIL after the power on period as an indication of the failure Similarly modules that fail during operation of the system may also generate SYSFAIL when the failure occurs If the HP E1406A Command Module detects the SYSFAIL after the power on period it will automatically reboot When this occurs the command module will not enable communication with any of the VXI modules in the system This is because the HP E1406A cannot determine which VXI module has failed Also if IBASIC is installed it will be disabled Only the System instrument will be enabled This behavior is intended to guarantee that you will recognize that a failure has occurred If this situation occurs the SYSTem ERRor query will return the Error 2129 Warning Sysfail detected To restore normal operation of the HP E1406A Command Module you must determine which VXI module has failed and remove it from the system After removing the failed module and cycling power on your VXI mainframe your HP E1406A Command Module will work normally 60 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface
255. manual for a definition of this register ECL Triggers may not be supported by all mainframe extender cards int16 is a 16 bit integer or two bytes 32 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 Determining the The user defined extender table has a one word header and each of the Table Size 12 fields is also one word The amount of RAM allocated with DIAGnostic NRAM CREate is specified in bytes Since one word is two bytes the amount of RAM to allocate is computed as 2 24 N where N is the number of modules to be configured For example to provide information for three extender devices the table size would be 2 24 3 74 bytes DIAGnostic NRAM CREate would be executed as OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 74 Data Format Data can be sent to the extender table in any convenient format as long as the binary data is preserved This can be accomplished using DIAGnostic PEEK and DIAGnostic POKE by reading the data into a variable in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the Arbitrary Block Program Data format and so forth In the following example this is accomplished by reading the data into 16 bit integer variables in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the ANSVIEEE 488 2 1987 Arbitrary Block Program Data format More information on the Arbitrary Block Program format can be found on page 121 of this manual and in the ANSVIEEE 488 2 1987 document The table header is s
256. menu levels and content 88 non SCPI commands 247 time query setting 183 SYSTem Subsystem SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 168 SYST COMM SER CONT DTR 169 SYST COMM SER CONT DTR 169 SYST COMM SER CONT RTS 170 SYST COMM SER CONT RTS 170 SYST COMM SER REC BAUD 171 STB 107 108 111 112 114 222 Stop Bits 178 179 Subsystems DIAGnostic 123 147 example of 119 OUTPut 148 156 PROGram 157 160 STATus 161 166 SYSTem 167 183 VXI 184 215 Summary Bits 105 sending to status byte register 162 165 SYST COMM SER REC BAUD 171 SYST COMM SER REC BITS 172 SYST COMM SER REC BITS 172 SYST COMM SER REC PACE PROT 173 SYST COMM SER REC PACE PROT 173 SYST COMM SER REC PACE THR STAR 174 SYST COMM SER REC PACE THR STAR 174 SYST COMM SER REC PACE THR STOP 175 SYST COMM SER REC PACE THR STOP 175 SYST COMM SER REC PAR 176 SYST COMM SER REC PAR CHEC 177 SYST COMM SER REC PAR CHEC 178 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index 279 SYST COMM SER REC PAR 177 SYST COMM SER REC SBIT 178 SYST COMM SER REC SBIT 179 SYST COMM SER TRAN AUTO 179 SYST COMM SER TRAN AUTO 179 SYST COMM SER TRAN PACE PROT 180 SYST COMM SER TRAN PACE PROT 180 SYST DATE 181 SYST DATE 181 SYST ERR 182 249 255 SYST TIME 182 SYST TIME 183 SYST VERS 183 T Tables A24 A32 address allocation 48 50 A24 A32 address allocation table linking command module process
257. mmand module from the mainframe reverse the procedure Figure 1 3 Installing the Command Module in a VXIbus Mainframe Chapter 1 HP E1406A Command Module Overview 19 Command Module Memory Battery Backed Functions The HP E1406A comes from the factory equipped with 512 KB of RAM and 1 25 MB of Flash ROM HP E1406A Option 010 provides 1 75 MB of Flash ROM and 1 MB of RAM For applications which do not require shared RAM the non volatile RAM can be configured to a full 2 MB if the extra 512 KB of RAM and 512 KB of Flash ROM has been installed The HP E1406A clock and calendar functions the user non volatile RAM NRAM and the device driver RAM DRAM are backed up by a NiCad battery For systems with 512 KB of memory this battery has a ten month lifetime and is fully recharged when the command module is in the mainframe and the power has been on for fifteen continuous hours This battery has a five month lifetime for systems with 1 MB of RAM and 2 5 month lifetime for systems with 2 MB of RAM 20 HP E1406A Command Module Overview Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module About This Chapter One purpose of the HP E1406A is to provide the resource manager function required by VXIbus systems This chapter describes the resource manager s function and shows you how to modify the configuration process with user tables you download into non volatile user RAM All of these functions require
258. months for modules with 2 Mbyte of non volatile RAM following a 15 hour battery charge Appendix A HP E1406A Specifications and General Information 237 Power Requirements Dynamic DC Volts DC Current Current 5 3 2A 0 324 12V 0 01A 0 01A 12V 0 01A 0 01A 5 2V 0 4A 0 04A 2V 0 01A 0 01A 24 V 0 03A 0 003A Cooling For 10 C rise 1 5 liters second 0 4mm H20 Requirements SCPI Conformance Information The HP E1406A conforms to SCPI 1994 0 The following tables list all the SCPI confirmed and non SCPI commands that the HP E1406A can execute Individual commands may not execute without having the proper plug in module installed in the mainframe Each plug in module manual describes the commands that apply to that module Switchbox Configuration The following plug in modules can be configured as switchbox modules Refer to the individual plug in User s Manual for configuration information HP E1345A HP E1353A HP E1366A HP E1346A HP E1357A HP E1367A HP E1347A HP E1358A HP E1368A HP E1351A HP E1361A HP E1369A HP E1352A HP E1364A HP E1370A 238 HP E1406A Specifications and General Information Appendix A Table A 1 Switchbox SCPI 1994 0 Confirmed Commands ABORt STATUS OPERation ARM CONDition COUNt ENABle ENABle INITiate EVENt CONTinuous PRESet IMMediate QUEStionable CONDition OUTPut ENABle ECLTrg lt n gt ENABle
259. mple Set the System Time SYST TIME 14 30 20 Set 2 30 20 PM 182 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 TIME Example VERSion Comments Example SYSTem TIME MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN returns When no parameter is sent the current system time is in the form HH MM SS where HH can be 0 through 23 hours MM can be 0 through 59 minutes and SS can be 0 through 60 seconds When parameters are sent the minimum or maximum allowable values for each of the three parameters are returned The parameter count must be three Query the System Time SYST TIME Ask for current time input values of hour min sec Read back time SYSTem VERSion returns the SCPI version for which this instrument complies e The returned information is in the format YY YY R where Y YY Y is the year and R is the revision number within that year e Related Commands IDN Determine Compliance Version for this Instrument SYST VERS enter statement Statement enters 1990 0 Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 183 VXI The VXI command subsystem provides for Determining the number type and logical address of the devices instruments installed in the C size mainframe Direct access to VXIbus A16 registers within devices installed in the mainframe Sending commands using the word serial protocol Access to message based devices from an RS 232 terminal Subsystem Syntax VXI CONFigure CT
260. msg_string gt lt end_flag gt sends the specified message string to the message based module at logical_addr Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt decimal numeric Must round to 0 through 255 none lt msg_string gt string ASCII characters no nulls none lt end_flag gt discrete END NOENd none Comments e VXI REC together with VXI SEND can be used to communicate with message based devices from an RS 232 monitor via the command module If the command module is the resource manager the message based devices can be inside or outside its servant area If the command module is not the resource manager the message based devices must be in the command module s servant area VXI SEND uses the Byte Transfer Protocol which uses the DIR and DOR bits in the Response register This protocol and DIR DOR are described in the VXIbus System Specifications The last byte of msg_string is sent with the END bit set unless end_flag is specified as NOENd If CR or CRLF is to be sent they must be included in msg_string Null characters ASCII value 0 must not occur in msg_string This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use VXI WSP MESS SEND Related Commands VXI RECeive MESSage VXI WSProtocol MESSage SEND VXI WSProtocol MESSage RECeive Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 211 Examp
261. n the user defined interrupt line allocation table for the interrupter Intr Laddr is a device that is not a valid interrupter ERROR 41 INVALID UDEF INTR TABLE This error occurs when the user defined interrupt line allocation table is not true valid flag does not equal 1 ERROR 42 INVALID UDEF INTR TABLE DATA This error occurs when the user defined interrupt line allocation table has invalid data the number of records and or the interrupt line specified is less than 1 or greater than 7 or there is an invalid interrupt handler and or interrupter logical address valid addresses are 0 to 255 e The interrupts assigned by the interrupt line allocation table are used by the system until DIAGnostic BOOT COLD or VXI CONFigure ITABle 0 is executed Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 59 Starting System Operation The resource manager completes the configuration sequence by issuing the Begin Normal Operation BNO command to all top level commanders and to each of its direct message based servants BNO is not sent to register based modules The module receiving BNO responds by writing its status to the Data Low Register which is read by the resource manager More information on BNO and on the Data Low Register can be found in the VXIbus System Specification If the command module is in a system where it is not the resource manager it sends BNO to each of its message based servants once it receives BNO from its com
262. n4 n5 n6 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 s1 s2 s3 s4 Where the fields above are defined as n fields Indicate numeric data response fields c fields Indicate character data response fields s fields Indicate string data response fields n1 Device s Logical Address A number from 0 to 255 n2 Commander s Logical Address A number from 1 to 255 1 means this device has no commander n3 Manufacturer s ID A number from 0 to 4095 n4 Model Code A number from 0 to 65535 chosen by the manufacturer to signify the model of this device n5 Slot Number A number between 1 and the number of slots in this mainframe 1 indicates that the slot associated with this device is unknown This is always 1 for B size mainframes n6 Slot 0 Logical Address A number from 0 to 255 c1 Device Class 3 data characters EXT HYB MEM MSG REG VME EXT Extended device HYB Hybrid device e g IBASIC MEM Memory device MSG Message based device REG Register based device VME VME device c2 Memory Space Up to 4 data characters A16 A24 A32 NONE RES A16 A16 addressing mode A24 A24 addressing mode A32 A32 addressing mode NONE no addressing mode RES reserved c3 Memory Offset 10 data characters which define the base address of the A24 or A32 address space on the device This value is expressed in hex format first two characters are H c4 Memory Size 10 data characters which define the size of the A24 or A32 address space in
263. naccessible A32 memory Invalid UDEF memory block UDEF memory block unavailable Invalid UDEF address space Too many instruments installed for the amount of RAM installed in the mainframe Cannot configure instruments Only the system instrument is started A device s logical address is not a multiple of 8 and the device is not part of a combined instrument The commander assigned to a device by a user defined Configuration Table does not assign it a secondary address A secondary address assigned by a user configuration table is illegal A secondary address specified by a user configuration table is used more than once The logical address plus servant area of a commander is greater than 255 or greater than that of a superior commander within this tree A command module is in slot O but slot O switches are in the disabled position A device does not have a valid commander Sending a BEGIN Normal Operation command to a device failed A message based device failed to become write ready A message based device failed to become read ready The ERR bit is asserted in a device s response register Sending an End Normal Operation command to a device failed No line is available for a programmable interrupt handler All lines are used or duplicate The user defined interrupt table specifies a device that is not a programmable interrupt handler or does not exist The user defined interrupt table specifies a device that
264. nd on the command module whose RS 232 port is connected to the terminal To change menus command modules 1 Move the RS 232 cable to the desired command module 2 Press the Ctrl D keys on an RS 232 terminal to guarantee that the display terminal interface is in control of the terminal 3 Type ST followed by Return for auto identification of the terminal or ST HP followed by Return for HP terminals 700 94 700 92 26xx 23xx or ST HP70043 followed by Return for the HP 700 43 terminal or ST VT100 followed by Return for VT100 emulators or ST VT220 followed by Return for VT220 emulators or ST WYSE30 followed by Return for WY 30 emulators or ST WYSES0 followed by Return for WY 50 emulators This changes the menu to correspond to the instruments in the servant area of the new command module Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 63 Display Terminal Following the power on sequence or a system reset the screen shows the Menu Tutorial Select an instrument menu see Figure 3 2 This menu allows you to select one of the instruments listed Select an instrument _ 1S TOR EES ECE 21 22 SI a eS TE TS Note Typical instruments are shown Actual choices depend on installed instruments Figure 3 2 Select an Instrument Menu Figure 3 2 shows the Select an Instrument menu when the Flash ROMS Run Load switch on the front of the HP E1406A Command Module is set to Run If this switch is
265. ndefinite block is terminated with the character followed by a carriage return The character is not considered part of the block A definite block only requires the ASCII carriage return character as terminator The definite block starts with This is followed by a single digit that shows the number of digits in the length field which is followed by the actual length of the block not counting the header For instance a block of 1000 bytes would have a definite block header of 41000 Due to the formatting required the size of the block when using the DIAG DOWN CHEC command is twice the length of the data in bytes Appendix D Sending Binary Data Over RS 232 263 Once the block header has been sent the actual data is sent Since the buffer size of the System instrument RS 232 Interface is limited to 79 bytes the buffer must be flushed passed to an instrument parser before it reaches 79 bytes This can be done by sending a carriage return The first carriage return should be included in the binary file after the buffer header Sending it before this would result in the parser determining that there are not enough parameters and producing an error condition Once transmission of the actual data begins a carriage return should be included after every 78 bytes Note The carriage returns are not considered part of the block count After the last byte of data there must be a carriage return to terminate the transmission for a d
266. necessary to clear the Event Register so that if a new event occurs a new SRQ will be generated Take some action after determining which event caused the SRQ The action taken is determined by evaluating the contents of the Event Register e Enable SRQ Handler in SICL with ionsrq e Make sure that all the Enable Masks in all the Status Enable Registers are set to the proper values to propagate the Summary bit s to the Status Byte An SRQ is only generated if the MSS Master State Summary bit in the status byte is set Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status 111 Using Message Available MAV Bits Example Program g ES Message Available MAV bits can be used to determine when data is available The following example program sets up an SRQ handler to be called when there is data in the output queue The program then prompts for SCPI commands If the SCPI command results in data in the output queue such as a query command then the SRQ handler is called and the data is printed The following summarizes the procedure used e Define an SRQ handler to do the following Read the Status Byte using ireadstb ireadstb returns the RQS request for service bit in bit 6 of the status byte After issuing a ireadstb RQS is cleared indicating that the Service Request is being acknowledged A new SRQ will not be issued unless RQS is cleared Using STB will return the Master State Summary in bit 6 and does not affect RQS
267. ng programs For new programs you should use the VXI CONF NUMBer command e Related Commands VXI CONF DLADdress VXI CONF DLISt Determine the Number of Devices Within the System VXI CONF DNUM Query the number of devices enter statement Input number of devices 190 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 CONFigure ETABle Parameters Comments VXI CONFigure ETABle lt address gt links a user defined extender table to the command module resource manager processor The command module must be the acting resource manager in order for the table to be implemented Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric DIAG NRAM ADDR none e Be certain that address specifies the starting address of the area in user RAM allocated using DIAG NRAM CREate where you stored the extender table Tables must start on an even address Note that DIAG NRAM CREate allocates RAM for the table with an even starting address lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats Setting address to 0 zero prevents the parameters defined by the table from being invoked when the system is rebooted however the table remains in user RAM For more information see the User Defined Logical Address and Memory Windows on page 31 Related Commands DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG NRAM ADDRess DIAG DOWNload VXI CONF ETABle Example Link an Extender
268. ng address 142 writing data to 127 132 NRAM ADDRess 142 NRAM CREate 142 NRAM CREate 143 Number of Devices 201 Numeric Parameters 121 O OPC 220 OPC 220 Operation Complete Command 220 Operation Complete Query 220 Operation Status Group 109 condition register 109 161 enable register 109 event register 109 162 163 in status register system 106 negative transition mask 163 274 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index positive transition mask 164 OPERation CONDition 161 OPERation ENABle 162 OPERation ENABle 162 OPERation EVENt 163 OPERation NTRansition 163 OPERation PTRansition 164 Optional SCPI Parameters 122 OUTPut Subsystem OUTP ECLTrgn IMM 103 149 OUTP ECLTrgn LEV IMM 103 149 OUTP ECLTrgn LEV IMM 150 OUTP ECLTrgn SOUR 103 150 OUTP ECLTrgn SOUR 150 OUTP ECLTrgn STAT 151 OUTP ECLTrgn STAT 103 151 OUTP EXT IMM 103 151 OUTP EXT LEV IMM 103 152 OUTP EXT LEV IMM 152 OUTP EXT SOUR 103 152 OUTP EXT SOUR 103 153 OUTP EXT STAT 153 OUTP EXT STAT 153 OUTP TTLTrgn IMM 154 OUTP TTLTrgn LEV IMM 103 154 OUTP TTLTrgn LEV IMM 103 155 OUTP TTLTrgn SOUR 103 155 OUTP TTLTrgn SOUR 155 OUTP TTLTrgn STAT 156 OUTP TTLTrgn STAT 156 P Parameters arbitrary block program data 121 157 158 boolean 121 discrete 121 numeric 121 optional 122 serial interface communications 126 serial interface
269. ngen Germany FAX 49 7031 14 3143 HP E1406A User s Manual 11 Notes 12 HP E1406A User s Manual cut along this line Please fold and tape for mailing Reader Comment Sheet HP E1406A User s Manual Edition 4 Y ou can help us improve our manuals by sharing your comments and suggestions In appreciation of your time we will enter you in a quarterly drawing for a Hewlett Packard Palmtop Personal Computer U S government employees cannot participate in the drawing Your Name City State Province Company Name Country Job Title Zip Postal Code lress i Telephone Number with Area Code y Please list the system controller operating system programming language and plug in modules you are using fold here NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL o FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO 37 LOVELAND CO POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY Measurement Systems Division oo Learning Products Department P O Box 301 Loveland CO 80539 9984 Hold dildo dodo fold here Please pencil in one circle for each statement below Disagree _ _ Agree e The documentation is well organized O O O O O e Instructions are easy to understand O O O O O e The documentation is clearly written O O O O O e Examples are clear and useful O O O O O e Tllustrations are clear and helpful O O O O O e The documentation meets my overall expectations O O
270. ngle pulse using the commands OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt IMMediate Sends a pulse on an ECL trigger line OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt lMMediate Sends a pulse on a TTL trigger line OUTPut EXTernal lMMediate Outputs a pulse at the Trig Out port The pulse width is typically 60 us You can determine the current trigger state source and level settings by adding a question mark to the command used to set that parameter For example OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe Queries state of ECL trigger line OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate Queries level of TTL trigger line OUTPut EXTernal SOURce Queries source of Trig Out port Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status 103 Programming the Status System This section discusses the structure of the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI STATus system and how to program the Status Registers An important feature of SCPI instruments is that they all implement Status Registers in the same way The status system 1s explained in the following sections e General Status Register Model This section explains how Status Registers are structured in SCPI instruments It also contains an example of how bits in the various registers change with different input conditions e Required Status Groups This section describes the minimum required Status Registers present in SCPI instruments These Status Registers cover the most frequently used functions Example programs are also provided
271. ngth Arbitrary Block 121 157 158 Input Buffer configuring 174 175 query setting 174 Insert Line Key 85 Installing command module in mainframe 19 drivers in Flash ROM 135 Instrument control keys 78 driver loading 136 error queue 249 in terminal interface menu 63 selecting 83 Interface buffer clearing 65 buffer query 174 buffer setting 174 175 clear IFC 224 display terminal using 61 87 parity 176 178 RS 232 263 Interrupt enable bits 30 handler 56 line allocation 53 line allocation table 54 57 line allocation table data format 56 line allocation table downloading data into 57 line allocation table errors associated with 59 line allocation table linking command module processor 195 line allocation table query starting address 196 line allocation table table format 55 line allocation table table parameters 55 line allocation table table size 56 line allocation table user defined 195 196 line assigning additional lines 57 58 line default 54 line mainframe extender 198 207 272 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index line VXIbus backplane 54 138 line VXIbus backplane priority level 139 line VXIbus backplane query interrupt acknowledge response 140 line VXIbus backplane query interrupt handling 141 line VXIbus backplane query priority level 139 line VXIbus backplane specifying service routine 141 register configuration 30 INT
272. nse on Line 2 DIAG INT SET2 ON DIAG INT PRI2 5 DIAG INT RESP Handle interrupt on line 2 Set priority to 5 on line 2 code which will initiate an action resulting in an interrupt Read the acknowledge response DIAGnostic INTerrupt PRlority 7 returns the current priority level set for the VXI interrupt line specified by n e PRlority1 through PRlority7 specifies the VXI interrupt lines 1 through 7 e Sending PRlority without an n value specifies VXI interrupt line 1 e Related Commands DIAG INTerrupt PRlority 7 DIAG INTerrupt SETup m DIAG INTerrupt RESPonse Determine Interrupt Priority for Line 4 DIAG INT PRI4 enter statement Statement returns 1 through 7 Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 139 INTerrupt RESPonse DIAGnostic INTerrupt RESPonse returns the interrupt acknowledge response STATUS ID word from the highest priority VXI interrupt line Comments Example The value returned is the response from the interrupt acknowledge cycle STATUS ID word of a device interrupting on one of the interrupt lines set up with the DIAG INT SETup 7 command Bits O through 7 of the STATUS ID word are the interrupting device s logical address Bits 8 through 15 are Cause Status bits Bits 16 through 31 D32 Extension are not read by the System instrument If only bits 0 through 7 are used by the device bits 8 15 are FF the logical address can be determined by adding 256 to the
273. nt s pulse count to 25 you can send either of the following command statements SOUR PULS COUN 25 or PULS COUN 25 120 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Variable Command Syntax Parameter Types Some commands have what appears to be a variable syntax For example DIAG INT SETupin and SYST COMM SERial n BAUD Wow In these commands the n is replaced by a number No space is left between the command and the number because the number is not a parameter The number is part of the command syntax The purpose of this notation is to save a great deal of space in the command reference In the case of SETupln n could range from 1 through 7 In SERial n 7 can be from 0 through 7 You can send the command without the n and a default value will be used by the instrument Some examples DIAG INT SET2 DIAG INT PRI2 5 SYST COMM SER1 BAUD 9600 The following list contains explanations and examples of parameter types you will see later in this chapter e Arbitrary Block Program Data parameters are used to transfer blocks of data in the form of bytes The block of data bytes is preceded by a preamble which indicates either 1 the number of data bytes which follow or 2 that the following data block will be terminated upon receipt of a New Line message with the EOI signal true The syntax is Definite Length Block lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt Where the value of lt non zer
274. nt Status Register The SCPI command STATus PRESet does clear the Standard Operation Status Enable and Questionable Status Enable registers CLS disables the Operation Complete function OPC command and the Operation Complete Query function OPC command Define Macro Command assigns one or a sequence of commands to a macro name The command sequence may be composed of SCPI and or Common commands The name given to the macro may be the same as a SCPI command but may not be the same as a common command When a SCPI named macro 1s executed the macro rather than the SCPI command is executed To regain the function of the SCPI command execute the EMC 0 command Create a Macro to Return the System Instrument s Device List OUTPUT 70900 DMC LIST 0VXI CONF DLIS Note that the name LIST is in quotes The second parameter type is arbitrary block program data The characters that define a command message are prefixed by the characters 0 pound zero For a more information on this parameter type see page 121 Enable Macros Command when enable is non zero macros are enabled When enable is zero macros are disabled Enable Macros Query returns either 1 macros are enabled or 0 macros are disabled for the selected instrument Standard Event Status Enable Register Command enables one or more events in the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in bit 5 the Standard Event Status Summary Bit of the Status
275. nt hierarchies 38 39 ECL Trigger directions 30 ECL Trigger logic level 149 enable register bits 164 External Trigger logic level 152 logical address 168 208 logical address dynamically 24 25 28 logical address HP E1412A Multimeter 25 logical address primary HP IB 168 logical address resource manager 22 28 logical address statically 23 MXI VXI logical address 27 28 negative transition mask 163 166 number of bits 172 178 positive transition mask 164 166 reset bit 206 serial port baud rate 171 sysfail inhibit bit 206 system calendar 181 system clock 182 transmit pacing mode 179 trigger level 103 trigger source 103 TTL Trigger directions 30 TTL Trigger logic level 154 VXI MXI configuration 27 36 Shock Hazard 15 SI terminal interface command 83 263 Soft Reset 206 Specifications 237 248 SPOLL Serial Poll 222 225 SRE 108 114 163 165 221 SRE 108 221 SRQ See Service Request SRQ Standard event group 106 event registers 108 event status group 108 278 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index operation status group 106 109 Start of Line Key 85 Start up Error Messages 255 258 Starting System Operation 60 Static status byte 107 Switchbox card number 72 channel list 72 confirmed SCPI commands 239 electricity 15 information 193 195 Statically Configured Modules 22 logical address 22 Status byte bits 108 byte enable re
276. nt side extender of logical address 6 VXISEL 5 Select logical address 5 VXI CONF MEXT ECLT1 OUT Configure the logical address 5 extender as OUT VXI SEL 6 Select logical address 6 VXI CONF MEXT ECLT1 IN Configure the logical address 6 extender as IN HP E1406A Command Reference 197 CONFigure MEXTender INTerrupt lt n gt Parameters Comments VXI CONFigure MEXTender INTerrupten gt lt direction gt is used to configure the selected mainframe extender to direct the interrupt line specified by lt n gt Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric Oori none lt direction gt discrete IN OUT NONE none Select the logical address of the extender to access with VXI SELect The interrupt line affected is specified in the INTerrupt lt n gt node of the command by a number ranging from 1 to 7 Numbers less than 1 and greater than 7 will generate Error 113 Undefined header A mainframe extender can direct an interrupt line into the VXIbus card cage mainframe that it is plugged into or it can direct the interrupt line out of the card cage If you specify NONE the interrupt line will be disabled and will not be directed in or out Some mainframe extender devices do not support directing interrupt lines These commands will determine whether the specified interrupt line is supported before it attempts to execute the command Ifthe interrupt line is
277. o digit gt equals the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt in the block Indefinite Length Block 0 lt data byte s gt lt NL END gt Examples of sending 4 data bytes 14 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt 3004 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt HO lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt NLAEND gt Boolean Parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false for example ON OFF 1 0 Any non zero value is considered true e Discrete Parameters selects from a finite number of values These parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting An example is the OUTPut EXTernal SOURce lt source gt command where source can be INTernal ECLTrg0 ECLTrg1 TTLTrgo TTLTrg1 TTLTrg2 TTLTrg3 and so on Numeric Parameters are commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation for example 123 123E2 123 1 23E2 123 1 23E 2 1 23000E 01 Special cases include MIN MAX DEFault and INFinity Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 121 The Comments section within the Command Reference will state whether a numeric parameter can also be specified in hex H7B octal Q173 and or binary B1111011 Optional Parameters are parameters shown within square brackets and are optional Note
278. ock amp Trigger Connections Tr 1 o Me m 0 ee 8 RS232 Port E Extraction Levers 6 A HP IB Port Z Figure 1 2 HP E1406A Command Module Faceplate Chapter 1 HP E1406A Command Module Overview 17 Faceplate CLK10 There are four signal connectors on the HP E1406A faceplate which and Trigger function as follows Connectors Clk In This SMB connector allows an external 10 MHz clock to function as the system s slot O CLK10 resource This is a high impedance input with an input range from 40 mV to 42 5 V Clk Out This SMB connector allows the internal slot O CLK10 resource to be routed to other VXlbus mainframes This output is a TTL level output and drives 50 Q Trig In This SMB connector allows an external trigger signal TTL levels to be applied to the system on the trigger line selected TTLTRGO 7 ECLTRGO 1 The input impedance is 5 kQ Trig Out This SMB connector allows an internal trigger on the trigger line specified TTLTRGO 7 ECLTRGO 1 to be applied to an external device This output is a TTL level output and drives 50 Q The HP IB and The HP IB port allows an HP IB cable to be connected from the RS 232 Ports HP E1406A to a computer or to an external disk drive The RS 232 port can be used as a user interface or used for peripheral control if the HP E1406A contains Instrument BASIC IBASIC The RS 232 port is a 9 pin DTE connector Supported terminals include HP 700 92 HP 700 94
279. odule system instrument will write 1 s to the device dependent bits in the device s Control Register This command has been retained for compatibility with existing programs For new programs you should use VXI RESet Reset a VXIbus Device VXI RES 64 Reset device at logical addr 64 VXI RESet resets the selected logical address SYSFAIL generation is inhibited while the device is in the self test state The command waits for 5 seconds or until the selected device has indicated passed whichever occurs first If the device passes its self test the SYSFAIL generation is re enabled If the device fails the self test then SYSFAIL generation will remain inhibited e The return value from this command is the state of the selected device after it has been reset The command returns a lt NR1 gt encoded as follows 0 FAIL 2 PASS 3 READY The state of the A24 A32 enable bit is not altered by this command If the command module is the resource manager it can reset any device within the mainframe If the command module is not the resource manager it can only reset devices within its servant area You cannot use VXI RESet to reset the command module use DIAG BOOT Related Commands VXI SELect 206 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 ROUTe ECLTrg lt N gt VXI ROUTe ECLTrg lt n gt configures the routing of the ECL trigger line specified by lt n gt for all mainframe extenders in the system Parameters Comm
280. of the commander to which the module specified by Laddr is assigned If 1 is specified the module is not assigned to a commander Field is one word Sec Addr 1 30 is the secondary HP IB address assigned to the module specified by Laddr If 1 is specified the secondary address is assigned by default Field is one word Determining the The commander servant hierarchy table has a one word header and three one Table Size word fields The amount of RAM allocated with DIAGnostic NRAM CREate is specified in bytes Since one word is two bytes the amount of RAM to allocate is computed as 2 6 N where N is the number of modules to be configured For example to assign three modules to a particular commander the table size would be 2 6 3 20 bytes DIAGnostic NRAM CREate would be executed as OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 20 40 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 Data Format CAUTION Data can be sent to the commander servant hierarchy table in any convenient format as long as the binary data is preserved This can be accomplished using DIAGnostic PEEK and DIAGnostic POKE by reading the data into a variable in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the Arbitrary Block Program Data format and so forth In the following example this is accomplished by reading the data into 16 bit integer variables in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the ANSVIEEE 488 2 19
281. ommand Separator A colon always separates one command from the next lower level command as shown below ROUTe SCAN MODE Colons separate the root command from the second level command ROUTe SCAN and the second level from the third level SCAN MODE Abbreviated The command syntax shows most commands as a mixture of upper and Commands lower case letters The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability you may send the entire command The instrument will accept either the abbreviated form or the entire command For example if the command syntax shows DIAGnostic then DIAG and DIAGNOSTIC are both acceptable forms Other forms of DIAGnostic such as DIAGN or DIAGNOS will generate an error You may use upper or lower case letters Therefore DIAGNOSTIC diagnostic and DiAgNoSilc are all acceptable Implied Commands Implied commands appear in square brackets in the command syntax The brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the instrument Suppose you send a second level command but do not send the preceding implied command In this case the instrument assumes you intend to use the implied command and it responds as if you had sent it Examine the SOURce subsystem shown below SOURce PULSe COUNt COUNt PERiod PERiod The root command SOURce is an implied command To set the instrume
282. ommander Logical Address 1 Servant Area Switch 40 Servant Area 2 40 Device with Logical Address of 48 Register Based Device with Logical Address of 48 Device with Logical Address of 48 Register Based Register Based Device with Logical Address of 152 Message Based Device with Logical Address of 255 Register Based E1406A F2 1 Figure 2 1 Example of Commander Servant Hierarchy Note the following regarding commander servant relationships e A commander s servant area is its logical address 1 through its logical address its servant area switch setting e If within a given commander s servant area Figure 2 1 there is another lower level commander s logical address 1 the given commander will control the lower level commander However all modules within the servant area of the lower level commander logical addresses 2 41 will be controlled by the lower level commander e If there is a commander outside the servant area of the command module resource manager that commander becomes a top level commander The resource manager will assign all modules within the commander s servant area to that commander or to that commander s lower level commanders e The command module will always be the commander for IBASIC even if IBASIC s logical address 240 is outside the module s servant area There can be mul
283. on This program downloads an array with the data 1 2 3 4 5 to register 32 on a device with logical address 40 in VXIbus A16 address space DIM Dnid_data 1 5 Dimension controller array DATA 1 2 3 4 5 READ Dnld_data Load data into controller array OUTPUT DIAG DOWN SADD H1FCA20 210 This line is sent without termination Send Dnid_data as 16 bit words Terminate after last word with EOI or LF and EOI DRAM AVAilable DIAGnostic DRAM AVAilable returns the amount of RAM remaining available in the DRAM Driver RAM segment which is the amount of RAM in the segment minus any previously loaded drivers Comments e DIAG DRAM CREate does not allocate the RAM segment until after a subsequent re boot e Related Commands DIAG DRAM CREate DIAG DRIVer LOAD DIAG DRIVer LIST ALL Example Determine Amount of Space Left for Drivers in the DRAM Segment DIAG DRAM AVA enter statement Statement returns available DRAM in bytes Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 133 DRAM CREate DiAGnostic DRAM CREate lt size gt lt num_drivers gt creates a Non volatile RAM area for loading instrument drivers DIAG DRAM CREate 0 removes the RAM segment when the system is rebooted Parameters Comments Example DRAM CREate Comments Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt size gt numeric 0 to available RAM or MIN MAX none lt num_drivers gt numeric 0 to available
284. on Mode R active in RUN mode L active in LOAD mode CHECked lt driver_block gt R L Loads the instrument driver contained in the specified driver_block into a previously created DRAM segment or Flash ROM area using error correction FROM AVAilable R L Returns the amount of Flash ROM remaining to hold new device drivers CREate lt num_drivers gt L Creates a driver area in Flash ROM for the specified number of drivers CREate L Returns the maximum number of drivers a driver segment in Flash ROM was created with SIZE R L Returns the amount of Flash ROM available for downloading device drivers INTerrupt ACTivate lt mode gt 0 1 OFF ON R L Enable VXlbus interrupt acknowledgment PRlority n lt level gt MIN MAX DEF R L Specifies the priority level of VXI interrupt line n PRlority n R L Returns priority level of VXI interrupt line n RESPonse R L Returns response from the highest priority interrupt line SETup n lt mode gt 0 1 OFF ON R L Enables or disables System Instrument control of VXI interrupt line n SETup n R L Returns current state of SETupln NRAM ADDRess R L Returns starting address of the user non volatile RAM CREate lt size gt MIN MAX R L Creates a user non volatile RAM segment CREate MIN MAX R L Returns the current or allowable size of user non volatile RAM PEEK lt address gt lt width gt R L Returns an 8 16 or 32 bit value from memory POKE lt address gt
285. on and press Return Press PRV_MENU or ESC to return to the previous menu within an instrument menu or escape from an input prompt Press SEL_INST to return to the Select an Instrument menu see next item Note that when you leave an instrument and return later you return to the same menu location you were at when you left Any information below the Text Output Area will also be redisplayed when you return 64 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 e In addition to the instrument menu keys CLR_INST RST_INST and SEL_INST are helpful when operating instruments These and other utility keys are accessed by pressing the UTILS key see Figure 3 3 Refer to General Key Descriptions on page 77 for information on the RCL_ keys in this menu CLR_INST clears the instrument s terminal interface input and output buffers remote buffers are not cleared and returns to the top level of the instrument menu Press CLR_INST whenever an instrument is busy is not responding to terminal interface control or to abort a command being entered from the terminal interface RST_INST clears all terminal interface and remote input and output buffers and resets the instrument SEL_INST returns you to the Select an Instrument menu SEL_INST is the key under the UTILS key You can easily return to the Select an Instrument menu by pressing f8 twice VOLTMTR_8 ATI A 22 l SEE A TS VOLTMTR_8 TER IAE 22 1 SAMA
286. on Register Negative Transition Mask STAT OPER NTR 64 Set event bit when wait for arm state is entered Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 163 OPERation STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unmask gt sets the positive transition PTRansition mask For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the associated Condition Register will set the same bit in the associated Event Register Comments e See STATus OPERation NTRansition lt unmask gt for parameters and comments Example Set the Operation Register Positive Transition Mask STAT OPER PTR 64 Set event bit when wait for arm state is entered PRESet STATUus PRESet sets each bit in the Enable Register Standard Operation Status Group to 0 Example Preset the Enable Register STAT PRES Preset Enable Register QUEStionable STATus QUEStionable CONDition returns the state of the Condition CONDition Resister in the Questionable Status Group The state represents conditions which are part of an instrument s operation Comments e Related Commands STAT QUES ENABle STAT QUES EVENt Example Read the Contents of the Condition Register STAT QUES COND Query register Note STATus QUEStionable commands are supported by the System instrument however they are not used by the System instrument Queries of the Questionable Data Condition and Event Registers will always return 0 164 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 QUEStionable
287. ontains charts showing the structure and content for the HP E1406A Command Module s System instrument and switchbox terminal interface instrument menus The SCPI commands used and descriptions of menu controlled instrument operations are also included in the charts You may want to refer to these charts as examples for other instrument menus See the appropriate instrument user s manual for menus specific to that instrument Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 87 System Instrument Menu Menu Levels and Content Continued on next page Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 User Entry Command s Used Description SYSTEM CONFIG LADDS VXI CONF DLAD Displays logical addresses of mainframe instruments leina logical address VXI CONF DLIS lt logical_addr gt Displays information about the device at the specified logical address Refer to the Command Reference for details HP IB SYST COMM GPIB ADDR Displays HP IB address E RS232 BAUD READ card number SYST COMM SER n BAUD Read current baud rate SET 300 card number SYST COMM SER n BAUD 300 Sets the serial interface baud rate to 300 1200 card number SYST COMM SER n BAUD 1200 Sets the serial interface baud rate to 1200 2400 card number SYST COMM SER n BAUD 2400 Sets the serial interface baud rate to 2400 9600 card number SYST COMM SER n BAUD 9600 Sets the serial interface baud rat
288. ontents of the Flash ROM PROG DEFine and PROG DEFine CHECked are valid in SYSTEM or LOAD mode The other PROGram commands listed are active ONLY in LOAD mode Subsystem Syntax PROGram SELected DEFine CHECked lt op_sys gt CHECked DEFine DELete SE Lected DEFine PROGram SELected DEFine lt op_sys gt writes the operating system into Flash ROM Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt op_sys gt arbitrary block See comments below none program data Comments e This command returns an error if executed from the System instrument switch set to the Run position e Arbitrary Block Program Data parameters are used to transfer blocks of data in the form of bytes The block of data bytes is preceded by a preamble which indicates either 1 the number of data bytes which follow or 2 that the following data block will be terminated upon receipt of a New Line message with the EOI signal true The syntax is Definite Length Block lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt Where the value of lt non zero digit gt equals the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt in the block Indefinite Length Block 0 lt data byte s gt lt NL END gt Examples of sending 4 data bytes 14 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt 3004 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt b
289. or 200 A24 A32 address allocation table query starting address 201 A24 A32 address allocation data format 50 A24 A32 address allocation downloading data into 50 A24 A32 address allocation table format 48 49 A24 A32 address allocation table size 49 commander servant hierarchy 39 41 commander servant hierarchy table 41 commander servant hierarchy table downloading data into 41 commander servant hierarchy creating 39 commander servant hierarchy data format 41 commander servant hierarchy linking command module processor 186 commander servant hierarchy query starting address 187 commander servant hierarchy table format 40 commander servant hierarchy table size 40 common commands quick reference 235 control sequence functions 85 dynamic configuration 23 24 dynamic configuration data format 24 dynamic configuration downloading data into 24 dynamic configuration linking command module processor 187 dynamic configuration query starting address 188 dynamic configuration table format 23 dynamic configuration table size 24 error messages and causes 251 255 extender table 31 35 extender table data format 33 extender table downloading data into 33 extender table downloading into memory 35 extender table example of 34 extender table linking command module processor 191 extender table query starting address 191 extender table table record 32 extende
290. ource manager scans each slot via the module identification MODID bus until a dynamically configured module is located The module is assigned a logical address that is the lowest available multiple of 8 The resource manager continues scanning until the next dynamically configured module is located The module is assigned a logical address that is the next available multiple of 8 The process continues until all dynamically configured devices have been assigned logical addresses If all multiples of 8 are used the dynamically configured module is assigned the first available address Logical addresses used by statically configured devices will not be assigned to dynamically configured devices Dynamically configured devices will not be assigned logical address 255 A set of address blocked dynamically configured devices will be assigned successive logical addresses beginning with the lowest available multiple of 8 22 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 User Defined Dynamic Configuration The Dynamic Configuration Table Table Format If your system contains instruments comprised of multiple modules that must have successive logical addresses then the modules must be statically configured using their logical address switches or be dynamically configured with the user defined dynamic configuration table The dynamic configuration table covered in this section allows you to override the default configuration pro
291. p QRY_ERR_MASK Continued on next page Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status 115 O an error occurred read the error queue to get the error N errnum 1 while errnum 0 ipromptf id SYST ERRAN d t amp errnum errmsg if errnum 0 printf d s errnum errmsg void main INST id char addr 80 char cmd 255 int opc int idx printf This program provides an interactive environment for SCPI n printf compatible instruments n n printf Enter the SICL address of the instrument to open In printf for example iscpi 24 n gets addr install error handler ionerror _ERROR_EXIT open the instrument specified by the user id iopen addr itimeout id 20000 20 second timeout set up SRQ handler ionsra id srq_hdlr enable MAV bit 4 and Standard Event Status Summary bit 5 in status byte to cause an SRQ iprintf id SRE d n MAV_MASK ESR_MASk enable ERROR Bits to generate a ESR summary message iprintf id ESE d n CMD_ERR_MASK EXE_ERR_MASK DEV_ERR_MASK QRY_ERR_MASK make sure SRE and ESE finished ipromptt id OPCAn d amp opc opc value not used printf nEnter SCPI Commands Queries to Instrument at s n addr printf press return to exit n n while 1 while O gets cmd if 0 strlen cmd break quit sending SCPI Comman
292. perations on channel 4 AUTO DISP MON CHAN AUTO STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on active channel OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHAN1 voltage VOLT1 lt voltage gt Output voltage on channel 1 CHAN2 voltage VOLT2 lt voltage gt Output voltage on channel 2 H CHAN3 voltage VOLTS lt voltage gt Output voltage on channel 3 CHAN4 voltage VOLT4 lt voltage gt Output voltage on channel 4 CURRENT 7 CHAN1 current CURR1 lt current gt Output current on channel 1 CHAN2 current CURR2 lt current gt Output current on channel 2 CHAN3 current CURR3 lt current gt Output current on channel 3 L CHAN4 current CURR4 lt current gt Output current on channel 4 L TEST Enter voltage values in volts Typical examples are 3 5 2 500E 3 Enter current values in amps Typical examples are 05 200E 3 TST Run self test display results 0 pass any other number fail HP E1330A B Quad 8 Bit Digital Input Output Menu Menu Levels and Content Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 User Entry Command s Used Description DIG_I O MONITOR PORTO DISP MON CHAN 0 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on port 0 PORT1 DISP MON CHAN 1 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on port 1 PORT2 DISP MON CHAN 2 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on port 2 PORT3 DISP MON CHAN 3 STAT ON Monitor instrument operations on port 3 AUTO DISP MON CHAN
293. position when it should be in the LOAD position If caused by DMC then macro memory is full The error queue is full as more than 30 errors have occurred Appendix B HP E1406A Error Messages 251 Table B 2 Error Messages and Causes continued Error Messages and Causes Code Message Cause 410 420 430 1000 1500 2002 2003 2005 2013 2016 2022 2023 2024 2101 2102 2103 2105 2108 2110 2111 2112 2114 2115 Query interrupted Query unterminated Query deadlocked Out of memory External trigger source already allocated Invalid logical address Invalid word address No card at logical address Word serial protocol error Byte count is not a multiple of two Config warning RAM Disc Volume contents lost Flash driver area not created Flash driver area already installed Failed Device Unable to combine device Config warning Device driver not found Config error 5 A24 memory overflow Config error 8 Inaccessible A24 memory Config error 10 Insufficient system memory Config error 11 Invalid instrument address Invalid user defined commander logical address Invalid user defined secondary address Duplicate secondary address Data is not read from the output buffer before another command is executed Command which generates data not able to finish executing due to a mu
294. pt line 1 assigned to ladd 0 handler ID 1 VME interrupt line 2 assigned to ladd 24 handler ID 1 VME interrupt line 3 assigned to ladd 64 handler ID 1 VME interrupt line 4 no handler assigned VME interrupt line 5 no handler assigned VME interrupt line 6 no handler assigned VME interrupt line 7 no handler assigned The resource manager allocates interrupt lines to itself and to the other interrupt handlers in the system 8 SYSTEM INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 0 VOLTMTR INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 1 SWITCH INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 2 MBinstr INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 3 SYSTEM instrument started BNO issued to ladd 24 BNO response FFFE Opening HP IB access for message based device at sec addr 03 The resource manager identifies the secondary HP IB addresses used in the system starts the system instrument i e command module issues the Begin Normal Operation BNO command to its direct message based servant and opens HP IB access to the module at secondary HP IB address 03 Figure 2 3 Resource Manager Configuration Without Extenders 46 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 Sequence 1 Display Explanation Testing ROM Testing 512 KB RAM Passed Testing CPU CPU Self Test Passed Non volatile Ram Contents Lost HP IB address 09 Talk Listen command module ladd 0 command module servant area 255 The HP E1406A operating system performs a series of self tests and clears its vo
295. pter 4 C message is available so read in the result iscanf id t buf printf s buf void main INST id char addr 80 char cmd 255 int opc int idx printf This program provides an interactive environment for SCPI n printf compatible instruments n n printf Enter the SICL address of the instrument to open n printf for example iscpi 24 n gets addr install error handler ionerror _ERROR_EXIT open the instrument specified by the user id iopen addr itimeout id 20000 20 second timeout set up SRQ handler ionsra id srq_hdlr enable MAV bit 4 in status byte to cause an SRQ iprintf id SRE d n MAV_MASK make sure SRE finished ipromptt id OPCAn d amp opc opc value not used printf nEnter SCPI Commands Queries to Instrument at s n addr printf press return to exit n n while 1 while 0 gets cmd if 0 strlen cmd break quit sending SCPI Commands send command iprintf id s n cmd check cmd for a if found assume it is a query for idx 0 idx lt strlen cmd idx if cmd idx wait up to 1 minute for srq handler if 0 iwaithdlr 60000 printf ERROR Failed to process Query n o J Continued on next page Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status 113 a break N while there are
296. r Command Error bit 5 Execution Error bit 4 Device Dependent Error bit 3 or Query Error bit 2 If found read the error queue with SYST ERR to print out error messages e Enable SRQ Handler in SICL with ionsrq e Enable MAV bit Message Available Bit and Standard Event Status Register Summary bit in the Status Byte Enable Register for example SRE 48 This will cause an SRQ to arrive when there is a message in the output queue or when the summary bit is set in the standard event status register Enable the Command Error Execution Error Device Dependent Error and Query Error Enable bits in the Standard Event Status Enable Register e g ESE 60 This will cause the Summary bit of the Standard Event Status Register to be set when an error occurs 114 Triggering and System Status Chapter 4 Example Program Cp ga J The following program provides an interactive command line interface N to send SCPI commands to SCPI compatible instruments This utilizes the MAV bit of the Status Byte in order to determine if the instrument is returning any output It also automatically displays any error conditions that may result by querying the Standard Event Status Register include lt sicl h gt include lt stdio h gt Theses are Masks for the Status Byte all bits start at bit O define MAV_MASK 0x10 MAV bit 4 define ESR_MASK 0x20 ESR summary bit 5
297. r Drivers in the Flash ROM Segment DIAG FROM SIZE enter statement Statement returns space available for FROM in bytes DIAGnostic INTerrupt ACTivate lt mode gt enables an interrupt on the VXI backplane interrupt line specified by DIAG INTerrupt SETup n to be acknowledged Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt mode gt boolean 0 1 OFF ON none e When an interrupt occurs and has been acknowledged the response is read with the DIAG INTerrupt RESPonse command If an interrupt occurs on a VXIbus backplane interrupt line and the interrupt acknowledgment has not been enabled there is no interrupt acknowledgment response The interrupt will be held off until the interrupt acknowledge is enabled by either the DIAG INT ACTivate command or DIAG INT RESPonse command ON or 1 enables interrupt acknowledgment OFF or 0 disables interrupt acknowledgment In order for an interrupt to be serviced using the DIAG INT commands the interrupt line n must be assigned to an interrupt handler using the interrupt line allocation table covered in Chapter 2 see page 54 Bit 8 in the Operation Status Register can be used to indicate when an interrupt has been acknowledged see Chapter 4 for details Related Commands DIAG INTerrupt PRlority a DIAG INTerrupt RESPonse DIAG INTerrupt SETup n RST Condition DIAG INTerrupt ACTivate OFF for all lines e Interrupt acknowledgment must be
298. r definition of macro from DMC example 20 ENTER 70900 Cmds Enter into Cmds the definition of the macro LIST 30 PRINT Cmds Cmds 2 14VXI CONF DLIS 40 END In this case the prefix consists of 214 The 2 says to expect two character counting digits The 14 says that 14 characters of data follow Had the returned macro been shorter such as 15 EMC we would read this as 1 counting digit indicating 5 data characters IDN Identity returns the device identity The response consists of the following four fields fields are separated by commas Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number returns 0 if not available Firmware Revision returns 0 if not available 218 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 The IDN command returns the following command string for the HP E1406A System instrument Flash ROMS Run Load switch is in the Run position HEWLETT PACKARD E1406A 0 A4 01 00 This command will return the following string for the HP E1406A Loader instrument Flash ROMS Run Load switch is in the Load position HEWLETT PACKARD LOADER 0 A 01 00 Note The revision will vary with the revision of the downloaded operating system installed in the system This is the only indication of which version of operating system is in the box The major number 01 in the examples indicates whether there have been functional changes made in this downloaded operating system The minor number 00 in the examples indicat
299. r table table size 33 in case of difficulty 86 instrument names for SI command 84 interrupt line allocation table 54 57 interrupt line allocation table data format 56 interrupt line allocation table downloading data into 3T interrupt line allocation table errors associated with 39 interrupt line allocation table linking command module processor 195 interrupt line allocation table query starting address 196 interrupt line allocation table table format 55 interrupt line allocation table table parameters 55 interrupt line allocation table table size 56 monitor mode display annunciators 76 negative error numbers 250 RS 232 correction codes 262 SCPI commands quick reference 226 start up error messages 255 258 status byte bit definitions 108 utility register default configuration 31 Terminal Interface commands SA 83 263 commands SI 83 263 control sequence functions 85 editing the display 77 78 executing commands from 76 features 62 in case of difficulty 86 menus 87 88 91 92 94 97 99 menus control keys 64 65 menus multiple command modules 63 menus select a switchbox 72 menus select an instrument 64 65 menus select keys 64 65 menus switchbox monitor mode 75 menus tutorial 64 menus using 62 63 reading error messages 76 182 249 reading HP IB address 65 select a switchbox menu 72 select an instrument menu 64 65 supporte
300. rchy data to be downloaded to the command module ASSIGN E1406 TO 70900 EOL CHR 10 END INTEGER Cs_hier 1 4 Allocate a segment of non volatile user RAM on the command module Ito store the commander servant hierarchy table OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 8 Restart the system instrument to allocate the user RAM Wait for the Irestart to complete before continuing OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT ON TIMEOUT 7 1 GOTO Complete Complete B SPOLL 70900 OFF TIMEOUT 7 Return the starting address of the table in non volatile user RAM OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM ADDR ENTER E1406 A Download the following the table is valid and one module is being lassigned a secondary address the logical address of the module is 25 lits commander s logical address is 0 the secondary address is 01 DATA 257 25 0 1 READ Cs _hier OUTPUT E1406 USING 3 K DIAG DOWN A 0 OUTPUT E1406 USING W Cs_hier ILink the commander servant hierarchy table to the appropriate algorithm OUTPUT E1406 VXI CONF CTAB A Restart the system instrument to set the user defined configuration OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT END 42 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 e The following errors are associated with the commander servant hierarchy table ERROR 12 INVALID UDEF COMMANDER LADD This error occurs when the user defined commander logical address specified in the table Cmdr Laddr is not a valid commander E
301. received contains the most significant nibble of the least significant byte of the word bits 7 4 The fourth data byte received contains the least significant nibble of the least significant byte of the word to be written bits 3 0 Once all four bytes have been received the word will be written 128 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 DOWNload CHECked SADDress Parameters Comments DIAGnostic DOWNload CHECked SADDress lt address gt lt data gt writes data to Non volatile user RAM at a single address specified by address using error correction It can also write to devices with registers in the A16 address space Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric 0 to 16 777 215 4 HFFFFFE none lt data gt arbitrary block See Parameter Types none program data on page 121 e This command is typically used to send data to a device which accepts data at a single address It is the only way to send binary data to single addresses over a serial RS232C line e Most computers terminate an OUTPUT PRINT or WRITE statement with a carriage return or carriage return and line feed These End Of Line characters must be either accounted for NRAM segment sized to accommodate them or suppressed using an appropriate IMAGE or FORMAT statement Listed below are some helpful methods Control the End Of Line characters with format statements Use the Definite L
302. requested device is not in the mainframe or the command module s servant area then Error 224 Illegal parameter value will be set and no response data will be sent The command returns the following values Logical address An integer between 1 and 255 inclusive 1 indicates that the device has no logical address Manufacturer ID An integer between 1 and 4095 inclusive 1 indicates that the device has no Manufacturer ID Model code An integer between 1 and 65533 inclusive 1 indicates that the device has no model code Device class An integer between 0 and 5 inclusive 0 VXIbus memory device 1 VXIbus extended device 2 VXIbus message based device 3 VXIbus register based device 4 Hybrid device 5 Non VXTIbus device Address space An integer between 0 and 15 inclusive which is the sum of the binary weighted codes of the address space s occupied by the device 1 The device has A16 registers 2 The device has A24 registers 4 The device has A32 registers 8 The device has A64 registers A16 memory offset An integer between 1 and 65535 inclusive Indicates the base address for any A16 registers other than the VXIbus defined registers which are present on the device 1 indicates that the device has no A16 memory Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 193 A24 memory offset An integer between 1 and 16777215 inclusive Indicates the base address for any A24 registers which are pre
303. resetting 124 types of SCPI 121 Parity bits 176 177 configuring 176 query 177 178 PEEK 143 Physical Description 17 PMC 220 POKE 144 Polling 124 Ports HP IB 18 RS 232 18 trig out 102 trigger 102 103 Positive error numbers 250 transitions PTR 105 transitions PTR setting mask 164 166 Power Requirements 238 Power on Status Clear Command 220 Power on Status Clear Query 220 PRESet 164 PROGram Subsystem PROG SELected DEFine 157 PROG SELected DEFine CHECked 158 159 PROG SELected DEFine CHECked 160 PROG SELected DEFine 160 PROG SELected DELete 160 Programming message based instruments 63 status registers 104 status system 104 status system examples 111 117 trigger lines 102 103 trigger ports 102 103 PRV_MENU Key 64 77 PSC 220 PSC 220 Pulse trigger immediate 149 154 sending 103 149 154 sending to trig out port 151 trig out port 151 Purge Macros Command 220 Q Query address A24 A32 allocation table 201 address commander servant hierarchy table 187 address dynamic configuration table 188 address extender table 191 address interrupt line allocation table 196 available Flash ROM FROM 137 138 baud rate 171 condition register state 161 164 data in Flash ROM 160 data low register 201 215 DTR line control 169 ECL Trigger driving trigger source 150 ECL Trigger logic level 150 ECL Trigger state 151 errors 251 event
304. rg lt n gt SOURce INT EXT NONE Selects TTL trigger source OUTPut EXTernal SOURce INT ECLTrg lt n gt TTLTrg lt n gt NONE Selects Trig Out port source When the trigger source is INT the trigger level is set using the OUTPut LEVel commands covered in the next section When the Trig Out trigger source is ECLTrg lt n gt or TTLTrg lt n gt the port is driven by the specified trigger line When the trigger source is EXT the trigger is supplied through the Trig In port Notice that when the source is set it remains set when the trigger state is set from ON to OFF To disable a trigger line or the Trig Out port first set the SOURce to NONE and then set STATe to OFF When the trigger source is set to INT the trigger level is controlled with the commands OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate 0 1 OFF ON Sets ECL trigger level OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate 0 1 OFF ON Sets TTL trigger level OUTPut EXTernal LEVel IMMediate 0 1 OFF ON Sets Trig Out trigger level The commands used to set the TTLTrg and Trig Out port levels use negative logic Thus when a 1 or ON level is specified the trigger line or port is set to a TTL low voltage level In certain VXI applications it may be necessary to send a single trigger pulse rather than continuously driving a trigger line With the trigger line or the Trig Out port enabled STATe ON and the trigger source set to INT or NONE you can send a si
305. rial communication settings for the built in RS 232 interface can be stored in its non volatile RAM only after the DIAG COMM SERial n STORe command is executed These settings are used at power up and DIAG BOOT WARM e Serial communication settings for the HP E1324A RS 232 422 Terminal Interface can be stored in its on board non volatile EEROM only after the DIAG COMM SER n STOR command is executed These settings are used at power up and DIAG BOOT WARM DIAG BOOT COLD will set the serial communication parameters to the following defaults BAUD 9600 BITS8 PARity NONE SBITs 1 DTRON RTS ON PACE XON Set Baud Rate for Plug in Card 2 SYST COMM SER2 BAUD 9600 must be a card number I also 168 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 COMMunicate SERial n CONT rol DTR Parameters Comments Example COMMunicate SERial n CONTrol DTR Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n CONTrol DTR lt dtr_cntrl gt controls the behavior of the Data Terminal Ready output line DTR can be set to a static state ON OFF can operate as a modem control line STANdard or can be used as a hardware handshake line IBFull Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt dtr_cntrl gt discrete ON OFF STAN IBF none e The following table defines each value of dtr_cntrl Value Definition ON DTR Line is asserted OFF DTR Line is unasserted STANdard DTR wil
306. rns the current parity type setting Enables disables receive parity checking Returns the current state of receive parity checking Sets the number of stop bits for receive and transmit Returns the number of stop bits set Links unlinks the transmit and receive pacing protocol Note HP E1324A is always TRAN AUTO ON Returns the current transmit receive pacing linkage Sets the transmit pacing protocol to XON XOFF or NONE Returns the state of transmit pacing protocol Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 229 SCPI Commands Quick Reference Command Mode Description Mode R active in RUN mode L active in LOAD mode DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt R L Sets system calendar DATE MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX R L Returns current date or MIN MAX allowable values ERRor R L Returns oldest error message in Error Queue TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt R L Sets the system clock TIME MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX R L Returns current time or MIN MAX allowable values VERSion R L Returns SCPI version for which this instrument complies VXI CONFigure CTABle lt address gt R Links the commander servant hierarchy table to the command module resource manager processor CTABle R Gets the commander servant hierarchy table starting address DCTable lt address gt R Links the dynamic configuration table to the command module resource manag
307. ro digit gt equals the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt to expect in the block This command can also be used to retrieve data from a device with registers in A16 address space See DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress Related Commands DIAG NRAM ADDress DIAG NRAM CREate DIAG DOWNload Example Upload Data Stored on Non Volatile User RAM DIM HEADERS 6 DATA 1024 6 chars for 41024 header 1 024 chars for data bytes DIAG NRAM ADDR Get starting address of NRAM enter ADD Address into ADD DIAG UPL lt value of ADD gt 1024 Fae 1 Kbyte from address in enter HEADER Strip 41024 from data enter DATA Get 1024 data bytes into the array use enter format so statement will not terminate on CRs or LFs and so forth Line Feed LF and EOI follow the last character retrieved 146 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 UPLoad SADDress DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress lt address gt lt byte_count gt returns the Parameters Comments number of bytes specified by byte_count at address Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt address gt numeric 0 to 16 777 215 RHFFFFFE none lt byte_count gt numeric 0 to 999 999 998 none e lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats e UPLoad is done by word 16 bit access so address and byte_co
308. rument OUTP TTLT4 STAT ON Send a pulse on TTLTO and TTLT4 OUTP TTLTO SOUR INT OUTP TTLT4 SOUR INT Set trigger sources OUTP TTLTO IMM Pulse the TTLTrg0 bus OUTP TTLT4 IMM Pulse the TTLTrg4 bus TTLTrg lt n gt LEVel OuTPut TTLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate lt level gt sets the selected IM Med late TTLTrg trigger line to logic level 0 or 1 Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt n gt numeric 0 through 7 N A lt level gt boolean 0 1 OFF ON none Comments e OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe must be ON for the source to drive the trigger line Setting STATe OFF does not change the source so the signal driving the line is still present Setting STATe back ON sets the source to NONE and de asserts the line e OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce must be INTernal e Related Commands OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt LEVell IMMediate OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe e RST Condition OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt LEVel 0 Example TTLTrg0 Set to Logic Level 1 OUTP TTLTO STAT ON OUTP TTLTO SOUR INT OUTP TTLTO LEV 1 Enable TTLTO Set source to internal Set trigger level 154 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 TTLTrg lt n gt LEVel IMMediate Comments Example TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce Parameters Comments Example TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce Comments Example OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt LEVel lMMediate returns the current logic level of the selected TTLTrg tri
309. rument in local lockout Menus seem to work but nothing happens when reach the bottom level or try to execute a command The terminal interface has been locked out HP IB local lockout You can re enable menu operation by cancelling local lockout from remote or by cycling mainframe power Display cannot be removed from monitor mode Monitor mode was entered DISP MON STAT ON command and the terminal interface has also been locked out HP IB local lockout Either cancel the local lockout or execute DISP MON STAT OFF from remote Display shows Cannot connect to instrument Press any key to continue_ A hardware or software problem has occurred in the instrument preventing it from responding to terminal interface control After selecting an instrument the display shows busy The instrument is busy performing an operation Press Clear Instr to abort the instrument operations and allow the terminal interface to access the instrument Display shows Instrument in use by another display Press any key to continue_ The instrument has already been selected from another terminal interface An instrument can only be attached to one display at a time At the other terminal interface press Select Instr The instrument can now be selected from the desired terminal interface 86 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 System Instrument Switchbox Menus This section c
310. s none program data on page 121 Comments e Most computers terminate an OUTPUT PRINT or WRITE statement with a carriage return or carriage return and line feed These End Of Line characters must be accounted for or suppressed using an appropriate IMAGE or FORMAT statement Some helpful methods Control the End Of Line characters with format statements Use the Definite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format see example on page 121 to send your data rather than the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format e A register address in A16 address space can be determined by 1FC00016 LADDR 64 register_number where 1FC00016 is the base address in the command module A16 address space LADDR is the device logical address 64 is the number of address bytes per device and register_number is the register to which the data is written If the device is an A24 device the address can be determined using the VXI CONF DLISt command to find the base address in A24 and then adding the register_number to that value A24 memory between address 20000016 and address E0000016 is directly addressable by the command module e lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B formats DOWNload is done by word 16 bit access so address must be even e Related Commands DIAG UPLoad SADDress 132 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Example Download Data to a Single Address Locati
311. s you to Open and close channels Scan channels Display module card type and description Reset a selected switch module Monitor a switchbox Selecting the To select the Switchbox press the function key f1 5 which corresponds Switchbox tothe label SWITCH in the Select an instrument menu If the Select an instrument menu is not being displayed press UTILS then SEL_INST Note After you press the function key for SWITCH the screen may show Select SWITCH at logical address _ while the function key labels show two or more logical addresses This means more than one switchbox is installed in the mainframe To select one of the switchboxes press the function key for the logical address key label Figures 3 10 through 3 13 show how to use the switchbox menu Keep the following points in mind when using the menu e The card number identifies a module within the switchbox The module with the lowest logical address is always card number 01 The module with the next successive logical address is card number 02 and so on e The character is required preceding a channel list when executing a switchbox command from the terminal interface or remote When entering a channel list in response to a menu prompt however do not precede it with the E character Doing so causes a syntax error 72 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 Switchbox instrument at logical address 32 secondary address is 04
312. sed by the system until DIAGnostic BOOT COLD is executed When using multiple command modules HP IB cables must be connected from the slot O command module to each command module in the system 58 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 e In this program the command module at logical address 64 has a primary HP IB address of 08 It has a servant pointer setting of 32 thus its servant area is from logical address 65 to logical address 96 If the HP E1411B multimeter has a logical address of 80 its secondary HP IB address is 10 Thus when programming this multimeter its HP IB address is OUTPUT 70810 When programming this command module its HP IB address is OUTPUT 70800 e The following errors are associated with the Interrupt Line Allocation table ERROR 24 INTERRUPT LINE UNAVAILABLE This error occurs when an interrupt line assigned by the user defined interrupt line allocation table is not available Either the line has already been assigned or has been reserved This error also occurs if the line being assigned to an interrupter is not handled by the interrupter s commander ERROR 25 INVALID UDEF HANDLER This error occurs when the logical address specified in the user defined interrupt line allocation table for the interrupt handler Handler Laddr is a device that is not a valid interrupt handler ERROR 26 INVALID UDEF INTERRUPTER This error occurs when the logical address specified i
313. sent on the device 1 indicates that the device has no A24 memory A32 memory offset An integer between 1 and 4294967295 inclusive Indicates the base address for any A32 registers which are present on the device 1 indicates that the device has no A32 memory A16 memory size An integer between 1 and 65535 inclusive Indicates the number of bytes reserved for any A16 registers other than the VXIbus defined registers which are present on the device 1 indicates that the device has no A16 memory A24 memory size An integer between 1 and 16777215 inclusive Indicates the number of bytes reserved for any A24 registers which are present on the device 1 indicates that the device has no A24 memory A32 memory size An integer between 1 and 4294967295 inclusive Indicates the number of bytes reserved for any A32 registers which are present on the device 1 indicates that the device has no A32 memory Slot number An integer between 1 and the number of slots which exist in the cage 1 indicates that the slot which contains this device is unknown Slot 0 logical address An integer between 1 and 255 inclusive 1 indicates that the Slot O device associated with this device is unknown Subclass An integer representing the contents of the subclass register 1 indicates that the subclass register is not defined for this device Attribute An integer representing the contents of the attribute register 1 indicates that the attribut
314. set The Event Register indicates when there has been a positive transition in the Condition Register e Bit 8 in the Condition Register is used by the System instrument command module to indicate when an interrupt set up by the DIAG INTerrupt commands has been acknowledged e Bit 8 in the Event Register generally is the only bit which is used If this bit is set when STAT OPER EVENt is sent 256 is returned e Reading the Event Register clears the contents of the register If the Event Register is to be used to generate a service request SRQ you should clear the register before enabling the SRQ SRE This prevents an SRQ from occurring due to a previous event e Related Commands STAT OPER ENABle STAT OPER ENABle Read the Event Register STAT OPER EVEN enter statement Query if bit s is set STATus OPERation NTRansition lt unmask gt sets the negative transition mask For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the associated Condition Register will set the same bit in the associated Event Register Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by TEEE 488 2 e Executable when initiated e No coupled commands e RST Condition No change e Related Commands STATus subsystem commands SRE STB Set the Operati
315. side of A32 window An A32 memory device is located outside the allowable logical address window range of an MXIbus extender 57 Invalid UDEF LADD window User defined logical address window has incorrect base address or size 58 Invalid UDEF A16 window User defined A16 memory window has incorrect base address or size 59 Invalid UDEF A24 window User defined A24 memory window has incorrect base address or size 60 Invalid UDEF A32 window User defined A32 memory window has incorrect base address or size 61 Invalid UDEF EXT table The valid flag in the extender table is not setto 1 Appendix B HP E1406A Error Messages 257 Table B 3 Start Up Error Messages and Warnings continued Start Up Error Messages and Warnings Code Message Cause 62 Invalid UDEF extender table There are more than 254 records in the extender table data 63 Unsupported UDEF TTL trigger There is an extender table TTL trigger entry for a device which does not support TTL triggers 64 Unsupported UDEF ECL trigger There is an extender table ECL trigger entry for a device which does not support ECL triggers 65 Device not in configure state A message based device was not in CONFIGURE state during reboot 66 INTX card not installed The INTX daughter card on the VXI MXI module is not installed or is not functioning correctly 67 Flash ROM driver contents lost The contents of the Flash ROM driver area have been corrupted
316. some character other than a comma The wrong data type for example number character string expression was used when specifying a parameter Parameter specified in a command which does not require one No parameter specified in the command in which a parameter is required Command header was incorrectly specified A parameter specifies a value greater than the command allows A number was specified for a parameter when a letter is required Parameter suffix incorrectly specified e g SECOND rather than 5S or 5SEC Parameter suffix is specified when one is not allowed The discrete parameter specified is not allowed e g TRIG SOUR INT INT is not a choice The block sent either contained more data then the Flash ROMS could hold or the block count field disagreed with the number of bytes actually sent A parameter other than the channel list is enclosed in parentheses Trigger occurred from a source other than the specified source The parameter value specified is too large or too small The numeric value specified is not allowed Error was encountered while attempting to erase Flash ROMs or Flash ROMs failed to respond correctly to the programming sequence No programmable ROM was found or hardware malfunction An incorrect checksum was read from the programmed ROMs This is indicative of a ROM hardware malfunction or a data transmission error A command was executed with the RUN LOAD switch in the RUN
317. source OUTPut EXTernal STATe lt mode gt enables configuration for example source and level of the command module s Trig Out port Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt mode gt boolean 0 1 OFF ON none e When the Trig Out port is set to logic level 1 it remains set if OUTP EXTernal STATe is set to OFF Setting OUTP EXTernal STATe back to ON sets the Trig Out port back to logic level 0 OUTP EXTernal SOURce is set to NONE e Related Commands OUTP EXTernal SOURce OUTP EXTernal LEVel IMMediate e RST Condition OUTP EXTernal STATe 0 Enable the Trig Out Port OUTP EXT STAT ON OUTPut EXTernal STATe returns the current state ON or OFF of the Trig Out port Query the State of Trig Out Port OUTP EXT STAT enter statement Return the current state Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 153 TTLTrg lt n gt OUTPut TTLTrg lt z gt IMMediate causes a pulse to appear on the specified IMMediate TTL trigger line Comments e TTLTrg lt n gt represents TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 e OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe must be ON and OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce must be set to INT or NONE in order to issue an immediate pulse An error message is generated if STATe is not ON e Related Commands OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe Example Send Trigger Pulse to TTLTrg0 and TTLTrg4 OUTP TTLTO STAT ON Enable the System inst
318. start the system instrument to allocate the user RAM Wait for the Irestart to complete before continuing OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT WARM ON TIMEOUT 7 1 GOTO Complete Complete B SPOLL 70900 OFF TIMEOUT 7 Return the starting address of the table in non volatile user RAM OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM ADDR ENTER E1406 A Download the following the table is valid there is one memory Irecord logical address is 1 VME card A24 address space 24 Ibase address is 300000h 48 0 and memory size is 80000h 8 0 See Comments DATA 257 1 24 48 0 8 0 READ Mem_alloc OUTPUT E1406 USING 3 K DIAG DOWN A 0 OUTPUT E1406 USING W Mem_alloc ILink the A24 A32 memory allocation table to the appropriate algorithm OUTPUT E1406 VXI CONF MTAB A Restart the system instrument to set the user defined configuration OUTPUT E1406 DIAG BOOT WARM END Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 51 Comments e To download the base address and memory size line 270 they must each be specified as two 16 bit words line 250 This can be accomplished as follows Memory Size 30000016 0030 0000 1st word 2nd word 4810 010 Memory Size 8000016 0008 0000 1st word 2nd word 810 010 e The following errors are associated with the A24 A32 address allocation table ERROR 8 INACCESSIBLE A24 MEMORY This error occurs when all or part of an A24 device overlaps the top 2 MB or bottom 2
319. state is entered 166 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 SYSTem The SYSTem command subsystem for the System instrument provides for e Control and access of the System instrument s real time clock calendar SYST TIME SYST TIME SYST DATE SYST DATE e Access to the System instrument s error queue SYST ERRor e Configuring the communication ports HP IB and serial Subsystem Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess SERial n CONTrol DTR lt dtr_cntrl gt ON OFF STANdard IBFull DTR RTS lt rts_cntrl gt ON OFF STANdard IBFull RTS RECeive BAUD lt baud_rate gt MIN MAX BAUD MIN MAX BITS lt bits gt 7 8 MIN MAX BITS MIN MAX PACE PROTocol lt protocol gt XON NONE PROTocol THReshold STARt lt char_count gt STARt MIN MAX STOP lt char_count gt STOP MIN MAX PARity lt type gt EVEN ODD ZERO ONE NONE lt type gt CHECk lt check_cntrl gt 1 0 ON OFF CHECKk SBITs lt sbits gt 1 2 MIN MAX SBITs MIN MAX TRANsmit AUTO lt auto_cntrl gt 1 0 ON OFF AUTO PACE PROTocol lt protocol gt XON NONE PROTocol DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt DATE MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX ERRor TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt TIME MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX VERSion Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 167 COMMunicate GPIB A
320. step of the configuration sequence Included are examples on how to change the sequence using configuration tables stored in non volatile user RAM Note Refer to the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide for information on configuring the HP E1406A Command Module as the resource manager Modules Configured Statically and Dynamically Statically configured modules are plug in modules whose logical addresses are set with logical address switches Dynamically configured modules are plug in modules whose logical addresses are programmed set by the resource manager Identifying Once all power on self tests have completed the resource manager Statical ly identifies all statically configured modules The resource manager retains information such as the module s logical address slot number model Configu red Modules number manufacturer s code and so forth Identifyin Once all statically configured modules have been located in a mainframe y g Dynamical ly and none have a logical address of 255 the resource manager identifies all dynamically configured modules and assigns them logical addresses as Configured Modules gt phere 8 E g follows e The resource manager locates dynamically configured modules by scanning each mainframe slot Refer to the plug in module manual for additional information on setting up the module prior to its dynamic configuration Beginning with the lowest mainframe slot excluding slot 0 the res
321. stic NRAM CREate lt size gt 2 Reset the command module NRAM is created during the boot up process DIAGnostic BOOT WARM 3 The location starting address of the table in RAM is determined with the command DIAGnostic NRAM ADDRess 4 Data is downloaded into the table with the command DIAGnostic DOWNload lt address gt lt data gt 5 The table is linked to the appropriate algorithm in the command module processor with the command VXI CONFigure CTABle lt address gt Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 39 Table Format The format of the commander servant hierarchy table is shown in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 Commander Servant Hierarchy Table Format Valid Flag Number of Modules Laddr Cmdr Laddr Sec Addr Laddr Cmdr Laddr Sec Addr o o o Laddr Cmdr Laddr Sec Addr The table parameters are Valid Flag 1 0 1 indicates the table is valid and the modules should be configured accordingly O zero will cause an error message Error 38 Valid Flag is part of the table header and is represented by the upper eight bits of the header word Number of Modules 1 254 is the number of entries in the table Number of Modules is part of the table header and is represented by the lower eight bits of the header word Laddr is the logical address of the module which is assigned a new commander or new secondary HP IB address Field is one word Cmdr Laddr is the logical address
322. support the specified trigger It will attempt to direct all extenders that do support the specified trigger even if it encounters some extenders that do not e This command can only be executed by the System instrument in a command module that is serving as resource manager for the entire VXIbus system Related Commands VXI SELect VXI ROUTe INTerrupt lt n gt VXI ROUTe ECLTrg lt n gt VXI CONFigure MEXTernal SELect vxi SELect lt logical_addr gt specifies the logical address to be used by many subsequent commands in the VXI subsystem Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt logical_addr gt numeric Must round to 0 through 255 none Comments e The RST default value for logical_addr is that no logical address is selected i e 1 All other commands which require a logical address to be selected will respond with Error 221 Settings conflict if no instruments logical address is selected e When a command encounters an Error 240 Hardware error the equivalent of a RST is executed This will cause the selected logical address to be set to 1 e Related Commands VXI CONFigure LADDress Example Select a Logical Address VXI SEL 64 Sets the logical address to be used by subsequent VXI subsystem commands to 64 208 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 SELect vxI SELect returns the logical address which will be used by many subsequent commands
323. t ee IE SCPI command used SYST DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt Figure 3 8 Setting the System Clock and Calendar 70 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 Select an instrument _ IRG 21 22 So 7 ee TS RATA amp RS 232 S 1 SIC 7 3 UTILS 100058007 E gt IE S 1 SI oS eS Note The RESET selection in this menu is equivalent to executing DIAG BOOT which has the same effect as cycling the mainframe power Pressing RST_INST from the System instrument menu is equivalent to sending the RST command to the System instrument Figure 3 9 Resetting the System Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 71 Using the Loader The Loader instrument appears on the Select an instrument menu Instrument when the Flash ROMS Run Load switch on the front of the HP E1406A Command Module is set to Load This instrument allows you to Read the command module HP IB address Configure the RS 232 port s Set the system clock and calendar Reset the system Using the The instrument menus allow you to access the most used instrument Switchbox Menu _ functions or to monitor an instrument monitor mode while it is being controlled from remote The Switchbox menu is used as an example to show you how to use the instrument menus Menus are available for many but not all instruments See your instrument user s manual for more information on a particular instrument s menu The Switchbox menu allow
324. t EXTernal IMMediate causes a pulse to appear on the HP E1406A Command Module s front panel Trig Out SMB port e OUTP EXTernal STATe must be ON and OUTP EXTernal SOURce must be INT or NONE e Related Commands OUTP EXTernal STATe OUTP EXTernal SOURce Send Trigger Pulse to Trig Out Port OUTP EXT STAT ON Enable Trig Out port OUTP EXT SOUR INT Set trigger source OUTP EXT IMM Pulse Trig Out Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 151 EXTernal LEVel IMMediate Parameters Comments Example EXTernal LEVel IMMediate Example EXTernal SOURce Parameters Comments OUTPut EXTernal LEVel IMMediate lt level gt sets the Trig Out port to a logic level of 0 or 1 Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt level gt boolean 0 1 OFF ON none e OUTP EXTernal STATe must be ON e OUTP EXTernal SOURce must be INTernal Once the level of the Trig Out port is set to logic level 1 it remains set if OUTP EXTernal STATe OFF is set Setting OUTP EXTernal STATe back to ON sets the output back to logic level 0 and sets OUTP EXTernal SOURce to NONE Related Commands OUTP EXTernal LEVel IMMediate OUTP EXTernal SOURce OUTP EXTernal STATe e RST Condition OUTP EXTernal LEVel 0 Set Trig Out Port to Logic Level 1 OUTP EXT STAT ON OUTP EXT SOUR INT OUTP EXT LEV 1 Enable output Set trigger source internal Set output level OUTPut EXTernal LEVel I
325. t a single bit error The control bit is not included in the check The check bits are a Hamming single bit error correction code as specified by the following table Data Value Check Bits 0 0 1 7 2 6 3 1 4 5 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 2 12 6 13 1 14 0 15 7 Data Bits are the actual data being transferred four bits at a time Each word to be written requires four data bytes for transmission The significance of the data is dependent on the order received The first data byte received contains the most significant nibble of the 16 bit word to be written bits 15 12 The next data byte received contains the least significant nibble of the most significant byte of the word bits 11 8 The third data byte received contains the most significant nibble of the least significant byte of the word bits 7 4 The fourth data byte received contains the least significant nibble of the least significant byte of the word to be written bits 3 0 Once all four bytes have been received the word will be written 130 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 DOWNload MADDress Parameters Comments DIAGnostic DOWNload MADDress lt address gt lt data gt writes data into a Non volatile user RAM segment starting at address The user RAM segment is allocated by the DIAG NRAM CREate command Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range
326. t byte gt 0 255 Byte Available 1 0 OFF ON bit 8 1 END bits 7 0 data byte BNO lt top_level gt Begin Normal Operation 1 0 OFF ON BREQuest Byte Request CEVent lt enable gt lt event_ gt 0 127 Control Event 0 1 OFF ON CLEar Clear CLOCk Clear Lock CRESponse lt rspns_mask gt 0 127 Control Response ENO End Normal Operation GDEVice lt cmdr_laddr gt 0 255 Grant Device COMmander Identify Commander RDEVice lt logical_addr gt 0 255 Release Device RHANadlers Read Handlers RHLine lt hand_id gt 1 7 Read Handler Line RILine lt int_id gt 1 7 Read Interrupter Line RINTerrupter Read Interrupters RMODid Read MODID RPERror Read Protocol Error RPRotocol Read Protocol RSARea Read Servant Area RSTB Read STB SLModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 127 Set Lower MODID lines 0 6 0 1 OFF ON SLOCk Set Lock SUModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 63 Set Upper MODID lines 7 12 0 1 OFF ON TRIGger Trigger Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 213 Comments e byte cmd_word event_number hand_id int_id line_number logical_address modid and response_mask may be specified in decimal hex H octal HQ or binary B formats end_bit selects whether the END bit is set in the command top_level selects whether the Top_level bit is set in the command enable selects whether the Enable bit is set
327. t lines 170 sequence functions 85 Cooling Requirements 238 Correction Codes for RS 232 262 Counter Commands 242 243 Creating A24 A32 address allocation tables 48 50 commander servant hierarchy tables user defined 39 dynamic configuration tables 23 24 extender tables user defined 31 Flash ROM driver area 137 interrupt line allocation tables 54 57 non volatile RAM areas 134 CTRL Key 78 D D A Converter Commands 244 Data binary 261 263 264 bits 128 130 159 erasing from Flash ROM 160 reading from Flash ROM 160 Data Format A24 A32 address allocation table 50 commander servant hierarchy table 41 dynamic configuration table 24 extender table 33 interrupt line allocation table 56 57 Data Low Register 53 60 query 201 215 Data Terminal Ready DTR output line 169 query setting 169 DATE 181 DATE 181 DCL device clear 223 Declaration of Conformity 11 Default interrupt line 54 logical address A16 A24 A32 assignments 29 logical address MXI VXI assignments 28 utility register configuration 31 Define Macro Command 217 Definite Block Header 263 Definite Length Arbitrary Block 121 157 158 268 HP E1406A Command Module User s Manual Index Delete Char Key 78 85 Delete Line Key 85 Deleting data from Flash ROM 160 Descriptions A24 A32 addresses 44 annunciators 17 CLK10 connectors 18 command parameters SCPI 121 commander 38 commands types of 119 common
328. t panel and must be done either by the transfer program or manually before starting the transfer program There are two commands SI Select Instrument and SA Select Address that can be used at the Select an instrument interface The Select an instrument interface can always be reached by sending the CTRL D character ASCII 4 over the RS 232 line Once there the System instrument can be reached by sending the command SI SYSTEM followed by a carriage return All output after this command will be directed to from the System instrument until another CTRL D is received The following sequence will make sure that the mainframe is set up and ready 1 Send CTRL D ASCII 4 to get to the Select an instrument interface 2 Send ST UNKNOWN and a carriage return to insure that the interface is set to dumb terminal mode 3 Send SI SYSTEM and a carriage return to get the attention of the System instrument 4 Send CTRL C to clear the system 5 Send RST and a carriage return to put the System instrument in a known state The program must then send the binary data This block of data should include the command DIAG DOWN CHEC followed by the address to download to and an IEEE 488 2 arbitrary block header This block header can be either definite or indefinite The advantage of using an indefinite block header is that you do not need to know the length of the data block The indefinite block header is 0 With the DIAG DOWN CHEC command an i
329. ted as 2 12 N where 2 is the two byte header 12 is the number of bytes per address record 2 2 4 4 and N is the number of address records For example to reserve A24 addresses for two VMEbus devices the table size would be 2 12 2 26 bytes DIAGnostic NRAM CREate would be executed as OUTPUT E1406 DIAG NRAM CRE 26 Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 49 Data Format Data can be sent to the A24 A32 address allocation table in any convenient format as long as the binary data is preserved This can be accomplished using DIAGnostic PEEK and DIAGnostic POKE by reading the data into a variable in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the Arbitrary Block Program Data format and so forth In the next example this is accomplished by reading the data into 16 bit integer variables in the computer and then downloading the data to the table using the ANSVTEEE 488 2 1987 Arbitrary Block Program Data format More information on the Arbitrary Block Program format can be found on page 121 of this manual and in the ANSVIEEE 488 2 1987 document The Table Header The table header is sent as a single 16 bit word which must contain the Valid Flag and the number of address records For a valid table the header is 256 plus the number of records For example to indicate a valid table with two records the header is 258 256 2 CAUTION When downloading data into the A24 A32 address allocation tabl
330. tender table TTL Trigger entry for a MXIbus extender that does not support TTL Triggers ERROR 64 UNSUPPORTED UDEF ECL TRIGGER This error occurs when there is a user defined extender table ECL Trigger entry for a MXIbus extender that does not support ECL Triggers ERROR 66 INTX CARD NOT INSTALLED This error occurs when the INTX card is not installed on the VXI MXI extender You should make sure the INTX card is correctly installed and that it is functioning e The system configuration assigned by the extended device table 1s used by the system until DIAGnostic BOOT COLD or VXI CONFigure ETABle 0 is executed Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 37 Setting Commander Servant Hierarchies In a VXIbus system a commander is a plug in module which controls other plug in modules Control can be a commander such as the HP E1406A Command Module translating SCPI commands and or serving as the HP IB interface for servant modules within its servant area During the configuration sequence the resource manager assigns servant modules to a commander module based on the servants logical addresses and the commander s servant area The concept of the servant area is shown in Figure 2 1 The C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide shows how to set the command module s servant area Logical Address 0 Pop Tevet Commander Servant Area Switch 255 HP E1406A Servant Area 1 255 2nd Level C
331. that the brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the instrument If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter the instrument chooses a default value For example consider the ARM COUNt lt MIN MAX gt command If you send the command without specifying a parameter the present ARM COUNt value is returned If you send the MIN parameter the command returns the minimum count available If you send the MAX parameter the command returns the maximum count available Be sure to place a space between the command and the parameter Linking Commands Linking IEEE 488 2 Common Commands with SCPI Commands Use a semicolon between the commands For example RST OUTP ON or TRIG SOUR HOLD TRG Linking Multiple SCPI Commands Use both a semicolon and a colon between the commands For example ARM COUN 1 TRIG SOUR EXT SCPI Command Reference This section describes the SCPI commands for the System instrument and Loader instrument Commands are listed alphabetically by subsystem and also within each subsystem DIAGnostic Subsystem 0 00 cee eee eee Page 123 OUTPut Subsystem 0 eee eee eee Page 148 PROGram Subsystem 00 0 eee eee eee Page 157 STATUS Subsystem 0 2 e eee eee eee eee Page 161 SYSTem Subsystem 0 0 eee eee eee Page 167 VAL Subsystem a te Gate Sart eave we ele Page 184 122 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 DIAGnostic
332. that will not interfere with windows previously configured The only way the resource manager can know the location s of VMEbus memory is for you to provide this information in the user defined memory table see A24 A32 Address Mapping on page 44 for more details Interru pt Reg ister The rules listed below will be used to assign the configuration of the INTX Co nfig uration Interrupt Register during system start up unless you override them with entries in the user defined extender table The interrupt enable bits in the INTX Interrupt Register on every extender will be enabled for each VMEbus interrupt line that has a VXIbus handler assigned The interrupt enable bits in the INTX Interrupt Register on every extender will be disabled for each VMEbus interrupt line that has no VXIbus handler assigned For every VMEbus interrupt line that has a VXIbus interrupt handler assigned the direction will be set on each extender such that an interrupt on that line will be routed towards the VMEbus backplane that contains the handler TTL Trigger The TTL Trigger Register will be set to COCO16 TTL Triggers disabled for Reg ister al remote and local extenders that support TTL Triggers You may enable Configuration TTL Triggers and set the TTL Trigger directions with the extender table ECL Trigger The ECL Trigger Register will be set to COC016 ECL Triggers disabled for Reg ister all remote and local extenders that support ECL Triggers Yo
333. the Event Register Transition Filter bits may be set for positive transitions PTR negative transitions NTR or both Positive means a condition bit changes from 0 to 1 Negative means a condition bit changes from 1 to 0 Transition Filters are read write and are unaffected by CLS clear status or queries They are set to instrument dependent values at power on and after RST reset If there are no commands to access a particular Transition Filter 1t has a fixed setting This setting is specified in the instrument s programming guide or command dictionary Most of our VXI instruments assign the Transition Filter to detect positive transitions only The Event Register latches transition events from the Condition Register as specified by the Transition Filter Bits in the Event Register are latched and once set they remain set until cleared by a query or CLS clear status There is no buffering so while an event bit is set subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored Event Registers are read only The Enable Register specifies which bits in the Event Register can generate a summary bit The instrument logically ANDs corresponding bits in the Event and Enable Registers and ORs all the resulting bits to obtain a summary bit Summary bits are in turn recorded in another register often the Status Byte Enable Registers are read write and are not affected by CLS clear status Querying Enable Registers does not affect
334. the Flash ROMS Run Load switch be set to Run The main sections of this chapter include e System Configuration Sequence ooocooccoocoooo Page 21 e Modules Configured Statically and Dynamically Page 22 e Setting VXI MXI Configuration Page 27 e Setting Commander Servant Hierarchies Page 38 e A24 A32 Address Mapping 0 0 00 e eee eee Page 44 e Interrupt Line Allocation 00 00 0000 00 Page 53 e Starting System Operation 0000000 Page 60 e VXISYSFATL Line our oe etree se Page 60 System Configuration Sequence As mentioned in the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide the resource manager within the HP E1406A Command Module performs the following system configuration sequence when power is applied e Identify all statically and dynamically configured plug in modules installed in the C size mainframe e Set commander servant hierarchies whereby one or more plug in modules control other plug in modules Perform A24 A32 address mapping so modules requiring additional addressing can receive it Allocate interrupt lines to manage communication between interrupt handler modules and interrupter modules e Start system operation Once the power on sequence is completed and the system is started the resource manager is no longer used Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module 21 The following sections describe each
335. the instrument is in the remote state when you send LOCAL LOCKOUT front panel control is disabled immediately for that instrument After executing LOCAL LOCKOUT you can enable the keyboard by sending the LOCAL 7 command or by cycling power The LOCAL 709ss Ss secondary address command enables the front panel for that instrument but a subsequent remote command disables it Sending the LOCAL 7 command removes lockout for all instruments and places them in the local state 10 REMOTE 70900 Set the System instrument remote State 20 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 Disable front panel control for the System instrument and all other instruments that were in the remote State 30 END 224 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 Remote Sets the HP IB remote enable line REN true which places an instrument in the remote state Comments e The REMOTE 709ss ss secondary address command places the instrument in the remote state The REMOTE 7 command does not by itself place the instrument in the remote state After sending the REMOTE 7 command the instrument will only go into the remote state when it receives its listen address In most cases you will only need the REMOTE command after using the LOCAL command REMOTE is independent of any other HP IB activity and toggles a single bus line called REN Most controllers set the REN line true when power is applied or when reset Example REMOTE 7 Sets HP IB REN line true REMOTE 70900 Sets
336. them There is always a command to read and write to the Enable Register of a particular status group Figure 4 4 illustrates the response of a single bit position in a typical status group for various settings The changing state of the condition in question is shown at the bottom of the figure A small binary table shows the state of the chosen bit in each Status Register at the selected times T1 TS 5 5 5 5 5 8 E 5 8 8 E aS 5 8 3 Sz Su Sz Su Sz pu 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 Ba e ahi ow Mn ow nN ow 0 ow o oO wv case a 0 0 0 o ofo 1lofo lofo o o o o ofo cose B 0 1 1 o o o o o 1 o o olli ojolo cose Cc 1 0 1 olojo ifi jojo o o o o ofo Case D 1 110 ofojo iio rojo 01110 olojo Condition TI T2 T3 T4 15 Figure 4 4 Typical Status Bit Changes in a Status Register Chapter 4 Triggering and System Status 105 Required Status Groups All SCPI instruments must implement a minimum set of status groups Some instruments contain additional status groups consistent with the general status register model The minimum required status system is shown in Figure 4 5 Questionable Data
337. tiple IBASICs in the same system since each is a servant to its respective command module Note that there are no VXIbus registers for IBASIC 38 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 User Defined Commander Servant Hierarchies Note The User Defined Commander Servant Hierarchy Table In some systems you may need to assign a servant to a commander that is outside the commander s servant area In other systems 1t may be necessary to change a module s secondary HP IB address or assign secondary addresses to modules whose logical addresses are not instrument identifiers These tasks can be accomplished with the user defined commander servant hierarchy table described in this section Register based instrument drivers that support multiple card sets normally require that the cards in the set have sequential logical addresses When instrument drivers support non sequential logical addresses instruments that consist of non sequential card sets must be created using the user defined commander servant hierarchy table There must be an entry in the table for every card in the instrument card set User defined commander servant hierarchies and secondary HP IB addresses are specified with a commander servant hierarchy table created in the command module The table is created as follows 1 Table space in the command module s non volatile user RAM is made available by allocating a segment of RAM with the command DIAGno
338. to ensure that safety features are maintained 10 HP E1406A User s Manual Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Loveland Manufacturing Center Manufacturer s Address 815 14th Street S W Loveland Colorado 80537 declares that the product Product Name HP IB Command Module Model Number E1406A Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 Incl Amend 1 1992 EN61010 1 1993 CSA C22 2 1010 1 1992 UL 3111 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN55011 1991 Group 1 Class A TEC1000 4 2 1995 prEN50082 1 1995 4 kV CD 8 kV AD ENV50140 1993 prEN50082 1 1995 3 V m TEC1000 4 4 1995 prEN50082 1 1995 1 kV Power Line 0 5 kV Signal Lines ENV50141 1993 prEN50082 1 1995 3 Vrms ENV50142 1994 prEN50082 1 1995 1 kV CM 0 5 kV DM TEC1000 4 8 1993 prEN50082 1 1995 3 A m EN61000 4 11 1994 prEN50082 1 1995 30 10 ms 60 100 ms Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC inclusive 93 68 EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly Tested in a typical HP C Size VXI Mainframe configuration December 30 1995 Ha QA Manager European contact Your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Herrenberger Stra e 130 D 71034 B bli
339. to the Toreturntothe Select an instrument prompt press and hold the Select an Instrument CTRL key then press the D key Prompt 84 Using the Display Terminal Interface Chapter 3 Control Sequences for Terminal Interface Functions The terminal interface provides the keyboard control sequences listed in Table 3 3 These can be thought of as keyboard short cuts for compatible terminals those which provide menu capability Only those functions in the table marked with asterisk operate for UNKNOWN terminal types those which do not support menus An UNKNOWN terminal type has very limited editing capability It will not support the EDIT mode for the optional IBASIC interpreter In the following table IBASIC only Table 3 3 Control Sequence Functions Control Terminal Key Function Sequence Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor CTRL H and moves cursor left Del char Delete character at the cursor position CTRL X Clr gt end Clears line from cursor position to end of line CTRL L Clear line Clears line regardless of cursor position CTRL U Insert line Inserts a blank line at the cursor position CTRL O Delete line Deletes the line at the current cursor position CTRL DEL End of line Move cursor to the end of current line CTRL Z Start of line Move cursor to the beginning of current line CTRL A Return Terminates user entry CT
340. trigger line into the VXIbus card cage mainframe that it is plugged into or it can direct the trigger line out of the card cage If you specify NONE the trigger line will be disabled and will not be directed in or out Some mainframe extender devices do not support some trigger lines These commands will determine whether the specified trigger line is supported before it attempts to execute the command If the trigger line is not supported a trigger not supported error will be returned This command can only be executed by the System instrument in a command module that is serving as resource manager for the entire VXIbus system Related Commands VXI CONF MEXTender INTerrupt lt n gt VXI CONF MEXTender ECLTrg lt n gt VXI ROUTe TTLTrg lt n gt Example Direct TTL trigger line 1 from a card cage with child side extender at logical address 5 to an extended card cage with a parent side extender of logical address 6 VXISEL 5 Select logical address 5 VXI CONF MEXT TTLT1 OUT Configure the logical address 5 extender as OUT VXI SEL 6 Select logical address 6 VXI CONF MEXT TTLT1 IN Configure the logical address 6 extender as IN HP E1406A Command Reference 199 CONFigure MTABle vxI CONFigure MTABle lt address gt links a user defined A24 A32 address allocation table to the command module resource manager processor The command module must be the acting resource manager in order for the table to be implemented
341. ts for a response RHLine lt hand_id gt R Sends a Read Handler Line command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response RILine lt int_id gt R Sends a Read Interrupter Line command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response RINTerrupter R Sends a Read Interrupter command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response RMODid R Sends a Read MODID command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 233 SCPI Commands Quick Reference Command Mode Description Mode R active in RUN mode L active in LOAD mode RPERror R Sends a Read Protocol Error command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response RPRotocol R Sends a Read Protocol command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response RSARea R Sends a Read Servant Area command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response RSTB R Sends a Read Status Byte command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response SLModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 127 R Sends a Set Lower MODID command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response SUModid lt enable gt lt modid gt 0 63 R Sends a Set Upper MODID command to the logical address set using VXI SEL and waits for a response
342. ty Check to ON SYST COMM SERO PAR CHEC ON Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 177 COMMunicate SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive PARity CHECk returns SERial n RECeive the state of parity checking PARity CHECk Example Query Parity Checking SYST COMM SERO PAR CHEC enter statement Statement enters O or 1 COMMunicate SYSTem COMMunicate SERial n RECeive SBITs lt sbits gt sets the SERial n RECeive number of stop bits to be used to transmit and receive data SBITs Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt sbits gt numeric 1 2 MIN MAX none Comments e Attempting to set sbits to other than those values shown will result in an Error 222 Data out of range e While this command operates independently of either the BITS or PARity lt type gt commands there are two combinations which are disallowed because of their data frame bit width The following table shows the possible combinations BITS PARity lt type gt SBITS Frame Bits 7 NONE 1 9 disallowed 7 NONE 2 10 7 Yes 1 10 7 Yes 2 11 8 NONE 1 10 8 NONE 2 11 8 Yes 1 11 8 Yes 2 12 disallowed e DIAG BOOT COLD will set SBITs to 1 e Related Commands SYST COMM SER n REC BAUD e RST Condition No change Example Configure for 2 Stop Bits SYST COMM SERO SBITS 2 178 HP E1406A Command Referenc
343. u can enable ECL Configuration Triggers and set the ECL Trigger directions with the extender table 30 Configuring the HP E1406A Command Module Chapter 2 Utility Register Configuration User Defined Logical Address and Memory Windows The User Defined Extender Table The default Utility Register configuration is shown in Table 2 2 Since the resource manager may have to reboot during the system configuration process for example to download a driver the Utility Register is not a part of the extender table This will help ensure that the SYSRESET signal will propagate throughout the system during a reboot so that all of the cards will receive a hard reset If you wish to alter the contents of the Utility Register you can use DIAGnostic POKE commands directly to the registers Keep in mind that this may alter the default system reboot process Table 2 2 Utility Register Default Configuration Extender Type ACFIN ACFOUT SFIN SFOUT SRIN SROUT Local Extender enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled 1 1 1 1 1 1 Remote Extender enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled enabled 1 1 1 1 1 1 In many systems that use extenders the standard boot up algorithms will not be suitable for your configuration In such systems it will be necessary to unambiguously define your logical address and memory mapping for the boot up
344. ument s menu the PRV_MENU label disappears The screen can show a maximum of five menu choices at a time When there are more than five menu choices function key f6 becomes labeled MORE Press MORE to display the next group of choices By repeatedly pressing MORE you can display all groups of choices After you have displayed all groups of choices pressing MORE again returns to the first group of choices Recalls the last command entered from the terminal interface After recalling a command it can be edited or re executed You can recall from a stack of previously executed commands by repeatedly pressing RCL_PREV When you reach the bottom of the stack the last line in the buffer pressing RCL_PREV does nothing except to cause a beep Recalls commands in the opposite order to that of RCL_PREV Pressing RCL_NEXT does nothing until you have pressed RCL_PREV at least twice Chapter 3 Using the Display Terminal Interface 77 RCL_MENU Instrument Control Keys RST_INST CLR_INST Editing Keys Delete Char Clear gt End Other Keys CTRL Recalls the last SCPI command generated by a menu operation For example reading the time using the menus SYSTEM TIME READ generates and executes the SYST TIME SCPI command A recalled command can be executed by pressing the Return key You can edit a recalled command before you execute it Resets only the selected instrument equival
345. unt must be even e The register address in A16 address space can be determined by 1FC00016 LADDR 64 register_number Where 1FC00016 is the base address in the VXI bus A16 address space LADDR is the device logical address 64 is the number of address bytes per device and register_number is the register from which data is retrieved If the device is an A24 device the address can be determined using the VXI CONF DLISt command to find the base address in A24 and then adding the register_number to that value A24 memory between address 20000016 and address E00000 6 is directly addressable by the command module e Data is returned in the Definite Block Response Data format lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt where the value of lt non zero digit gt equals the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt to expect in the block e Related Commands DIAG DOWNload SADDress Example Upload Data Stored in Non Volatile User RAM enter HEADER enter DATA DIM HEADER 6 DATA 1024 DIAG UPL SADD H1FCA20 1024 This program reads 1 024 data bytes from register 32 on a device with logical address 40 in command module A16 address space 6 chars for 41024 header 1 024 chars for data bytes Request 1 Kbyte from device register 32 Strip 41024 from data Get 1 024 data bytes into the array use enter
346. upt handler All lines are used or duplicate 2125 Invalid user defined handler The user defined interrupt table specifies a device that is not a programmable interrupt handler or does not exist 2126 Invalid user defined interrupter The user defined interrupt table specifies a device that is not a programmable interrupter or does not exist 2127 Diagnostic mode on HP IB address switch bit 6 is set wrong warning only 2128 Resource Manager not in Slot O A command module is configured for slot O and resource manager but is installed in another slot warning only 2129 Warning Sysfail detected A device was asserting SYSFAIL on the backplane during startup 2130 Pseudo instrument logical A physical device has the same logical address as IBASIC 240 address unavailable 2131 File system start up failed Insufficient system resources to allow the IBASIC file system to start 2133 Invalid UDEF memory block Invalid memory block in user defined memory table 2134 UDEF memory block The same base address or memory are specified more than unavailable once in the memory table or the addresses in the specified block are already in use 2135 Invalid UDEF address space The address specified in the memory table is A24 but the device is A32 or vice versa 2136 Duplicate UDEF memory A logical address is specified more than once in the memory LADD table This does not apply to VME devices address 1 2137 Invalid UDEF
347. urce manager default algorithm for interrupt enable set the appropriate field in the extender record see Table 2 4 to 255 Table 2 4 User Defined Extender Table Record Field Disable Field Description Format Range Value 1 Logical Address remote or local extender int16 1 255 n a 2 Logical Address Window Base inti6 0 254 1 255 3 Logical Address Window Size int16 2 256 n a 4 A16 Memory Base Page inti6 0 254 255 5 A16 Memory Window Size number of pages int16 2 256 n a 6 A24 Memory Base Page inti6 0 254 255 7 A24 Memory Window Size number of pages int16 2 256 n a 8 A32 Memory Base Page inti6 0 2541 255 9 A32 Memory Window Size number of pages int16 2 256 n a 10 Interrupt Enable int16 n a 255 11 TTL Trigger Enable int16 n a 255 12 ECL Trigger Enable int16 n a 255 1 The upper byte of this field bits 15 8 is reserved 2 This is Mainframe Extender Register 1216 See the VX 6 Specification or your mainframe extender manual for a definition of this register Interrupts may not be supported by all mainframe extender cards 3 This is Mainframe Extender Register 1416 See the VX 6 Specification or your mainframe extender manual for a definition of this register TTL Triggers may not be supported by all mainframe extender cards 4 This is Mainframe Extender Register 1616 See the VX 6 Specification or your mainframe extender
348. ure FREQuency TRIGger PERiod IMMediate PWIDth SOURCe NWIDth SOURCe Table A 6 HP E1332A Non SCPI Commands CONF lt channel gt SENSe lt channel gt TOTalize EVENt TINTerval LEVel UDCount LEVel SLOPe DISPlay SLOPe MONItor PERiod CHANnel NPERiods CHANnel NPERiods STATe TOTalize STATe GATE POL arity INPut POLarity ISOLate STATe ISOLate STATe MEASure lt channel gt TINTerval 242 HP E1406A Specifications and General Information Appendix A Table A 7 HP E1333A SCPI 1994 0 Confirmed Commands ABORt READ FETCh SENSe FUNCtion CONFigure FREQuency FREQuency PERiod NWIDth FREQuency PERiod APERture PWIDth APERture CONFigure STATus OPERation FORMat CONDition DATA ENABle ENABle INITiate EVENt IMMediate PREset QUEStionable INPut CONDition ATTenuation ENABle ATTenuation ENABle COUPling EVEN COUPling FlLTer SYSTem LPASs ERRor STATe VERSion STATe IMPedance TRIGger IMPedance IMMediate SOURCe MEASure SOURCe FREQuency NWIDth PERiod PWIDth Table A 8 HP E1333A Non SCPI Commands CONF lt channel gt SENSe lt channel gt RATio EVENt TOTalize LEVel TINTerval LEVel SLOPe DISPlay SLOPe MONitor PERiod CHANnel NPERiods CHANnel NPERiods STATe RATio STATE NPERiods NPERiods
349. urn to remote mode LOCAL 7 Issue HP IB GTL to System instrument The instrument will return to remote mode when it is listen addressed LOCAL 70900 Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 223 G roup Execute Executing a group execute trigger will trigger an instrument assuming the Trigger G ET following conditions are true Comments The instrument s trigger source is set to Bus TRIG SOUR BUS command The instrument is in the Wait for Trigger state and The instrument is addressed to listen can be done by sending any command the REMOTE 709ss ss secondary address command or with the LISTEN command For instruments in the servant area of an HP E1406A Command Module only one instrument at a time can be programmed to respond to GET This is because only one instrument can be addressed to listen at any one time GET has no affect on the System instrument Interface Clear IFC Unaddresses all instruments in the servant area of the specified command module and breaks any bus handshaking in progress Example ABORT 7 Local Lockout LLO When an instrument is in remote mode Local Lockout prevents an instrument from being operated from the mainframe s front panel Comments e Example Certain front panel operations such as menu control and display scrolling are still active in Local Lockout mode If the instrument is in the local state when you send LOCAL LOCKOUT it remains in local If
350. user RAM It is the only way to send binary data to multiple addresses over a serial RS232C line e CAUTION Be certain that all of the data you download will be contained entirely within the allocated NRAM segment Writing data outside of the NRAM segment will disrupt the operation of the command module Most computers terminate an OUTPUT PRINT or WRITE statement with a carriage return or carriage return and line feed These End Of Line characters must be either accounted for NRAM segment sized to accommodate them or suppressed using an appropriate IMAGE or FORMAT statement Listed below are some helpful methods Size the NRAM segment a little larger than the expected data block Control the End Of Line characters with format statements Use the Definite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format see example on page 121 to send your data rather than the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Program Data format e lt address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal HQ or binary B formats DOWNload is done by word 16 bit access so address must be even e Be certain that address specifies a location within the user RAM segment allocated using DIAG NRAM CREate if you are downloading a configuration table DIAG DOWNload can change the contents of System RAM causing unpredictable results e This command can also be used to write data to a device with registers in the A16 address space See DIAGnostic DOWNload SA
351. will contain one or more error codes in the form CNFG ERROR n m z See Table B 3 in Appendix B for a complete list of these codes e Cards which are part of a combined instrument such as a switchbox or scanning voltmeter always return the same manufacturer s comments as the first card in the instrument Information in the other fields correspond to the card for which the logical address was specified 192 HP E1406A Command Reference Chapter 5 CONFigure HIERarchy ALL Comments CONFigure INFormation e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI CONF HIERarchy ALL VXI CONF LADDress VXI CONFigure HIERarchy ALL returns the configuration information about all logical addresses in the mainframe or the devices in the command module s servant area if the command module is not the resource manager The information is returned in the order specified in the response to VXI CONF LADDress The information about multiple logical addresses will be semicolon separated and follow the IEEE 488 2 response message format Individual fields of the output are comma separated e Related Commands VXI SELect VXI CONF HIERarchy VXI CONF LADDress VXI CONFigure INFormation returns the static information about the selected logical address see VXI SELect The individual fields of the response are comma separated If the information about the selected logical address is not available from the destination device that is the
352. xample the HP E1411B multimeter s Command Register has an offset of 0816 When you write a command to this register the offset is added to the base address to form the register address 1FC60016 0816 1FC608 6 Or 2 082 30410 810 2 082 31210 260 HP E1406A Command Module A16 Address Space Appendix C Appendix D Sending Binary Data Over RS 232 About This Appendix This appendix describes the procedure for sending pure binary data over an RS 232 interface The formatting described is used in the DIAG DOWN CHEC MADD DIAG DOWN CHEC SADD and DIAG DRIV LOAD CHEC commands This appendix contains the following main sections e Formatting Binary Data for RS 232 Transmission Page 261 e Sending Binary Data Over RS 232 0 0 0 0 o oo o o oo Page 263 Formatting Binary Data for RS 232 Transmission The most straightforward way to send a block of data is to open the data file read the next byte from the file and send it to the System Instrument until you reach the end of file However binary data cannot be sent to the system instrument as is It must be converted into a format that will not conflict with the special characters that the RS 232 interface recognizes This is done by sending only one half byte a nibble at a time To prevent this nibble from being confused with a special character bit 7 of the nibble is set to one This gives all data bytes in the block values greater than 127 so they are not
353. yte gt lt byte gt 0 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt NL END gt e Related Commands PROG SELected DELete Chapter 5 HP E1406A Command Reference 157 SELected DEFine PROGram SELected DEFine CHECked lt op_sys gt writes the operating CHECked _ system into Flash ROM over an RS 232 line Parameters Parameter Parameter Default Name Type Range of Values Units lt op_sys gt arbitrary block See comments below none program data Comments e This command returns an error if executed from the System instrument e Arbitrary Block Program Data parameters are used to transfer blocks of data in the form of bytes The block of data bytes is preceded by a preamble which indicates either 1 the number of data bytes which follow or 2 that the following data block will be terminated upon receipt of a New Line message with the EOI signal true The syntax is Definite Length Block lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt Where the value of lt non zero digit gt equals the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt in the block Indefinite Length Block 0 lt data byte s gt lt NL END gt Examples of sending 4 data bytes 14 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt 3004 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt HO lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt N

HP E1406A Command Module User`s Manual and SCPI

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents